Chauffage-2010-En-Manuel de Service-EDHQ_EBHQ011

Service Manual

Altherma

- Monobloc unit

- E(B\D)(H\L)011-016*V3

- E(B\D)(H\L)011-016*W1

- Remote Alarm / Operation signal

- EKRP1HB

- Altherma Room thermostat

- EKRTW

- EKRTR

- EKRTETS

- Domestic hot water tank

- EKSWW150~300V3/Z2

- EKSWWU150~300V3

- EKHWS150~300V3/Z2

- EKHWSU150~300V3/Z2

- EKHWE150~300V3/Z2

- Solar Kit

- EKSOLHWAV1

ESIE08-02

ESIE08-02

1 Introduction

1.1

1.2

1.3

About This Manual ..................................................................................

Safety Cautions.......................................................................................

Precautions on handling new refrigerants...............................................

i-i i-ii i-vii

1

1

Part 1

System Outline

General Outline: Altherma

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.10

1.11

1.12

1.13

What Is in This Chapter? ........................................................................

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*: Outlook and Dimensions ................................................

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*: Installation and Service Space.......................................

EKSWW150~300V3/Z2: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space.......

1-3

1-4

1-6

1-8

EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space ......

1-10

EKHWE150~300V3/Z2: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space........

1-12

EKSWWU150~300V3: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space .........

1-14

EKHWSU150~300V3: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space ..........

1-16

EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWS*: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space ...

1-18

EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWSU*: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space

1-19

EKRTR / EKRTW: Outlook and Dimensions...........................................

1-22

Physical Limitations and Limits of Operation .........................................

1-23

EKHBDP - Drainpan Kit Necessity..........................................................

1-24

3

4

5

2 Specifications

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6


1-25

Technical and Electrical Specifications for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*......................

1-26

Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKSWW150~300V3/Z2 &

EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2..........................................................................

1-34

Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKSWWU150~300V3 &

EKHWSU150~300*V3 ............................................................................

1-35

Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKSOLHWAV1 ....................

1-36

Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKRTW / EKRTR.................

1-37

3 Functional Diagrams

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4


1-39

Complete System (EBHQ011~016*V3 + EKSWW) ................................

1-40

Electrical Connection Diagram................................................................

1-42

Pipe Connection Diameters ....................................................................

1-43

Table of Contents 1

1

4

ESIE08-02

Piping Diagrams

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

What Is in This Chapter? .........................................................................

1-45

Piping Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3.......................................................

1-46

Piping Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1......................................................

1-48

Piping Diagram for EKSWWU150~300V3 ...............................................

1-50

Piping Diagram for EKSOLHWAV1 .........................................................

1-52

3

4

5 Switch Box Layout

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

5.8

5.9


1-55

Switch Box Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Compressor Module ................

1-56

Switch Box Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Module ...............

1-57

Switch Box Layout for Hydraulic Compartment .......................................

1-59

Switch Box Layout for EKSWW***V3/Z2 .................................................

1-61

Switch Box Layout for EKHWS***V3/Z2 ..................................................

1-62

Switch Box Layout for EKSWWU***V3 ....................................................

1-63

Switch Box Layout for EKHWSU***V3.....................................................

1-64

Switch Box Layout for EKHWE***V3/Z2 ..................................................

1-65

5

6 Wiring Diagrams

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.8

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12


1-67

Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Compressor Compartment ...........

1-68

Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Hydraulic Compartment................

1-71

Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Compartment ..........

1-74

Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Hydraulic Module.........................

1-77

Wiring Diagram for EKSWW150~300V3/Z2 ............................................

1-80

Wiring Diagram for EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2 with EKSOLHWAV1 ..........

1-82

Wiring Diagram for EKHWSU150~300*V3 with EKSOLHWAV1 .............

1-84

Wiring Diagram for EKSWWU150~300V3...............................................

1-86

Wiring Diagram for EKHWE150~300*V3/Z2 with EKSOLHWAV1 ..........

1-88

Wiring Diagram for EKRTR / EKRTW......................................................

1-90

Wiring Diagram for EKSOLHWAV1 Solar Kit...........................................

1-92

7 PCB Layout

7.1

7.2

7.3

7.4

7.5


1-97

PCB Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Compressor Compartment.................

1-98

PCB Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Compartment................

1-104

PCB Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q* Hydraulic Compartment..........................

1-110

PCB Layout for Solar/Remote Alarm (Optional) ......................................

1-112

2 Table of Contents

ESIE08-02

Part 2

Functional Description

1

1

2

General Functionality

1.8

1.9

1.10

1.11

1.12

1.13

1.14

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7


Function of Thermistors ..........................................................................

Forced Operating Mode (Emergency Operation)....................................

2-3

2-4

2-6

Simulated Operation Function ................................................................

Restart Standby ......................................................................................

2-8

2-9

Automatic Restart ...................................................................................

2-10

Forced Thermostat OFF .........................................................................

2-11

Test Run Control .....................................................................................

2-12

4-way Valve Control ................................................................................

2-13

Pump Down and Forced Defrost Operation ............................................

2-14

Defrost Operation....................................................................................

2-15

Freeze Prevention Function ....................................................................

2-17

Crankcase Heater Control ......................................................................

2-18

Benefit kWh Rate Power Supply .............................................................

2-19

3

4

Hydraulic Module Functional Concept

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

2.10

2.11


2-23

Pump Blockage Prevention Control ........................................................

2-24

Pump Operation Control .........................................................................

2-25

Defrost control.........................................................................................

2-27

Cooling operation ....................................................................................

2-28

Heating operation....................................................................................

2-29

H/P hot water heating operation .............................................................

2-30

H/P hot water heating priority function ....................................................

2-31

Booster heater operation ........................................................................

2-32

Backup heater operation .........................................................................

2-33

Emergency operation ..............................................................................

2-35

5

3 Compressor Compartment Functional Concept

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5


2-37

Function Outline ......................................................................................

2-38

Frequency Regulating Functions ...........................................................

2-41

Expansion Valve Regulating Functions .................................................

2-55

Outdoor Unit Fan Speed Control ...........................................................

2-59

Table of Contents 3

ESIE08-02

1

Part 3

Troubleshooting

3

1 Troubleshooting

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.10


General Troubleshooting Flowchart.........................................................

Overview of General Problems ................................................................

3-3

3-4

3-5

Procedure of Self-Diagnosis by Remote Controller .................................

3-24

Fault-diagnosis by Remote Controller......................................................

3-25

Fault-diagnosis manual reset in the memory ...........................................

3-26

Fault Diagnosis by LED ...........................................................................

3-29

Overview of Error Codes .........................................................................

3-34

Overview of the Compressor Compartment Safety Devices....................

3-38

Overview of the Hydraulic Compartment Safety Devices ........................

3-39

4

2

5

Error Codes: Hydraulic Compartment

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9


3-41

“

A1” Malfunctioning Hydraulic Compartment PCB ....................................

3-42

“

C4, 81, 80, HC” Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Hydraulic Module) ....

3-43

“

7H” Water flow too low ............................................................................

3-44

“

8H” Hydraulic Module: Outlet water temperature too high (> 65°C)........

3-47

“

AA” Hydraulic Module: Open thermal protector / fuse of backup heater or booster heater .....................................................................................

3-48

“

C0” Hydraulic Module: Flow switch failure ..............................................

3-51

“

EC” Hydraulic Module: Domestic hot water tank temperature too high (> 89°C)............................................................................................

3-52

Freeze-up Protection Control, High Pressure Control or Hydraulic

Compartment Heat Exchanger Thermistor Abnormality ..........................

3-53

4 Table of Contents

4

ESIE08-02

3 Error Codes: Compressor Compartment

3.8

3.9

3.10

3.11

3.12

3.13

3.14

3.15

3.16

3.17

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.18

3.19

3.20


3-55

“

E1” Compressor Compartment PCB Abnormality ...................................

3-56

“

E3”Abnormal High Pressure (Detected by the HPS)..............................

3-57

“

E4” Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor ..................................................

3-59

“

E5” Compressor Motor Lock ..................................................................

3-62

“

E7” Malfunction of Fan Motor .................................................................

3-64

“

E9” Malfunction of Electronic Expansion Valve......................................

3-67

“

F3” Malfunction in Discharge Pipe Temperature....................................

3-70

“

H3” Malfunctioning HPS System ............................................................

3-72

“

H9, J3, J5, J6, J7, J8” Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Outdoor Unit)

3-74

“

J1” Malfunction of Pressure Sensor .......................................................

3-75

“

L1” Faulty Compressor Compartment PC Board ....................................

3-77

“

L4” Radiation Fin Temperature Increased .............................................

3-79

“

L5” DC Output Overcurrent (Instantaneous) ..........................................

3-81

“

L8” DC Output Overcurrent (Instantaneous) ..........................................

3-83

“

L9” Stall Prevention (Time Lag) .............................................................

3-85

“

LC” Malfunction of Transmission system (Between Control PCB and

Inverter PCB) ..........................................................................................

3-87

“

P1” Open Phase or Power Supply Voltage Imbalance ...........................

3-89

“

P4” Malfunction of Radiator Fin Temperature Thermistor......................

3-90

“

PJ” Capacity Setting Error .....................................................................

3-91

1

3

4

Error Codes: System Malfunctions

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7


3-93

“

U0” Gas Shortage (Malfunction).............................................................

3-94

“

U2” Abnormal Power Supply Voltage.....................................................

3-96

“

U4”, “UF” Malfunction of Transmission between Compartments.............

3-99

“

UF” Malfunction of Transmission between Compartments or Gas

Shortage .................................................................................................

3-102

“

U5” Malfunction of Transmission between Hydraulic Compartment and

Remote Controller ...................................................................................

3-104

“

UA” Malfunctioning Field Setting Switch................................................. 3-105

5

5 Additional Checks for Troubleshooting

5.8

5.9

5.10

5.11

5.12

5.13

5.14

5.15

5.16

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

5.17


3-107

Check No.1 - Checking the Installation Condition...................................

3-108

Check No.2 - Checking the Expansion Valve .........................................

3-109

Check No.3 - Checking the Thermistors .................................................

3-110

Check No.4 - Resistance Conversion Table (Ambient, Coil, Fin) ...........

3-111

Check No.5 - Resistance Conversion Table (Discharge Pipe Sensor) ...

3-113

Check No.6 - Evaluation of Abnormal High Pressure .............................

3-114

Check No.7 - Evaluation of Abnormal Low Pressure ..............................

3-115

Check No.8 - Clogged Points..................................................................

3-116

Check No.9 - Fan Motor Signal Line .......................................................

3-117

Check No.10 - Fan Speed Pulse ............................................................

3-118

Check No.11 - Check for Power Transistor ............................................

3-119

Check No.12 - Check for Inadequate Refrigerant ...................................

3-120

Check No.13 - Check for Excessive Refrigerant Charging .....................

3-121

Check No.14 - Check for Factors Causing Wet Operation .....................

3-122

Check No.15 - Tank Thermal Protector Actuation Check (Sticking

Check).....................................................................................................

3-123

Check No.16 - Magnetic Contactor Actuation Check (Sticking Check)...

3-125

Table of Contents 5

ESIE08-02

1

Part 4

Commissioning and

Test Run

3

2

1 Pre-Test Run Checks

1.1

1.2

1.3


Checks before Test Run ..........................................................................

Test Run Operation (Manual) ..................................................................

4-3

4-4

4-7

Field settings

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4


4-9

Operation of the User interface Inspection / Test Operation Button ........

4-10

Overview of the Field Settings of the Hydraulic Compartment ................

4-11

Overview of the Field Setting on the Compressor Compartment.............

4-34

4

5

3 Test Run and Operation Data

3.1

3.2

3.3

Operation Range E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 .........................................................

4-42

Operation Range E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 ........................................................

4-43

External Static Pressure ..........................................................................

4-44

Part 5

Maintenance and Disassembly

1 Maintenance

1.1

1.2


Maintenance ............................................................................................

5-3

5-4

6 Table of Contents

ESIE08-02

2 Removal procedure: outdoor unit E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

2.10

2.11

2.12

2.13

2.14

2.15

2.16

2.17

2.18

2.19

2.20


Removal of Outside Panels ....................................................................

Removal of Propeller Fan and Fan Motor ...............................................

5-5

5-6

5-7

Removal of Switch Box for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3..........................................

5-9

Removal of PCB Boards for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3........................................

5-10

Removal of Switch Box for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1.........................................

5-11

Removal of PCB Boards for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1.......................................

5-12

Removal of Pressure Sensor and Electronic Expansion Valve for

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3.....................................................................................

5-14

Removal of Pressure Sensor and Electronic Expansion Valve for

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1....................................................................................

5-15

Removal of Thermistor for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 ..........................................

5-16

Removal of Thermistor for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Compartment

5-17

Removal of Compressor .........................................................................

5-18

Removal of Four Way Valve ...................................................................

5-19

Removal of PCB Board for E(B\D)(H\L)Q* Hydraulic Module .................

5-20

Removal of Thermistors for Hydraulic Module ........................................

5-21

Removal of Flow Switch..........................................................................

5-22

Removal of Backup Heater .....................................................................

5-23

Removal of Pump ...................................................................................

5-24

Removal of Expansion Vessel ................................................................

5-25

Removal of Plate Heat Exchanger ..........................................................

5-26

1

3

4

5

Table of Contents 7

ESIE08-02

1

3

4

5

8 Table of Contents

ESIE08-02 Introduction

Part 0

1 Introduction

1.1

About This Manual

Target group

Purpose of this manual

Five parts

This service manual is intended for and should only be used by qualified engineers.

This service manual contains all the information you need to carry out the necessary repair and maintenance tasks for the ALTHERMA.

This service manual consists of an introduction, five parts and an index:

Part

Part 1–System Outline

Part 2–Functional Description

Part 3–Troubleshooting

Part 4–Commissioning and Test Run

Part 5–Maintenance and Disassembly

See page

1–1

2–1

3–1

4–1

5–1

Introduction overview

Note:

The introduction contains the following topics:

Topic

1.2–Safety Cautions

1.3–Precautions on handling new refrigerants

See page

ii

vii

This Service Manual is about ERHQ011~016 / EKHBH(X)016***. Please refer to Service Manual

ESIE06-03 for details on ERYQ005~007 / EKHBH(X)007*** / ERHQ006~008 / EKHBH(X)008.

3

4

5

i

Introduction ESIE08-02

1

1.2

3

4

Safety Cautions

Cautions and warnings

■

■

■

Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.

The caution items are classified into “Warning” and “Caution”. The “Warning” items are especially important since they can lead to death or serious injury if they are not followed closely. The

“Caution” items can also lead to serious accidents under some conditions if they are not followed.

Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items described below.

About the pictograms

This symbol indicates an item for which caution must be exercised.

The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.

This symbol indicates a prohibited action.

The prohibited item or action is shown inside or near the symbol.

This symbol indicates an action that must be taken, or an instruction.

The instruction is shown inside or near the symbol.

■ After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the customer.

1.2.1

Caution in Repair

5

Warning

Warning

Be sure to disconnect the power cable plug from the plug socket before disassembling the equipment for a repair.

Working on the equipment that is connected to a power supply can cause an electrical shook.

If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or inspecting the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the equipment.

If the refrigerant gas discharges during the repair work, do not touch the discharging refrigerant gas.

The refrigerant gas can cause frostbite.

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the welded section, release the refrigerant gas completely at a well-ventilated place first.

If there is a gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it can cause injury.

If the refrigerant gas leaks during the repair work, ventilate the area. The refrigerant gas can generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.

ii

ESIE08-02

Caution

Warning

The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical components of the outdoor unit.

Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair work.

A charged capacitor can cause an electrical shock.

Do not start or stop the air conditioner operation by plugging or unplugging the power cable plug.

Plugging or unplugging the power cable plug to operate the equipment can cause an electrical shock or fire.

Caution

Do not repair the electrical components with wet hands.

Working on the equipment with wet hands can cause an electrical shock.

Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water.

Washing the unit with water can cause an electrical shock.

Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.

Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable when cleaning the equipment.

The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and cause injury.

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit can spill and wet the furniture and floor.

Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled down sufficiently before conducting repair work.

Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot can cause burns.

Use the welder in a well-ventilated place.

Using the welder in an enclosed room can cause oxygen deficiency.

Introduction

3

4

5

iii


1

1.2.2

Cautions Regarding Products after Repair

Warning

3

4

5

Warning

Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable model and appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt to modify the equipment.

The use of inappropriate parts or tools can cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.

When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation site has sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the equipment.

If the installation site does not have sufficient strength and if the installation work is not conducted securely, the equipment can fall and cause injury.

Be sure to install the product correctly by using the provided standard installation frame.

For integral units only

Incorrect use of the installation frame and improper installation can cause the equipment to fall, resulting in injury.

Be sure to install the product securely in the installation frame mounted on a window frame.


If the unit is not securely mounted, it can fall and cause injury.

Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and follow the technical standards related to the electrical equipment, the internal wiring regulations and the instruction manual for installation when conducting electrical work.

Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work can cause an electrical shock or fire.

Be sure to use the specified cable to connect between the indoor and outdoor units. Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.

Improper connections can cause excessive heat generation or fire.

When connecting the cable between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure that the terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.

If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section can cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.

Do not damage or modify the power cable.

Damaged or modified power cable can cause an electrical shock or fire.

Placing heavy items on the power cable, and heating or pulling the power cable can damage the cable.

Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-410A) in the refrigerant system.

If air enters the refrigerating system, an excessively high pressure results, causing equipment damage and injury.

If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leak and repair it before charging the refrigerant. After charging refrigerant, make sure that there is no refrigerant leak.

If the leak cannot be located and the repair work must be stopped, be sure to perform pump-down and close the service valve, to prevent the refrigerant gas from leaking into the room. The refrigerant gas itself is harmless, but it can generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such as fan and other heaters, stoves and ranges.

iv


Warning

When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to disposed of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.

If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.

Cautions

Caution

Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases depending on the conditions of the installation site, to prevent electrical shocks.

Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of combustible gas leaks.

If a combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it can cause a fire.

Be sure to install the packing and seal on the installation frame properly.

If the packing and seal are not installed properly, water can enter the room and wet the furniture and floor.


3

4

1.2.3

Inspection after Repair

Warning

Warning

Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose, then insert the plug into a power outlet all the way.

If the plug has dust or loose connection, it can cause an electrical shock or fire.

If the power cable and lead wires have scratches or deteriorated, be sure to replace them.

Damaged cable and wires can cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.

Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the same power outlet with other electrical appliances, since it can cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.

5

v

Introduction

1

Caution

3

4

Caution

Check to see if the parts and wires are mounted and connected properly, and if the connections at the soldered or crimped terminals are secure.

Improper installation and connections can cause excessive heat generation, fire or an electrical shock.

If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.

Corroded installation platform or frame can cause the unit to fall, resulting in injury.

Check the grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly grounded.

Improper grounding can cause an electrical shock.

Be sure to measure the insulation resistance after the repair, and make sure that the resistance is 1 Mohm or higher.

Faulty insulation can cause an electrical shock.

Be sure to check the drainage of the hydro-box after the repair.

Faulty drainage can cause the water to enter the room and wet the furniture and floor.

ESIE08-02

5

vi


1.3

Precautions on handling new refrigerants

1.3.1

Outline

About Refrigerant

R410A

■ Characteristics of new refrigerant, R410A

1

Performance

Almost the same performance as R22 and R407C.

2

Pressure

Working pressure is approx. 1.4 times more than R22 and R407C.

3

Refrigerant composition

Few problems in composition control, since it is a Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant.

HFC units (Units using new refrigerants) HCFC units

Refrigerant name

Composing substances

Design pressure

Refrigerant oil

Ozone destruction factor (ODP)

Combustibility

Toxicity

R407C

Non-azeotropic mixture of HFC32, HFC125 and

HFC134a (*1)

Quasi-azeotropic mixture of HFC32 and

JFC125 (*1)

3.2 Mpa (gauge pressure) = 32.6 kgf/cm

2

4.15 Mpa (gauge pressure)

= 42.3 kgf/cm

2

Synthetic oil (Ether)

0 0

Single-component refrigerant

2.75Mpa (gauge pressure)

= 28.0 kgf/cm

2

Mineral oil (Suniso)

0.05

None

None

R410A

None

None

R22

None

None

*1. Non-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of two or more refrigerants having different boiling points.

*2. Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of two or more refrigerants having similar boiling points.

*3. The design pressure is different at each product. Please refer to the installation manual for each product.

(Reference) 1 Mpa

1 0.19716 kgf / cm

2

3

4

5

Pressure-Enthalpy curves of HFC-32/125 (50/50wt%) vii

3

4

5

1


■ Thermodynamic characteristic of R410A

Temperature

( )

Steam pressure

(kPa)

Liquid Vapor

Density

(kg/m

3

)

Liquid Vapor

Specific heat at constant pressure (kJ/kgK)

Liquid Vapor

Specific enthalpy

(kJ/kg)

Liquid Vapor

Specific entropy

(kJ/KgK)

Liquid Vapor viii


1.3.2

Refrigerant Cylinders

Cylinder specifications

■

■

The cylinder is painted refrigerant color (pink).

The cylinder valve is equipped with a siphon tube.

Cylinder

Siphon tube

3

Handling of cylinders

Note: Refrigerant can be charged in liquid state with cylinder in upright position.

Caution!: Do not lay cylinder on its side during charging, since it causes refrigerant in gas state to enter the system.

4

1

Laws and regulations

R410A is liquefied gas, and the High-Pressure Gas Safety Law must be observed in handling them. Before using, refer to the High-Pressure Gas Safety Law.

The Law stipulates standards and regulations that must be followed to prevent accidents with high-pressure gases. Be sure to follow the regulations.

2

Handing of vessels

Since R410A is high-pressure gas, it is contained in high-pressure vessels.

Although those vessels are durable and strong, careless handling can cause damage that can lead to unexpected accidents. Do not drop vessels, let them fall, apply impact or roll them on the ground.

3

Storage

Although R410A is not flammable, it must be stored in a well-ventilated, cool, and dark place in the same way as any other high-pressure gases.

It should also be noted that high-pressure vessels are equipped with safety devices that releases gas when the ambient temperature reaches more than a certain level (fusible plug melts) and when the pressure exceeds a certain level (spring-type safety valve operates).

5

ix


1

1.3.3

Service Tools

3

4

5

R410A is used under higher working pressure, compared to previous refrigerants (R22,R407C).

Furthermore, the refrigerating machine oil has been changed from Suniso oil to Ether oil, and if oil mixing is occurred, sludge results in the refrigerants and causes other problems. Therefore, gauge manifolds and charge hoses that are used with a previous refrigerant (R22,R407C) can not be used for products that use new refrigerants.

Be sure to use dedicated tools and devices.

■ Tool compatibility

Compatibility

Tool HFC

R410A R407C

HCFC

R22

Gauge manifold

Charge hose

X

Charging cylinder

Gas detector

Vacuum pump

(pump with reverse flow preventive function)

Weighting instrument

Charge mouthpiece

X

O

O

O

O

X

Reasons for change

■

■

■

■

■

Do not use the same tools for R22 and R410A.

Thread specification differs for

R410A and R407C.

Weighting instrument used for

HFCs.

The same tool can be used for

HFCs.

To use existing pump for HFCs, vacuum pump adaptor must be installed.

Flaring tool (Clutch type)

Torque wrench

Pipe cutter

Pipe expander

Pipe bender

Pipe assembling oil

X

O

O

O

O

O

X

Check your recovery device.

■

■

■

■

Seal material is different between

R22 and HFCs.

Thread specification is different between R410A and others.

For R410A, flare gauge is necessary.

Torque-up for 1/2 and 5/8

■ Due to refrigerating machine oil change. (No Suniso oil can be used.)

Refrigerant recovery device

Refrigerant piping See the chart below.

■ Only

φ19.1 is changed to 1/2H material while the previous material is

"O".

As for the charge mouthpiece and packing, 1/2UNF20 is necessary for mouthpiece size of charge hose.

x


Copper tube material and thickness

Pipe size

φ6.4

φ9.5

φ12.7

φ15.9

φ19.1

* O: Soft (Annealed)

H: Hard (Drawn)

Material

O

O

O

O

O

R407C

Thickness t (mm)

0.8

0.8

0.8

1.0

1.0

Material

O

O

O

O

1/2H

R410A

Thickness t (mm)

0.8

0.8

0.8

1.0

1.0

3

Flaring tool

4

Flare gauge

5

■ Specifications

• Dimension A

Nominal size

1/4

3/8

1/2

5/8

3/4

Tube O.D.

Do

6.35

9.52

12.70

15.88

19.05

Class-2 (R410A)

9.1

13.2

16.6

19.7

24.0

A

+0

-0.4

Class-1 (Conventional)

9.0

13.0

16.2

19.4

23.3

xi

ESIE08-02

1

Introduction

■ Differences

• Change of dimension A

Dimension A

3

4

Torque wrench

For class-1: R407C

For class-2: R410A

Conventional flaring tools can be used when the work process is changed. (change of work process)

Previously, a pipe extension margin of 0 to 0.5mm was provided for flaring. For R410A air conditioners, perform pipe flaring with a pipe extension margin of 1.0 to 1.5 mm. (For clutch type only)

Conventional tool with pipe extension margin adjustment can be used.

5

■ Specifications

• Dimension B

Nominal size

1/2

5/8

Unit:mm

Class-1

24

27

No change in tightening torque

No change in pipes of other sizes

■

Differences

• Change of dimension B

Only 1/2", 5/8" are extended

Class-2

26

29

Previous

For class-1: R407C

For class-2: R410A

24

27

Dimension B xii


Vacuum pump with check valve

Vacuum pump adaptor

(Reverse flow preventive vacuum adaptor)

Leak tester

■ Specifications

• Discharge speed

50 l/min (50Hz)

60 l/min (60Hz)

• Suction port UNF7/16-20(1/4 Flare)

UNF1/2-20(5/16 Flare) with adaptor z Maximum degree of vacuum

Select a vacuum pump which is able to keep the vacuum degree of the system in excess of -100.7 kpa (5 torr – 755 mmHg)

■ Differences

• Equipped with function to prevent reverse oil flow

• Previous vacuum pump can be used by installing adaptor.

3

4

5

Refrigerant oil (Air compal)

■ Specifications

• Hydrogen detecting type, etc.

• Applicable refrigerants

R410A, R407C, R404A, R507A, R134a, etc.

■ Differences

• Previous testers detected chlorine. Since HFCs do not contain chlorine, new tester detects hydrogen.

■

Specifications

• Contains synthetic oil, therefore it can be used for piping work of every refrigerant cycle.

• Offers high rust resistance and stability over long period of time.

■

Differences

• Can be used for R410A and R22 units.

xiii


1

Gauge manifold for

R410A

3

4

5

Charge hose for

R410A

■ Specifications

• High pressure gauge

- 0.1 to 5.3 MPa (-76 cmHg to 53 kg/cm

2

)

• Low pressure gauge

- 0.1 to 3.8 MPa (-76 cmHg to 38 kg/cm

• 1/4"

→ 5/16" (2min → 2.5min)

2

)

• No oil is used in pressure test of gauges.

→ For prevention of contamination

• Temperature scale indicates the relationship between pressure and temperature in gas saturated state.

■

Differences

• Change in pressure

• Change in service port diameter

(Hose with ball valve)

■ Specifications

• Working pressure 5.08 MPa (51.8 kg/cm

2

)

• Rupture pressure 25.4 MPa (259 kg/cm

2

)

• Available with and without hand-operate valve that prevents refrigerant from outflow.

■ Differences

• Pressure proof hose

• Change in service port diameter

• Use of nylon coated material for HFC resistance xiv


Charging cylinder

Can not be used

Weigher for refrigerant charge

■ Specifications

• Use weigher for refrigerant charge listed below to charge directly from refrigerant cylinder.

■ Differences

• The cylinder can not be used for mixed refrigerant since mixing ratio is changed during charging.

When R410A is charged in liquid state using charging cylinder, foaming phenomenon is generated inside charging cylinder.

3

4

Charge mouthpiece

■ Specifications

• High accuracy

TA101A (for 10-kg cylinder) = ± 2g

TA101B (for 20-kg cylinder) = ± 5g

• Equipped with pressure-resistant sight glass to check liquid refrigerant charging.

• A manifold with separate ports for HFCs and previous refrigerants is equipped as standard accessories.

■ Differences

• Measurement is based on weight to prevent change of mixing ratio during charging.

5

■

Specifications

• For R410A, 1/4"

→ 5/16" (2min → 2.5min)

• Material is changed from CR to H-NBR.

■ Differences

• Change of thread specification on hose connection side (For the R410A use)

• Change of sealer material for the HFCs use.

xv

3

4

5

1

Introduction

xvi

ESIE08-02

ESIE08-02

What is in this part?

This part contains the following chapters:

Chapter

1–General Outline: Altherma

2–Specifications

3–Functional Diagrams

4–Piping Diagrams

5–Switch Box Layout

6–Wiring Diagrams

7–PCB Layout

Part 1

System Outline

1 4

3

See page

1–3

1–25

1–39

1–45

1–55

1–67

1–97

4

5

Part 1 – System Outline 1–1

ESIE08-02

11

3

5

1–2 Part 1 – System Outline

ESIE08-02 General Outline: Altherma

Part 1

1

1 General Outline: Altherma

1.1

What Is in This Chapter?

Introduction

General outline

This chapter contains the following information on the Altherma:

■

■

■

■

■

Outlook and dimensions

Installation and service space

Components

Physical limitations and limits of operation

Drainpan kit necessity

This chapter contains the following general outlines:

Topic

1.2–E(B\D)(H\L)Q*: Outlook and Dimensions

1.3–E(B\D)(H\L)Q*: Installation and Service Space

1.4–EKSWW150~300V3/Z2: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space

1.5–EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space

1.6–EKHWE150~300V3/Z2: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space

1.7–EKSWWU150~300V3: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space

1.8–EKHWSU150~300V3: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space

1.9–EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWS*: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space

1.10–EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWSU*: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space

1.11–EKRTR / EKRTW: Outlook and Dimensions

1.12–Physical Limitations and Limits of Operation

1.13–EKHBDP - Drainpan Kit Necessity

3

4

See page

1–4

1–6

1–8

1–10

1–12

1–14

1–16

1–18

1–19

1–22

1–23

1–24

5

Part 1 – System Outline

1–3


11

1.2

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*: Outlook and Dimensions

Outlook and dimensions

The illustration below shows the outlook and the dimensions of the unit (mm).

240 955 240

ESIE08-02

3

4

5

HOLES FOR ANCHOR BOLT 4 x 12M

8 10 15 14 12 16

1435

6

20

7

18a

19

30

343

420

750

CENTRE OF GRAVITY

Cutaway2

Cutaway1

18

21

11

9

17

13

Cutaway3

34

40

208

380

4

5

185 95

374

420

1

95

52

428

619

Installation and service space

See page 1–6.

1–4

2

3


ESIE08-02

Components

The table below contains the different components of the unit.

No.

Component

Centre of gravity

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

16

17

18

19

20

21

Drain outlet

Waterpiping outlet

Waterpiping inlet

Power supply cables intake

Field wiring intake

Service door switchbox

Service door hydraulic module

Service port

Service door compressor module

Pump

Remocon kit (to be installed indoors)

Air purge

Shut-off valve

Blow-off valve

Blow-off drain (flexible hose)

Pressure gauge

Waterfilter

Expansion vessel + (18a) nipple

Switchbox terminals

Switchbox terminals option sanitary warm water tank

Drain & fill valve


1

3

4

5


1–5

General Outline: Altherma ESIE08-02

11

1.3

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*: Installation and Service Space

Installing near a wall or obstacle

Where a wall or other obstacle is in the path of the outdoor unit air intake or exhaust airflow, follow the installation guidelines below (stacked, multiple row).

3

4

5

Not stacked

The illustrations and table below show the required installation and service space (mm).

Suction side obstacle

Discharge side obstacle

Left side obstacle

Right side obstacle

Top side obstacle

Obstacle is present

L1<L2

L2<L1

L1<L2

L1 H

H<L1

L2<L1

L2 H

H<L2

L1<L2

L2<L1

L1<L2

L1 H

H<L1

L2<L1

L2 H

H<L2

A B1 B2 C D1 D2 E L1/L2

100

150

100

100

100

150

100

100

250

100

200

500

500

100

150

500

500

500

500

750

1000

L1 H

500

500

1000 500

1000

1000

1000

1000

0<L1

0<L1

1

/

2

H

1

/

2

H

1000

0<L2

1

/

2

H

1

/

2

H<L2 H

1

200

200

300

300

300

250

300

300

500

L2 H

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

500

500

1500

1000

1250

L1 H

1000

1000

1000

0<L2

1

/

2

H

1

/

2

H<L2 H

0<L1

1

/

2

H

1

/

2

H<L1 H

1

250

300

1500 500 1000

0<L2

1

/

2

H

1

/

2

H<L2 H

2

L2 H

1

2

In these cases, close the bottom of the installation frame to prevent discharged air from being bypassed

In these cases, only 2 units can be installed

This situation is not allowed

1–6


ESIE08-02

Stacked


■

■

■

The illustration below shows the required installation and service space (mm).

Do not stack more than one unit.

+/- 100 mm is required as the dimension for laying the upper outdoor unit’s drain pipe.

Get the portion A sealed so that air from the outlet does not bypass.

1

Obstacles exist in front of the outlet side.

2

Obstacles exist in front of the air inlet.

1

Multiple row

≥ 1000

A

≥ 100

A

≥ 100

≥ 300

3

The illustration below shows the required installation and service space (mm).

1

Installing one unit per row.

2

Installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row.

4

5

≥ 200

≥ 1000

≥ 2000

≥ 100

H

Relation of dimensions of H, A and L are shown in the table below.

L

≤ H

H < L

L

0 < L

≤ 1/2H

1/2H < L

Installation impossible

A

250

300

≥ 600

≥ 1500

≥ 3000

L

A


1–7


11

1.4

EKSWW150~300V3/Z2: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space

Outlook and dimensions -

Service space


47° 47°

150 L 200 L 300 L

47°

400 400 400

3

23°

90°

30° 23°

90°

30° 23°

90°

30°

8

2

4

5

4

5

1

9

6

7

3

8

2

9

6

3

7

4

8

2

5

1

4

5

1

7

3

9

6

580 580 580

ESIE08-02

Required service space around the tank

1–8


ESIE08-02

Components


No.

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

Component

Water mains IN female 3/4’ BSP

Water mains OUT female 3/4’ BSP

Thermistor connection female 1/2’ BSP

Flow (from Hydro-box) female 3/4’ BSP

Return (to Hydro-box) female 3/4’ BSP

Switchbox

Clixon

Connection female 1/2’ BSP

Power entrance


1

3

4

5


1–9

3

4

5


11

1.5

EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space


Service space

The illustration below shows the outlook and the dimensions of the unit (mm)

ESIE08-02

REQUIRED SERVICE SPACE AROUND THE TANK

3 WAY VALVE

Rp 1

1–10


ESIE08-02

Components



No.

9

10

11

12

13

14

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Component

Water mains IN G 3/4’ BSP (female)

Water mains OUT G 3/4’ BSP (female)

Thermistor connection

Flow (from EKHB(H/X)*) G 3/4’ BSP (female)

Return (to EKHB(H/X)*) G 3/4’ BSP (female)

Switchbox

Thermal protector

Anode

Cable entry: Power supply booster heater and thermal protection cable

Re-circulation connection G 3/4’ BSP (female)

Cable entry for EKSOLHWAV1: Power supply from EKHB(H/X)

Cable entry for EKSOLHWAV1: Power supply to EKSOLHWAV1 pump

Thermistor connection (see EKSOLHWAV1)

3 way valve

1

3

4

5


1–11

3

4

5


11

1.6

EKHWE150~300V3/Z2: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space


Service space


350

ESIE08-02

10

4

300L

400

2

9

11

5

1

6

3

13

350

200L

350

400

150L

400

30 30

12

REQUIRED SERVICE SPACE AROUND THE TANK

INSIDE OF SWITCHBOX

7

8

6

150L WALL-MOUNTED

88

Scale 1:5

3-WAY VALVE

14

102

44

3x Rp 1

16

21

WALL PLATE 150L WALL-MOUNTED TANK

175

355

440

Scale 1:5

12

1–12


ESIE08-02

Components


No.

9

10

11

12

13

14

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Component

Cold water inlet: G 3/4 (male)

Hot water outlet: G 3/4 (male)

Thermistor hole

Flow (from EKHB(H/X)*): Rp 3/4 (female)

Return (to EKHB(H/X)*): Rp 3/4 (female)

Switchbox

Thermal protector

Anode

Cable entry

Re-circulation connection: G 3/4 (male)

Thermistor hole (see EKSOLHWAV1)

Wall plate 150L wall-mounted tank

Safety valve connection: G 1/2 (male)

3-way valve: 3x Rp 1 (female)


1

3

4

5


1–13

3

4

5


11

1.7

EKSWWU150~300V3: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space


Service space


ESIE08-02

400

3

6

4

21

20

22

18

19

24

2

5

580

MODEL

EKSWWU150V3

H1

900

EKSWWU200V3 1150

EKSWWU300V3 1600

H2

1015

1265

1715

23

8

17

16

9

≤500 mm

10

≤500 mm

1

7

12

13

15

11

14

TYPICAL INSTALLATION EKUSWW-KIT

REQUIRED SERVICE SPACE

1–14


ESIE08-02

Components


No.

22

23

24

18

19

20

21

No.

10

11

12

13

7

8

9

14

15

16

17


No.

3

4

1

2

5

6

Water connections

Water in (cold)

Water out (hot)

Flow from hydro-box

Return to hydro-box

Temperature relief valve


Connection type

22 mm

3/4” female BSP

3/4” female BSP

3/4” female BSP

1/2” female BSP

Water connections kit

Pressure reducing valve

T-piece (expansion valve)

Expansion relief valve

Adapter (relief valve)

T-piece (to tundish)

Tundish

T-piece (to expansion vessel)

Adapter (expansion vessel)

Expansion vessel

Drain valve

Solenoid valve

Other components

Connection type

22 mm - 22 mm

22 mm - 1/2” female BSP - 22 mm

1/2” male BSP - 1/2” female BSP

1/2” male BSP - 15 mm

15 mm - 15 mm - 1/2” female BSP

22 mm - 15 mm

22 mm - 22 mm - 22 mm

22 mm - 3/4” female BSP

3/4” male BSP

22 mm - 3/4” male BSP

3/4” female BSP - 3/4” female BSP

Switch box

Thermal protector 1

Cable entrance power, booster heater, thermal protector

Power entrance solenoid valve

Control cable solenoid valve

Blind stop + 2 plastic screw-on closing caps for pressure reducing valve

Thermal protector 2 + thermostat

1

3

4

5


1–15

4

5


11

1.8

EKHWSU150~300V3: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space


Service space


MODEL H1 H2 H3 H4

ESIE08-02

3

Rp 1

500 mm

500 mm

TYPICAL INSTALLATION EKUHWB-KIT

REQUIRED SERVICE SPACE

1–16


ESIE08-02

Components


No.

22

23

24

25

18

19

20

21

26

27

No.

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

16

17


No.

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Water connections

Water in (cold)

Water out (hot)

Flow from EKHB(H/X)*

Return to EKHB(H/X)*

Temperature relief valve


Thermistor connection (see EKSOLHWAV1)

Re-circulation hole

Connection type

22 mm

G 3/4 (female)

G 3/4 (female

G 3/4 (female

-

15 mm

G 1/2 (female)

G 3/4 (female)

Water connections kit

Pressure reducing valve

Expansion relief valve

T-piece (to tundish)

Tundish

T-piece (to expansion vessel)

Adapter (expansion vessel)

Expansion vessel

Drain valve

Reducing coupler

Other components

Connection type

22 mm - 22 mm

15 mm - 15 mm

15 mm - 15 mm G 1/2 (female)

22 mm - 15 mm

22 mm - 22 mm - 22 mm

22 mm - G 3/4 (female)

G 3/4 (male)

22 mm - G 3/4 (female)

22 mm - 15 mm

EKUHW2WB Kit: Solenoid valve (only with EKSOLHWAV1) Rp 3/4 - Rp 3/4

Switchbox

Thermal protector 1 + thermostat

Cable entry: power supply booster heater and thermal protector cable

Cable entry for EKUHW2WB: Power supply to solenoid valve

Cable entry for EKSOLHWAV1 & EKUHW2WB: Power supply from EKHB(H/X)

Blind stop + 2 plastic screw-on closing caps for pressure reducing valve

Thermal protector 2 + Thermostat

Cable entry for EKSOLHWAV1: power supply to EKSOLHWAV1 pump

3 way valve 3x Rp1

1

3

4

5


1–17

3

4

5


11

1.9

EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWS*: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space


Service space


410

ESIE08-02

153 153

278

871

460

101

290

971

590

255

220

153 153

278

871

460

101

590 220

1–18


ESIE08-02 General Outline: Altherma

1.10

EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWSU*: Outlook and Dimensions - Service Space



Service space

410

1

153 153

278

871

460

101

290 971

3

4

5

590

255

220


153 153

278

871

460

101

590 220

1–19


11

Components

3

4

5


No.

3

4

1

2

Components

Pump + switch for speed setting

Heat exchanger

EPP casing

Non return valves

9a

9b

10

No.

5

6

7

8

9

Connections

Inlet connection from solar pump station

Return connection to solar pump station

Inlet connection from Altherma indoor unit

Return connection to Altherma indoor unit

EKSOLHWAV1 return connection to the domestic hot water tank heat exchanger

200-300l tank

150l tank

EKSOLHWAV1 inlet connection from the domestic hot water tank heat exchanger

Connection type

3/4” F BSP

3/4” F BSP

3/4” F BSP

3/4” F BSP

3/4” F BSP

3/4” F BSP

No.

11

12

Switchbox domestic hot water tank

Cable entry (Altherma indoor unit)

Cable entry (Pump cable)

No.

13

Accessories (delivered with

EKSOLHWAV1)

Thermistor socket (thermistor solar pump station) (internal diameter 6.1 mm)

Adapter

-

Connection type

3/4” M BSP - 3/4” M BSP 14

For EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWS*

No.

15

16

Other accessories (delivered with

EKSOLHWAV1)

Adapter

Adapter

Connection type

3/4” F BSP - 3/4” M BSP

3/4” M BSP - 3/4” M BSP

For EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWSU*

No.

15

Field supply

Adapter (field supply)

Connection type

3/4” M BSP - 3/4” M BSP

ESIE08-02

1–20


ESIE08-02

No.

16

17

EKUHWA-kit

Solenoid valve

Adapters (solenoid valve)


Connection type

3/4” F BSP - 3/4” F BSP

3/4” M BSP - 3/4” M BSP

1

3

4

5


1–21

3

4

5


11

1.11

EKRTR / EKRTW: Outlook and Dimensions

Outlook and dimensions

The illustrations below shows the outlook and the dimensions of the units (mm).

EKRTW

ESIE08-02

EKRTR

1–22


ESIE08-02

1.12

Physical Limitations and Limits of Operation

Distance between components

The illustrations and table below show the limitations.


1

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

Remark

Domestic hot tank

G & G’

F & F’

H

C

3 way valve

D

Heat emitters

B

Monobloc

J

I

Thermostat

2 way valve

3

4

B

≤ 3 m

Piping water

C

≤ 10 m

Power supply

D F & F’

depend on installation depend on installation

G

12 m

Communication

G’

depend on installation

H

> 0.05 m

I J

depend on installation depend on installation

5

■

■

■

F: Power supply booster + Q2L safety

F': Power supply solenoid valve (UK only)

■

G: Thermistor cable supplied with the domestic hot water tank is 12 m in length. May not be changed.

G': Feedback signal Q2L & Q3L safety (UK only)


1–23


11

1.13

EKHBDP - Drainpan Kit Necessity

Decision graph for

EKHBDP necessity

Leaving water temperature limit to prevent condensation

31.0

Relative humidity 40%



28.0

3

25.0

Maximum leaving water temperature cooling mode = 22 C.

22.0

4

19.0

ESIE08-02

31

28

25

22

19

5

Remark

16.0

16

13.0

12.0

10.0

7.0

20

13

23

25

Example :

With ambient temperature of 25 C and relative humidity of 40%.

If leaving water temperature is below

12 C, condensation on water piping will happen.

10

29 32

7

26

Dry bulb temperature ( C)

1

Refer to psychometric chart for more information.

2

If condensation is expected, installation of EKHBDP - drainpan kit must be considered.

1–24


ESIE08-02

2 Specifications

2.1


Introduction

Altherma

This chapter contains the following information:

■

■

Technical specifications

Electrical specifications

This chapter contains the following specifications:

Topic

2.2–Technical and Electrical Specifications for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

2.3–Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKSWW150~300V3/Z2 &

EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2

2.4–Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKSWWU150~300V3 &

EKHWSU150~300*V3

2.5–Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKSOLHWAV1

2.6–Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKRTW / EKRTR

Specifications

Part 1

1

See page

1–26

1–34

1–35

1–36

1–37

3

4

5


1–25

Specifications ESIE08-02

11

2.2

Technical and Electrical Specifications for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

Technical specifications

Specification

The table below contains the technical specifications.

3

4

5

Casing

Dimensions

Weight of unit

Weight of packing materials

Sound level (nominal)

Sound level (night quiet)

Operation range

Colour

Material

Packing Height

Width

Depth

Unit Height

Machine net weight

Packed machine weight

Width

Depth

Material

Weight

Heating (2)

Cooling (3)

Heating

Cooling

Heating

Sound power

Sound pressure (1)

Sound power

Sound pressure (1)

Sound pressure (1)

Sound pressure (1)

Ambient

Cooling

Waterside (4)

Ambient

Sanitary water

Waterside

Ambient

Waterside

Refrigerant

Refrigerant oil

Type

Charge

Control

N° of circuits

Type

Charged volume

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

011

64 dBA

51 dBA

—

—

42 dBA

—

ED(H/L)Q* AA6V3 ED(H/L)Q* AA6W1

014 016 011 014

64 dBA

51 dBA

—

—

42 dBA

—

Ivory-white

Painted Galvanised Steel Plate

1557 mm

1500 mm

430 mm

1418 mm

1435 mm

382 mm

180 kg

200 kg

Wood, carton, plastic foil

20 kg

66 dBA

52 dBA

—

—

—

49 dBA

—

—

—

51 dBA

—

—

42 dBA

—

43 dBA

—

42 dBA

—

-15°C DB (6)

35°C DB

15°C

55°C

—

—

—

—

-15°C DB (6)

43°C DB

25°C

80°C

R-410A

2,95 kg

Expansion valve (electronic type)

1

Daphne FVC68D

1,0 l

016

—

53 dBA

—

—

43 dBA

—

1–26


ESIE08-02 Specifications

Specification

Main components Air heat exchanger

Fan

Compressor

Pump

Water side heat exchanger

Expansion vessel

Water filter

Specifications Length

N° of rows

Fin pitch

N° of passes

Face area

N° of stages

Empty tubeplate hole

Tube type

Fin Type

Treatment

Type

Quantity

Air flow rate (nominal at

230V)

Cooling

Heating

Discharge direction

External static pressure (Max)

Motor Quantity

Model

Position

Speed (nominal at 230V)

Cooling

Heating

Output

Drive

Quantity

Motor Model

Type

Speed

Motor output

Starting method

Crankcase heater

Type

Nr. of speed

Nominal ESP unit Cooling

Heating

Power input

Type

Qty

Water volume

Water flow rate Min.

Water flow rate Nom.

Water flow rate Max.

Cooling (3)

Heating (2)

Cooling

Heating

Insulation material

Volume

Max. water pressure

Pre pressure

Diameter perforations

Material

ED(H/L)Q* AA6V3 ED(H/L)Q* AA6W1

011 014 016 011 014 016

857 mm

2

1,4 mm

5

1,131 m

2

60

0

Hi-XSS (8)

WF fin

Anti-corrosion treatment (PE)

Propeller

2

— — —

90 m

3

/min 90 m

3

/min 90 m

3

/min

—

—

—

760 rpm

—

—

—

—

—

760 rpm

Horizontal

—

2

Brushless DC motor

—

760 rpm

—

8 steps

—

760 rpm

—

760 rpm

70 W

Direct drive

1

JT100G-VD JT1G-VDYR@S

Hermetically sealed scroll compressor

—

2200 W

—

760 rpm

Inverter driven

33 W

Water cooled

2

— — — — — —

52,5 kPa 43,5 kPa 35,0 kPa 52,5 kPa 43,5 kPa 35,0 kPa

210 W

Brazed plate

1

1,01 l

16 l/min

— — — — — —

32,1 l/min 40,1 l/min 45,9 l/min 32,1 l/min 40,1 l/min 45,9 l/min

58 l/min

58 l/min

Foamed synthetic elastomer

10 l

3 bar

1,0 bar

1 mm

Brass

1

3

4

5


1–27

Specifications

11

Specification

3

Water circuit

Defrost method

Defrost control

Capacity control method

Capacity control (%)

Safety devices

Piping connections

∅

Piping

Safety valve

Manometer

Drain valve / Fill valve

Shut off valve

Air purge valve

Total water volume

(5)

4

Specification

5

Casing

Dimensions

Weight of unit

Weight of packing materials

Sound level (nominal)

Sound level (night quiet)

Operation range

Colour

Material

Packing Height

Width

Depth

Unit Height

Machine net weight

Packed machine weight

Width

Depth

Material

Weight

Heating (2)

Cooling (3)

Heating

Cooling

Heating

Sound power

Sound pressure (1)

Sound power

Sound pressure (1)

Sound pressure (1)

Sound pressure (1)

Ambient

Cooling

Waterside (4)

Ambient

Sanitary water

Waterside

Ambient

Waterside

Refrigerant Type

Charge

Control

N° of circuits

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

1–28

ESIE08-02

011

ED(H/L)Q* AA6V3

014 016 011

G 5/4” (FEMALE)

ED(H/L)Q* AA6W1

014 016

5/4”

3 bar

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

5,5 l

Pressure equalising

Sensor for outdoor heat exchanger temperature

Inverter controlled

—

High pressure switch

Fan motor thermal protector

Fuse

011

64 dBA

51 dBA

65 dBA

50 dBA

42 dBA

45 dBA

EB(H/L)Q* AA6V3 EB(H/L)Q* AA6W1

014 016 011 014

64 dBA

51 dBA

66 dBA

52 dBA

42 dBA

45 dBA

Ivory-white

Painted Galvanised Steel Plate

1557 mm

1500 mm

430 mm

1418 mm

1435 mm

382 mm

180 kg

200 kg

Wood, carton, plastic foil

20 kg

66 dBA

52 dBA

69 dBA

54 dBA

64 dBA

49 dBA

65 dBA

50 dBA

64 dBA

51 dBA

66 dBA

52 dBA

42 dBA

45 dBA

43 dBA

46 dBA

42 dBA

45 dBA

-15°C DB (6)

35°C DB

15°C

55°C

10°C DB

46°C DB

5°C

22°C

-15°C DB (6)

43°C DB

25°C

80°C

R-410A

2,95 kg

Expansion valve (electronic type)

1

016

66 dBA

53 dBA

69 dBA

54 dBA

43 dBA

46 dBA



Specification

Refrigerant oil

Main components

Type

Charged volume

Air heat exchanger Specifications

Fan

Compressor

Pump

Water side heat exchanger

Expansion vessel

Water filter

Length

N° of rows

Fin pitch

N° of passes

Face area

N° of stages

Empty tubeplate hole

Tube type

Fin Type

Treatment

Type

Quantity

Air flow rate (nominal at

230V)

Cooling

Heating

Discharge direction

External static pressure (Max)

Motor Quantity

Model

Position

Speed (nominal at 230V)

Cooling

Heating

Output

Drive

Quantity

Motor Model

Type

Speed

Motor output

Starting method

Crankcase heater

Type

Nr. of speed

Nominal ESP unit Cooling

Heating

Power input

Type

Qty

Water volume

Water flow rate Min.

Water flow rate Nom.

Water flow rate Max.

Cooling (3)

Heating (2)

Cooling

Heating

Insulation material

Volume

Max. water pressure

Pre pressure

Diameter perforations

Material

EB(H/L)Q* AA6V3 EB(H/L)Q* AA6W1

011 014 016 011 014 016

96 m

3

/min

Daphne FVC68D

1,0 l

857 mm

2

1,4 mm

5

1,131 m

2

100 m

3

/min

60

0

Hi-XSS (8)

WF fin

Anti-corrosion treatment (PE)

Propeller

2

97 m

3

/min

— — —

90 m

3

/min 90 m

3

/min 90 m

3

/min

Horizontal

—

—

2

Brushless DC motor

—

8 steps

780 rpm

760 rpm

— —

780 rpm

760 rpm

780 rpm

760 rpm

70 W

Direct drive

1

780 rpm

760 rpm

780 rpm

760 rpm

JT100G-VD JT1G-VDYR@S

Hermetically sealed scroll compressor

—

2200 W

780 rpm

760 rpm

Inverter driven

33 W

Water cooled

2



210 W

Brazed plate

1

1,01 l

16 l/min



58 l/min

58 l/min

Foamed synthetic elastomer

10 l

3 bar

1,0 bar

1 mm

Brass

1

3

4

5


1–29


11

Specification

3

Water circuit

Defrost method

Defrost control

Capacity control method

Capacity control (%)

Safety devices

Piping connections

∅

Piping

Safety valve

Manometer

Drain valve / Fill valve

Shut off valve

Air purge valve

Total water volume

(5)

4

5

Notes

011

EB(H/L)Q* AA6V3

014 016 011

G 5/4” (FEMALE)

EB(H/L)Q* AA6W1

014 016

5/4”

3 bar

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

5,5 l

Pressure equalising

Sensor for outdoor heat exchanger temperature

Inverter controlled

—


Fan motor thermal protector

Fuse

(1) The sound pressure level is measured via a microphone at a certain distance from the unit. It is a relative value depending on the distance and acoustic environment. Refer to sound spectrum drawing for more information.

(2) Conditions: Ta DB/WB 7°C/6°C - LWC 35°C (

ΔT = 5°C)

(3) Conditions: Ta 35°C - LWE 7°C (

ΔT = 5°C)

(4) 15°C ~ 25°C: BUH only, no heat pump operation = during commissioning

(5) Including piping + PHE + backup heater / excluding expansion vessel

(6) E(D/B)L* model can reach -20°C / E(D/B)L*6W1 model can reach -25°C but without capacity guarantee

1–30



Electrical specifications

Specification

The table below contains the electrical specifications.

Power supply compressor compartment (1)

Power supply Name

Phase

Frequency

Current

Voltage

Nominal running current

Starting current (cooling/heating)

Zmax

Maximum running current Cooling

Heating

Minimum S sc

value

Cooling

Heating (10)

Voltage range

Recommended fuses

Minimum

Maximum

For power supply compressor compartment Wiring connections

Power supply hydraulic compartment (2)

Electric heater Type

Power supply Phase

Frequency

Current

Voltage

Running current (backup heater)

Zmax (backup heater)

Minimum S sc

value (8)

Zmax (backup heater + booster heater)

Running current (backup heater + booster heater)

+ EK*V3

+ EK*Z2

Minimum S sc

value (8) + EK*V3

+ EK*Z2

Voltage range

Wiring connections

Minimum

Maximum

For power supply hydraulic compartment

For power supply connection to Optional Sanitary tank +

Q2L

For connection with R5T

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

For connection with A3P

For connection with M2S


Quantity of wires

Type of wires

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

011

ED(H/L)Q* AA6V3

014 016 011

ED(H/L)Q* AA6W1

014 016

—

—

—

—

V3

1~

50 Hz

230 V

—

—

—

—

—

—

Equipment complying with EN/IEC

61000-3-12 (*)

32 A

207 V

253 V

—

14 A

See installation manual

W1

3N~

50 Hz

400 V

—

5,8 A

—

—

—

14 A

—

20 A

360 V

440 V

—

14 A

6V3

1~

230 V

26 A (11)

0,29 Ω

(9)

0,17 Ω

39 A (26+13)

-

(9)

—

207 V

253 V

3G

Note (3)

6W1

3~

50 Hz

3G

Note (3) and (4)

Note (7)

Note (7)

Note (6)

Note (3) and (5)

3G

Note (3) and (5)

3G or 4G

Note (3) and (5)

400 V

8,7 A (12)

—

—

—

21,7 A (8,7+13)

16,2 A (8,7+7,5)

(9)

(9)

360 V

440 V

4G

Note (3)

1

3

4

5


1–31


11

3

4

5

Specification

Power supply compressor compartment (1)

Power supply Name

Phase

Frequency

Current

Voltage


Starting current (cooling/heating)

Zmax

Maximum running current

Cooling

Heating (10)

Cooling

Heating

Minimum S sc

value

Voltage range

Recommended fuses

Minimum

Maximum

For power supply compressor compartment Wiring connections

Power supply hydraulic compartment (2)

Electric heater Type

Power supply Phase

Frequency

Current

Voltage

Running current (backup heater)

Zmax (backup heater)

Minimum S sc

value (8)

Zmax (backup heater + booster heater)

Running current (backup heater + booster heater)

+ EK*V3

+ EK*Z2

Minimum S sc

value (8) + EK*V3

+ EK*Z2

Voltage range

Wiring connections

Minimum

Maximum

For power supply hydraulic compartment

For power supply connection to Optional Sanitary tank +

Q2L

For connection with R5T

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

For connection with A3P



Quantity of wires

Type of wires

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

Quantity of wires

Type of wires

011

EB(H/L)Q* AA6V3

014 016 011

EB(H/L)Q* AA6W1

014 016

—

—

—

—

V3

1~

50 Hz

230 V

22,8 A

—

27,4 A

—

31,9 A

—

Equipment complying with EN/IEC

61000-3-12 (*)

32 A

207 V

253 V

13,5 A

14 A

See installation manual

W1

3N~

50 Hz

400 V

—

5,8 A

—

—

13,5 A

14 A

—

20 A

360 V

440 V

13,5 A

14 A

6V3

1~

230 V

26 A (11)

0,29 Ω

(9)

0,17 Ω

39 A (26+13)

-

(9)

—

207 V

253 V

3G

Note (3)

6W1

3~

50 Hz

3G

Note (3) and (4)

Note (7)

Note (7)

Note (6)

Note (3) and (5)

3G

Note (3) and (5)

3G or 4G

Note (3) and (5)

400 V

8,7 A (12)

—

—

—

21,7 A (8,7+13)

16,2 A (8,7+7,5)

(9)

(9)

360 V

440 V

4G

Note (3)

Notes

(1) Power supply compressor compartment is for compressor, fan, pump & controller

(2) Power supply hydraulic compartment is for the electric heater

The optional domestic warm water tank has a separate power supply

(3) Select diameter and type according to national and local regulations

(4) For more details of the voltage range and current refer to installation manual

(5) Voltage: 230 V / Maximum current: 100 mA / Minimum 0,75 mm

2

1–32



(6) Depends on thermostat type, refer to installation manual

(7) Wire included in option EKHWS*

(8) In accordance with EN/IEC 61000-3-11 (*), it may be necessary to consult the distribution network operator to ensure that the equipment is connected only to a supply with Zsys (***)

≤Zmax

(9) Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000-3-12 (**)

(10) Conditions: Ta DB/WB 7°C/6°C - LWC 35°C (

ΔT = 5°C)

(11) Installer can reduce capacity of the heater from 6 to 3 kW. The current is then reduced from 26 to 13 A. Instructions see

Installation manual

(12) Installer can reduce capacity of the heater from 6 to 3,5 kW. The current is then reduced from 8,7 to 5 A. Instructions see

Installation manual

(*): European/International Technical Standard setting the limits for voltage changes. Voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current

≤75 A.

(**): European/International Technical Standard setting the limits for harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to public low-voltage systems with input current > 16 A and

≤75 A per phase.

(***): System impedance.

1

3

4

5


1–33


11

2.3

Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKSWW150~300V3/Z2 &

EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2


Specification

Casing

Dimensions


3

4

5

Weight

Packing

Main components

Temperature sensor

Piping connections

Colour

Material

Packing

Unit

Height

Width

Depth

Height

Width

Depth

Machine weight

Gross weight (EKSWW)

Gross weight (EKHWS)

Material

Weight

Tank Water volume

Material

Max. temperature

Max. water pressure

Heat exchanger

Booster heater

Cable length

Water inlet H/E Diameter

Water outlet H/E Diameter

Cold water in Diameter

Hot water out Diameter

Insulation Material

Insulation Min. thickness

Quantity

Material (EKSWW)

Material (EKHWS)

Quantity

Capacity

EKSWW150V3

EKHWS150*V3

EKSWW200V3

EKHWS150*V3

EKSWW300V3

EKHWS150*V3

EKSWW200Z2

EKHWS150*V3

EKSWW300Z2

EKHWS150*V3

950 mm

900 mm

37 kg

40 kg

42 kg

3 kg

150 l

1200 mm

Neutral white

Epoxy-coated mild steel

1650 mm

600 mm

1200 mm

1150 mm

600 mm

1600 mm

580 mm

580 mm

1150 mm

45 kg

49 kg

51 kg

59 kg

64 kg

66 kg

EPS/Carton

45 kg

49 kg

51 kg

4 kg

200 l

5 kg

300 l

Stainless steel (DIN 1.4521)

85°C

4 kg

200 l

10 bar

Polyurethane foam

40 mm

1


Duplex steel LDX 2101

1

3 kW

12 m

3/4” FBSP (inch)

3/4” FBSP (inch)

3/4” FBSP (inch)

3/4” FBSP (inch)

1650 mm

1600 mm

59 kg

64 kg

66 kg

5 kg

300 l


Specification

Unit


Power supply Phase

Frequency

Voltage


Fuse Size

Phase

EKSWW150V3

EKHWS150*V3

EKSWW200V3

EKHWS150*V3

EKSWW300V3

EKHWS150*V3

EKSWW200Z2

EKHWS150*V3

EKSWW300Z2

EKHWS150*V3

1~ 2~

50 Hz

230 V

13 A

400 V

7.5 A

20 A

1~ 2~

1–34



2.4

Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKSWWU150~300V3 &

EKHWSU150~300*V3




Specification

Casing

Dimensions

Weight

Packing

Main components

Temperature sensor

Piping connections

Colour

Material

Packing

Unit

Height

Width

Depth

Height

Width

Depth

Machine weight

Gross weight (EKSWW)

Gross weight (EKHWS)

Material

Weight

Tank Water volume

Material

Max. temperature

Max. water pressure

Heat exchanger

Booster heater

Cable length

Water inlet H/E Diameter

Water outlet H/E Diameter

Cold water in Diameter

Hot water out Diameter

Insulation Material

Insulation Min. thickness

Quantity

Material (EKSWW)

Material (EKHWS)

Quantity

Capacity


Specification

Unit Power supply Phase

Frequency

Voltage


Fuse Size

Phase

EKSWWU150V3

EKHWSU150*V3

EKSWWU200V3

EKHWSU150*V3

EKSWWU300V3

EKHWSU150*V3

1040 mm

1015 mm

38 kg

41 kg

43 kg

3 kg

150 l

Neutral white

Epoxy-coated mild steel

1280 mm

600 mm

600 mm

1265 mm

580 mm

580 mm

46 kg

50 kg

52 kg

EPS/Carton

4 kg

200 l


85°C

1735 mm

1715 mm

60 kg

65 kg

67 kg

5 kg

285 l

10 bar

Polyurethane foam

40 mm

1


Duplex steel LDX 2101

1

3 kW

12 m

3/4” FBSP (inch)

3/4” FBSP (inch)

3/4” FBSP (inch)

3/4” FBSP (inch)

EKSWWU150V3

EKHWSU150*V3

EKSWWU200V3

EKHWSU150*V3

EKSWWU300V3

EKHWSU150*V3

1~

50 Hz

230 V

13 A

1~

1

3

4

5


1–35

Specifications

11

2.5

3

4

5

Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKSOLHWAV1



Specification

Dimensions Packing Height

Width

Unit

Depth

Height

Width

Depth

Weight of unit Machine weight

Gross weight

Weight of packing materials Material

Weight

Heat exchanger Type

Pressure drop

Maximum inlet temperature

Solar side

Solar side

Pump

Heat exchange capacity

Logarithmic mean temperature difference (LMTD)

Type

Number of speeds

Sound

Water circuit

Insulation material

Ambient temperature

Nominal ESP

Power input

Water flow rate

Heating

Medium speed

Min.

Max.

Nom.

Sound pressure

Piping connection diameter

Max.

Min.



Specification

Unit

Wiring connections

Voltage range

Power supply Phase

Frequency

Voltage


Fuse Size

For power supply

Phase

Quantity

For connection with indoor

Remark

Quantity

Remark

Minimum

Maximum

Power supply intake

EKSOLHWAV1

1~

50 Hz

220-240 V

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

-10%

+10% indoor unit

EKSOLHWAV1

1400 W/K

5 K water cooled

3

-

46 W

-

-

-

27 dBA

3/4” F BSP

EPP

35 °C

1 °C

340 mm

295 mm

770 mm

305 mm

270 mm

8 kg

9 kg

Carton

1 kg

Brazed plate

21.5 kPa

110 °C

ESIE08-02

1–36



2.6

Technical and Electrical Specifications for EKRTW / EKRTR


Additional information


Specification EKRTW

Dimensions

Weight of unit

Weight of packing

Ambient temperature

Temperature setpoint range heating

Temperature setpoint range cooling

Temperature setting resolution

Clock

Regulation function

Packing Height 65

Width (mm)

Depth (mm)

175

100

Unit

Net weight

Gross weight

Material

Weight

Storage

Operation

Height (mm)

Width (mm)

Depth (mm) g g g

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

87

125

34

215

440

Carton

55

-20~60

0~50

4-37

4-37

0,5

Yes

Proportional band

Features:

Heating only

Heating and cooling

Comfort function mode (= comfort setpoint)

Reduced function mode (= night setback setpoint)

Scheduled function mode (= schedule timer)

Number of setpoint changes

Holiday function mode

Off function (with integrated frost protection)

Dew prevention

Setpoint limitation

Keylock function

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

12/day

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Floor temperature protection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

12/day

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes (only in combination with

EKRTETS)

Thermostat

EKRTR

Receiver

70

200

140

87

125

34

210

170

50

28

125

665

Carton Carton

85

-20~60

0~50

4-37

4-37

0,5

Yes

Proportional band

-20~60

0~50

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

EKRTETS

45

75

75

3 m wire length

65

80

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Carton

15

-20~60

0~50

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

The table below contains additional information.

Comfort function mode Use this mode for a fixed temperature on comfort level (comfort setpoint default on 21°C in heating mode, 24°C in cooling mode).

Reduced function mode

Scheduled function mode

Holiday function mode

Use this mode for a fixed temperature on reduced level (reduced setpoint default on 17°C in heating mode, 28°C in cooling mode).

Use this mode to let your installation be controlled by the schedule timer. The actions programmed in the schedule timer will be executed automatically according to the actual time. This function uses the scheduled temperature setpoint.

Use this mode to set a fixed temperature during a long absence.

Off function

Setpoint limitation

Use this mode to switch off your installation. Integrated frost protection remains activated (frost protection default on

4°C in heating mode).

Use this function to limit the setpoint range for the end customer.

Floor temperature protection Use this function to set a maximum and a minimum floor temperature.

1

3

4

5


1–37

4

5


11



Specification

Power supply

Connection

Max distance to receiver

Max rated switching current

Phase

Frequency

Voltage

Voltage tolerance

Indoor

Outdoor

Hz

V

A (at 230

VAC)

EKRTW EKRTR

Thermostat

-

-

-

-

Battery powered

3x AA-LR6 (alkaline)

Battery powered

3x AA-LR6 (alkaline)

-

Wired

-

-

5 A

-

Wireless

Approx. 30 m

Approx. 100 m

-

Receiver

1~

50

230

± 10%

Wired

-

-

4 A

EKRTETS

-

Wired

-

-

-

-

-

-

3

1–38


ESIE08-02

3 Functional Diagrams

3.1


Introduction

Functional diagrams


■

■

■

Overview complete system

Electrical connection diagram

Pipe connection diameters.

This chapter contains the following functional diagrams:

Topic

3.2–Complete System (EBHQ011~016*V3 + EKSWW)

3.3–Electrical Connection Diagram

3.4–Pipe Connection Diameters

Functional Diagrams

Part 1§

1

3

See page

1–40

1–42

1–43

4

5


1–39

3

4

5

11


3.2

Complete System (

EBHQ011~016*V3 + EKSWW

)

ESIE08-02

t > t > t > p

1–40


ESIE08-02

Components

The table below contains the different components of the functional diagrams.

No.

Name

IR1T

IR2T

IR3T

IR4T

IR5T

DHW

25

8

9

10

11

12

13

OR1T

OR2T

6

7

4

5

2

3

Outdoor Unit

1 Heat exchanger (Outdoor unit)

Filter (Outdoor, refrigerant)

Expansion valve

Liquid stop valve with service port

Gas stop valve with service port

Pressure sensor (Outdoor unit)

4-way valve ON: heating

High pressure switch discharge pipe (Outdoor unit)

Compressor

Accumulator

Service port 5/16”

Propeller fan

Crankcase heater compressor

Outdoor air temperature thermistor

Discharge pipe thermistor (Outdoor unit)

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

OR3T

OR4T

OR5T

OR6T

Suction pipe thermistor (Outdoor unit)

Heat exchanger thermistor (Outdoor unit)

Heat exchanger middle thermistor (Outdoor unit)

Liquid refrigerant thermistor (Outdoor unit)

Hydro-box

14 Heat exchanger PME (hydro-box)

15

16

Backup heater

Expansion vessel

Drain valve

Manometer

Air purge valve

Pressure relief valve

Pump

Flow switch

Shut off valve with drain/fill valve

Filter (hydro-box, water)

Outlet water Heat exchanger thermistor (hydro-box)

Outlet water Backup heater thermistor (hydro-box)

Liquid refrigerant thermistor (hydro-box)

Inlet water thermistor (hydro-box)

Domestic hot water tank thermistor (hydro-box)

3-way valve for domestic hot water tank

26

27

DHW tank

2-way valve to block heating supply to tank heat exchanger (EKSWWU only)

28 Booster heater

Field supplied

29

30

By-pass valve

2-way valve for cooling mode to block floor heating loops


1

3

4

5


1–41

3

4

5

11


3.3

Electrical Connection Diagram

2 core

230V

230V 2 core

2 core 2x0.75

2 core 2x0.75

4 or 3 core

3 core

2 core 2x0.75

5 core 5Gx2.5

Power supply booster heater

M3S (when EKHW is installed) selection domestic hot water-floorheating

ESIE08-02

1–42


ESIE08-02

Outdoor units

Water side


3.4

Pipe Connection Diameters

The table below contains the refrigerant pipe connection diameters.

Model

V3 models (1~)

W1 models (3N~)

∅ Liquid side

∅ 9,5 mm (3/8 inch)

∅ 9,5 mm (3/8 inch)

∅ Gas side

∅ 15,9 mm (5/8 inch)

∅ 15,9 mm (5/8 inch)

The table below contains the water inlet/outlet connection diameters.

Model

V3 models (1~)

W1 models (3N~)

∅ Inlet pipe

G 5/4” FBSP

2

G 5/4” FBSP

2

3/4 inch

(FBSP)

2

EKSWW(U)150

EKSWW(U)200

EKSWW(U)300

EKHWS(U)150

EKHWS(U)200

EKHWS(U)300

EKHWE150

EKHWE200

EKHWE300

(FBSP)²

Rp

3/4 inch

3

3/4 inch

(female)

∅ Outlet pipe

G 5/4” FBSP

2

G 5/4” FBSP

2

3/4 inch

(FBSP)

(FBSP)²

Rp

3/4 inch

3

3/4 inch

(female)

1

3

4

5

Hot + cold water side

Model

EKHWS(U)150

EKHWS(U)200

EKHWS(U)300

EKHWE150

EKHWE200

EKHWE300

∅ Cold water

G

3/4 inch

(FBSP)²

4

3/4 inch

(male)

1: MBSP = male British standard pipe

2: FBSP = female British standard pipe

3: Rp = internal parallel (ISO 7)

4: G = external + internal parallel (ISO 228)

∅ Hot water

3/4 inch

(FBSP)²

∅ Re-circulation

connection

3/4 inch

(FBSP)²

G

4

3/4 inch

(male)

G

4

3/4 inch

(male)


1–43

3

4

5

11

Functional Diagrams ESIE08-02

1–44


ESIE08-02

4 Piping Diagrams

4.1


Introduction

Piping diagrams


■

Piping diagrams

This chapter contains the following piping diagrams:

Topic

4.2–Piping Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

4.3–Piping Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

4.4–Piping Diagram for EKSWWU150~300V3

4.5–Piping Diagram for EKSOLHWAV1

Piping Diagrams

Part 1

1

3

See page

1–46

1–48

1–50

1–52

4

5


1–45

Piping Diagrams ESIE08-02

11

4.2

Piping Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

3

4

OUTLET

R12T t >

SHUT OFF VALVE

PUMP

SAFETY

VALVE AIR

PURGE

EXPAN-

SION

VESSEL

PRESSURE

GAUGE

EVAPORATOR

CONDENSOR

R11T t >

ELECTRIC

HEATER BODY

R6T

FILTER

Y1E

FILTER

DISTRIBUTOR

R5T

M*F

HEAT EXCHANGER

R4T

FLOWSWITCH

R14T t >

INLET

SHUT OFF VALVE

FILTER

DRAIN/FILL VALVE

PHE

R13T t >

R3T

S1NPH p >

S1PH

Y1S

SERVICE PORT

5/16"

R2T

R1T

M*C

ACCUMULATOR

E1HC

STOP VALVE (WITH SERVICE PORT 5/16" FLARE)

HEATING

COOLING

5

Components

The table below contains the different components of the piping diagram.

No.

R13T

R14T

S1NPH

Y1E

E1HC

Y1S

Y3S

S1PH

M*F

M*C

R1T

R2T

R3T

R4T

R5T

R6T

R11T

R12T

Name

Thermistor (air)

Thermistor (discharge)

Thermistor (suction)

Thermistor (liquid 1)

Thermistor (middle)


Outlet water heat-exchanger thermistor

Outlet water backup heater thermistor

Refrigerant liquid side thermistor

Inlet water thermistor

Pressure sensor

Electronic expansion valve

Crankcase heater

Four way valve

Injection valve


Fan motor

Compressor

1–46


ESIE08-02

Symbols

The table below contains the different symbols used on the piping diagram.

Symbol Name

Check valve

Flare connection

Screw connection

Flange connection

Pinched pipe

Spinned pipe

Piping Diagrams

1

3

4

5


1–47

Piping Diagrams ESIE08-02

11

4.3

Piping Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

3

4

OUTLET

R12T t >

SHUT OFF VALVE

PUMP

SAFETY

VALVE AIR

PURGE

EXPAN-

SION

VESSEL

PRESSURE

GAUGE

EVAPORATOR

CONDENSOR

R11T t >

ELECTRIC

HEATER BODY

R6T

FILTER

Y1E

FILTER

DISTRIBUTOR

R5T

R4T

M*F

HEAT EXCHANGER

FLOWSWITCH

R14T t >

INLET

SHUT OFF VALVE

FILTER

DRAIN/FILL VALVE

PHE

R13T t >

R3T

S1NPH

Capillary tube p >

S1PH

Y1S

SERVICE PORT

5/16"

R2T

R1T

M*C

ACCUMULATOR

E1HC

STOP VALVE (WITH SERVICE PORT 5/16" FLARE)

HEATING

COOLING

5

Components

The table below contains the different components of the piping diagram.

No.

R13T

R14T

S1NPH

Y1E

E1HC

Y1S

Y3S

S1PH

M*F

M*C

R1T

R2T

R3T

R4T

R5T

R6T

R11T

R12T

Name

Thermistor (air)




Thermistor (middle)


Outlet water heat-exchanger thermistor




Pressure sensor


Crankcase heater

Four way valve

Injection valve


Fan motor

Compressor

1–48


ESIE08-02 Piping Diagrams

Symbols

The table below contains the different symbols used on the piping diagram.

Symbol Name

Check valve

Flare connection

Screw connection

Flange connection

Pinched pipe

Spinned pipe

1

3

Caution for flare connection

■

Refer to table below for correct flare dimensions and tightening torques. Too high tightening force may cause refrigerant leak because of flare cracking:

Piping size

Flare nut tightening torque

A dimensions for processing flares (mm)

Flare shape

φ6.4

φ9.5

φ12.7

φ15.9

φ19.1

14.2~17.2 N•m

(144~176 kgf•cm)

32.7~39.9 N•m

(333~407 kgf•cm)

49.5~60.3 N•m

(504~616 kgf•cm)

61.8~75.4 N•m

(630~770 kgf•cm)

97.2~118.6 N•m

(989.8~1208 kgf•cm)

8.7~9.1

12.8~13.2

16.2~16.6

19.3~19.7

23.6~24.0

90

°±

0.5

45

° ±

2

A

R=0.4~0.8

■

When connecting the flare nut, apply refrigerating machine oil to the flare (inside and outside) and first screw the nut 3 or 4 turns by hand. Coat the indicated surfaces using ether or ester oil:

4

5

■

After completing the installation, carry out an inspection of the piping connections by pressure test using nitrogen.


1–49

(**)

ESIE08-02 Piping Diagrams

11

4.4

Piping Diagram for EKSWWU150~300V3

OVERVIEW

FIELD INSTALLATION

1

(****)

2

M

M3S

MONOBLOC LOAD

1

3

OPTION

DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANK

WATER MAIN OUT

4

5

TPRV

(***)

(*)

Y1S

3

EKSWWU*

EKHWSU* t >

R5T

(**)

(*)

4

(**)

(*)

5

(*)

6

(**)

(*)

7

(*)

8

OPTION DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANK

WATER MAIN IN

(**)

(*)

11

(**)

(*) (*)

10

9

(**)

(*) : FIELD INSTALLATION

DELIVERED WITH EKUSWW KIT

1–50


ESIE08-02

Components

Symbols


No.

Name

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

R5T

Shut off valve

3-way motorized valve (M3S) (****)

2-way solenoid valve (Y1S) (*) (***)

Drain valve (*) (**)

T-piece (*) (**)

Tundish (*) (**)

Expansion vessel (*) (**)

T-piece (*) (**)

Expansion relief valve (*) (**)

T-piece (*)

Pressure reducing valve with integrated non return valve line strainer (*) (**)

Domestic hot water thermistor

(*): Field installation delivered with EKUSWW kit / EKUHWA kit

(**): Field installation delivered with EKUHWB kit

(***): Field installation delivered with EKUHW2B kit (only with EKSOLHWAV1)

(****): Field installation: - EKSWWU*: field supplied

- EKHWSU*A*: field supplied

- EKHWSU*B*: delivered with EKHWSU*B*

The table below contains the different symbols used on the functional diagrams.

Symbol Name

Check valve

Flare connection

Screw connection

Flange connection

Pinched pipe

Spinned pipe

Piping Diagrams

1

3

4

5


1–51

3

4

5

Piping Diagrams

11

4.5

Piping Diagram for EKSOLHWAV1

ESIE08-02

1–52


ESIE08-02

Components

Symbols


No.

Name

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Y1S

M3S

Shut off valve

3-way motorized valve

Solar collector

Solar pump station

Plate heat exchanger

Non return valve

Pump

2-way solenoid valve (*)

Solenoid valve

3-way motorized valve

(*): Delivered with EKUHWA kit

The table below contains the different symbols used on the functional diagrams.

Symbol Name

Check valve

Flare connection

Screw connection

Flange connection

Pinched pipe

Spinned pipe

Piping Diagrams

1

3

4

5


1–53

ESIE08-02

3

4

5

11

Piping Diagrams

1–54


ESIE08-02

5 Switch Box Layout

5.1


Introduction

Altherma

This chapter shows the switch box components.

This chapter contains the following switch box layouts:

Topic

5.2–Switch Box Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Compressor Module

5.3–Switch Box Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Module

5.4–Switch Box Layout for Hydraulic Compartment

5.5–Switch Box Layout for EKSWW***V3/Z2

5.6–Switch Box Layout for EKHWS***V3/Z2

5.7–Switch Box Layout for EKSWWU***V3

5.8–Switch Box Layout for EKHWSU***V3

5.9–Switch Box Layout for EKHWE***V3/Z2

Switch Box Layout

Part 1

1

See page

1–56

1–57

1–59

1–61

1–62

1–63

1–64

1–65

3

4

5


1–55

ESIE08-02 Switch Box Layout

11

5.2

Switch Box Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Compressor Module

The illustration below shows the outdoor switch box layout:

C4

A3P

3

A2P

4

A1P

5

A4P

A2P

X1M

A1P

A3P

A4P

Item

A1P

A2P

A3P

A4P

X1M

C4

X1M

Description

Printed circuit board (control)

Printed circuit board (service)

Printed circuit board (noise filter)

Printed circuit board (communication)

Terminal strip

Electrolytic capacitor

1–56


ESIE08-02

5.3

Switch Box Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Module

FRONT



1

A2P Inverter PCB

A1P Control PCB

3

4

X1M

5

A1P Control PCB

X1M

A2P inverter PCB


Item

A1P

A2P

X1M

Description

Printed circuit board (control)

Printed circuit board (inverter)

Terminal strip

1–57

ESIE08-02

3

4

5


11

BACK


A3P Noise filter PCB

L4R Reactor

A3P Noise filter PCB

L4R Reactor

A2P Inverter PCB

Item

A2P

A3P

L4R

Description

Printed circuit board (inverter)


Reactor

1–58


ESIE08-02

5.4

Switch Box Layout for Hydraulic Compartment

S1T

The illustration below shows the switch box layout:

K5M K3M K4M K7M A11P

X4M

X3M

S1T

K5M

K1M

OPTION EKSWW

3PW42338-X

K4M

K3M

K7M

OPTION EKSWW

F1B F2B

A11P

K1M F1B

X5M

F2B

X10M X2M

TR1

OPTION

A4P

A4P

TR1


E5H

E5H

1

3

4

X5M

X10M

5

X2M

A


1–59

3

4

5

ESIE08-02

11


K5M K3M F2B K4M K7M A11P

S1T

K1M

F1B

X4M

X3M

TR1

E5H

A4P

X2M

Item

A11P

A4P

E5H

F1B

TR1

X2M

X3M

X4M

X5M

X10M

F2B

K1M

K3M

K4M

K5M

K7M

S1T

X5M X10M

Description

Hydraulic module main PCB

PCB for solar kit or remote alarm (optional)

Switch box heater (only on E(B\D)LQ* models)

Fuse for backup heater (2P 32A for single phase models or 3P 16A for three phase models)

Fuse for use with sanitary tank (optional)

Contactor backup heater

Contactor for sanitary tank booster heater (optional)

Pump relay

Contactor for backup heater all pole disconnection

Relay for solar pump (optional)

Thermostat for switch box heater (only on E(B\D)LQ* models)

Transformer 24 V for PCB

Terminal strip

Terminal strip for use with sanitary tank (optional)

Terminal strip for use with sanitary tank (optional)

Terminal strip for changing backup heater capacity

Terminal strip backup heater power supply


1–60

ESIE08-02

5.5

Switch Box Layout for EKSWW***V3/Z2



1

3

4

5

Item

X1M

Q2L

E4H

Q2L

Description

Terminal strip nr 1-2: power supply booster heater

Thermal protector booster heater: connection nr 1-2

Booster heater 3 kW 230 V

(1)

/ 400 V (Z2)

Thermal protector input hydrobox: connection nr 3-4

(1)

Remark: Internal connection of Booster heater 3 kW 400 V is slightly different.


1–61

3

4

5


11

5.6

Switch Box Layout for EKHWS***V3/Z2


X6M

Q2L

ESIE08-02

X8M

Q3L

E4H

1–62

Item

X6M

X8M

Q2L

Q3L

Q3L (Z2)

Q2L (V3)

E4H

Description


Terminal strip nr 1-2: power supply to EKSOLHWAV1 pump

Terminal strip nr 3-4: power supply from Hydrobox (X2M: 19-20)

Thermal protector booster heater: connection nr 1-2 (V3) / 1-2 3-4 (Z2)

Thermal protector DHW tank for EKSOLHWAV1: connection nr 1-2

Thermal protector input towards Hydrobox: connection nr 3-4

Thermal protector input towards Hydrobox: connection nr 3-4


(1)

(V3) 400V (Z2)

(1)

Remark: Internal connection of Booster heater 3 kW 400 V is slightly different.


ESIE08-02

5.7

Switch Box Layout for EKSWWU***V3


X5M

Q2L

X6M


1

Q3L

Q1T

3

4

5

Item

X5M

X6M

Q2L

E4H

Q1T

Q3L

Description

Terminal strip nr 1-2: power supply to solenoide valve (Y1S) from hydraulic compartment (X7M: 1-2)

Terminal strip nr 1-2: power supply booster heater (E4H) from hydraulic compartment

(X4M: 1-2)

Thermal protector booster heater: connection nr 1-2/3-4

Booster heater 3 kW 230 V (1)

Thermostat DHW water tank

Thermal protector DHW water tank connection nr 1-2/3-4


1–63

Switch Box Layout ESIE08-02

11

5.8

Switch Box Layout for EKHWSU***V3


3

4

5

X6M

X6M X5M

X5M

Q2L

Q2T

1

1

Q2L

3

2

RESET

85

4

C

Q2T

2

79 C

E4H

1

Q3L

3

1

RESET

2

85

4

C

Q3T

2

73 C

Q3L

Q3T

X8M

X8M

230V

85 C

75

SETPOINT

79

C

55

85 C

75

65

SETPOINT

73

C

65

55

E4H

Item

X6M

Q3L

Q3L

E4H

Q2T

Q2L

Q2L

Q3T

X5M

X8M

Description

Terminal strip nr 1-2: power supply booster heater from hydraulic compartment

(X4M: 1-2)

Thermal protector booster heater: connection nr 3-4

Thermal protection EKSOLHWAV1 pump: connection nr 1-2


Thermostat DHW tank for EKUHW2WB: connection nr 1-2

Thermal protector DHW tank for EKUHW2WB: connection nr 1-2

Thermal protection input hydrobox: connection nr 3-4

Thermostat DHW tank for EKSOLHWAV1: connection nr 1-2

Terminal strip nr 2-3: power supply for EKUHW2WB valve from Hydrobox (X7M:

1-2)

Terminal strip nr 1-2: power supply to EKSOLHWAV1 pump

Terminal strip nr 3-4: power supply for solar pump from Hydrobox (X2M: 19-20)

1–64


ESIE08-02

5.9

Switch Box Layout for EKHWE***V3/Z2

EKHWE***V3


X10M

A

EKHWE***Z2


X10M

Q3L

A

Q2L

X9M


1

E4H

3

4

5

Q2L

X9M

E4H


1–65

4

5

11

3

Switch Box Layout ESIE08-02

Item

X9M

Q3L

E4H

Q2L

Q2L

Q2L

A

X10M

Description


Thermal protector DHW tank for EKSOLHWAV1 pump: connection nr 31-32 (Z2)

Booster heater 3 kW 230 V (V3) 400 V (Z2)

Thermal protector booster heater: connection nr 31-32 (V3) / 11-12. 21-22 (Z2)

Thermal protector DHW for EKSOLWAV1 pump: connection nr 11-12 (V3)

Thermal protection input towards hydrobox: connection nr 21-22 (V3) / 31-32

(Z2)

Anode enamel tank

Terminal strip nr 19-20: power supply from Hydrobox (X2M: 19-20)

Terminal strip nr p1-p2: power supply to EKSOLHWAV1 pump

1–66


ESIE08-02 Wiring Diagrams

Part 1

1

6 Wiring Diagrams

6.1


Introduction

Altherma:

This chapter contains the wiring diagrams of the outdoor, hydro-box and domestic hot water tank.

This chapter contains the following wiring diagrams:

Topic

6.2–Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Compressor Compartment

6.3–Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Hydraulic Compartment

6.4–Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Compartment

6.5–Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Hydraulic Module

6.6–Wiring Diagram for EKSWW150~300V3/Z2

6.7–Wiring Diagram for EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2 with EKSOLHWAV1

6.8–Wiring Diagram for EKHWSU150~300*V3 with EKSOLHWAV1

6.9–Wiring Diagram for EKSWWU150~300V3

6.10–Wiring Diagram for EKHWE150~300*V3/Z2 with EKSOLHWAV1

6.11–Wiring Diagram for EKRTR / EKRTW

6.12–Wiring Diagram for EKSOLHWAV1 Solar Kit

See page

1–68

1–71

1–74

1–77

1–80

1–82

1–84

1–86

1–88

1–90

1–92

3

4

5


1–67

3

4

5

Wiring Diagrams

11

6.2

Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Compressor Compartment

Wiring diagram

The illustration below shows the wiring diagram of the unit.

ESIE08-02

K1R

K4R

T

T

1–68



HAP

(A1P)

K1R

K4R

K10R

K11R

L1R

M1C

M1F

M2F

PS

Legend

A1P

A2P

A3P

A4P

BS1~BS4

C1~C4

DS1

E1H

E1HC

F1U, F3U, F4U

F6U

F7U, F8U

H1P~7P (A2P)

Printed circuit board (main)

Printed circuit board (inv.)


Printed circuit board

Push button switch

Capacitor

Dip switch

Bottomplate heater

Crankcase heater

Fuse (T 6.3A / 250V)

Fuse (T 5.0A / 250V)

Fuse (F 1.0A / 250V)

Light emit. diode (serv. monitor-orange)

[H2P] prepare. test --------- flickering malfunction detection -- light up

Light emitting diode

(Service monitor green)

Magnetic relay (Y1S)

Magnetic relay (E1HC)

Magnetic relay

Magnetic relay

Reactor

Motor (compressor)

Motor (fan) (upper)

Motor (fan) (lower)

Switching power supply

Notes

Q1DI

R1

R2

R1T

R2T

R3T

R4T

R5T

R6T

RC

R10T

S1NPH

S1PH

TC

V1R

V2R, V3R

V1T

X1M

Y1E

Y1S

Z1C~Z3C

Z1F~Z4F

Optional connector

X1Y Connector

Field earth leakage breaker (300mA)

Resistor

Resistor

Thermistor (air)



Thermistor (heat exchanger)

Thermistor (heat exchanger middle)

Thermistor (liquid)

Signal receiver circuit

Thermistor (fin)

Pressure sensor

Pressure switch (high)

Signal transmission circuit

Power module

Diode module

IGBT

Terminal strip (power supply)


Solenoid valve (4 way valve)

Noise filter (ferrity core)

Noise filter

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

This wiring diagram only applies to the compressor module switchbox

L: live, N: neutral

Field wiring

Terminal strip

Connection

Connector

Protective earth (screw)

Connector Noiseless earth

Terminal

Not applicable

-

Do not operate the unit by short-circuiting protection device S1PH

Colors: BLU = Blue, BRN = Brown, GRN = Green, RED = Red, WHT = White, YLW = Yellow, ORG =

Orange, BLK = Black

Confirm the method of setting the selector switches (DS1) by service manual. Factory setting of all switches: ‘off’.

1

3

4

5


1–69

3

4

5

Wiring Diagrams

11

Symbols

Wiring dependent on model

Option

PCB

Field wiring

Field wiring

Wire colour

ESIE08-02

1–70


ESIE08-02

6.3

Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Hydraulic Compartment

Wiring diagram


Wiring Diagrams

1

18 17

16a 16

WHT/ORG

WHT/BLU

WHT

BLK

BLU

BRN

ORG

YLW

WHT

RED

WHT/RED

WHT/BLK

VIO

PINK

YLW

BRN

WHT

GRN

WHT/RED

WHT/GRN

WHT/VIO

N

L

Y

*KHW* kit fuse F2B

3

4

5

BLK

BRN

WHT/BRN

WHT/BLK

BRN

BLU

BLK

BRN

BLK

BRN

BLK

BRN

Cooling/heating

Alarm output

Solar input on/off output

BLK

BRN

2

5

1

6

E11H

E12H cooling heating

BLK

BRN

2

5

1

6

E11H

E12H


1–71

Wiring Diagrams ESIE08-02

11

3

4

Legend

A11P

A12P

A3P (*KRTW)

Main PCB

User interface PCB

Thermostat (PC= power circuit)

A4P (EKRP1HB) Solar/remote alarm PCB

A4P (*KRTR) Receiver PCB

E11H-E12H

E4H

Backup heater element 1-2 (6KW)

Booster heater (3kW)

E5H

E6H

E7H

F1B

F1T

F2B

F10U - F13U

FU1

Switchbox heater

Expansion vessel heater

Plate heat exchanger heater

Fuse backup heater

Thermal fuse backup heater

Fuse booster heater

Fuse 1.0A F 250V

Fuse 3.15A T 250V for PCB

FU2

FuS, FuR

K1M

K3M

K4M

K5M

Fuse 5A T 250V

Fuse 5A 250V for solar/remote alarm PCB

Contactor backup heater step

Contactor booster heater

Pump relay


K7M

M1P

Relay for solar pump

Pump

M2S

M3S

PHC1

Q1DI

Q1L

Q2L

R1H (*KRTR)

R1T (*KRTW/R)

R2T (EKRTETS)

R11T

R12T

R13T

R14T

R5T (*KHW*)

S1L

S1S

S2S

SS1

S1T

S2T

S3T

TR1

V1S, V2S

X1M-X10M, X2Y

2way valve for cooling mode

3way valve: floorheating/domestic hot water

Optocoupler input circuit

Earth leakage protector

Thermal protector backup heater

Thermal protector 1/2 booster heater

Humidity sensor

Ambient sensor

External sensor (floor or ambient)

Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor





Flowswitch

Solar pumpstation relay

Benefit kWh rate power supply contact

Dip switch

Thermostat switchbox heater

Thermostat expansion vessel heater

Thermostat plate heat exchanger

Transformer 24V for PCB

Spark suppression 1, 2

Terminal strips, connector

5

Notes

1

2

3

4

This wiring diagram only applies to the hydromodule switchbox

Use one and same dedicated power supply for compressor module switchbox, hydromodule switchbox and *KHW* option

Field wiring

NO/

NC

Normal open / Normal closed

SPST Single pole single throw

Terminal strip Connector

Terminal Protective earth

5

6

Do not operate the unit by short-circuiting any protection device

BLK = Black, RED = Red, BLU = Blue, WHT = White, PNK = Pink, YLW = Yellow, BRN = Brown, GRY =

Grey, GRN = Green, ORG = Orange, VIO = Violet

7

8

For *KHWSU*V3, refer to option manual

Option PCB works with an external 230V AC power supply (L, N)

9 For EKSOLHWAV1, refer to option manual

10 Backup heater KW reduction, refer to installation manual

1–72


ESIE08-02

Symbols


Option

PCB

Field wiring

Field wiring

Wire colour

Wiring Diagrams

1

3

4

5


1–73

3

4

5

Wiring Diagrams

11

6.4

Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Compartment

Wiring diagram


ESIE08-02

+ +

T T

WHT

WHT

BLK

BLK

RED

RED

L22A

L22B

L32A

L32B

L12A

L12B

1–74



Legend

E1H

F1U

F2U

F3U

F4U

F5U

F6U

F7U

A1P

A2P

A3P

BS1~BS4

C1~C4

DS1

E1HC

F8U, F9U

HAP (A1P)

HAP (A2P)

H1P~7P (A1P)

K1M - K2M

K1R (A1P)

K1R (A2P)

K2R (A1P)

K3R (A1P)

L1R ~ L3R

L4R

M1C

Printed circuit board

Printed circuit board (inv.)


Push button switch

Capacitor

Dip switch

Crankcase heater

Bottomplate heater

Fuse (31.5A 250V)

Fuse (31.5A 250V)

Fuse (T 6.3A / 250V)

Fuse (T 6.3A / 250V)

Fuse (T 6.3A / 250V)

Fuse (T 6.3A / 250V)

Fuse (T 5.0A / 250V)

Fuse (F 1.0A / 250V)

Pilot lamp (service monitor-green)

Pilot lamp (service monitor-green)

Pilot lamp (service monitor-orange)

Magnetic contactor


Magnetic relay


Magnetic relay (E1HC)

Reactor

Reactor (for outdoor fan motor)

Motor (compressor)

Notes

M1F

M2F

PS

R1 ~ R4

R1T

R2T

R3T

R4T

R5T

R6T

R7T

S1NPH

S1PH

V1R, V2R

V3R

Motor (fan) (upper)

Motor (fan) (lower)

Switching power supply

Resistor

Thermistor (air)



Thermistor (heat exchanger)

Thermistor (heat exchanger middle)

Thermistor (liquid)

Thermistor (fin)

Pressure sensor

Pressure switch (high)

Power module

Diode module

X1M

Y1E

Y1S

Y3S

Z1C~Z9C

Z1F~Z4F

Q1DI

Optional connector

X6A

X77A

X1Y

Terminal strip


Solenoid valve (4 way valve)

Solenoid valve

Noise filter

Noise filter


Connector

Connector

Connector

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

This wiring diagram only applies to the compressor module switchbox

L: live, N: neutral

Field wiring

Terminal strip

Connection

Connector

Connector

Protective earth (screw)

Noiseless earth

Terminal

Not applicable

-

Do not operate the unit by short-circuiting protection device S1PH

Colors: BLU = Blue, BRN = Brown, GRN = Green, RED = Red, WHT = White, YLW = Yellow, ORG =

Orange, BLK = Black

Confirm the method of setting the selector switches (DS1) by service manual. Factory setting of all switches: ‘off’.

1

3

4

5


1–75

3

4

5

Wiring Diagrams

11

Symbols


Option

PCB

Field wiring

Field wiring

Wire colour

ESIE08-02

1–76


ESIE08-02

6.5

Wiring Diagram for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Hydraulic Module

Wiring diagram


18 17 16a 16

WHT/ORG

WHT/BLU

WHT

BLK

BLU

BRN

ORG

YLW

WHT

RED

WHT/RED

WHT/BLK

WHT

GRN

WHT/RED

YLW

BRN

VIO

PINK

WHT/GRN

WHT/VIO N

L

Y

*KHW* kit fuse F2B

Wiring Diagrams

1

3

4

5

BLK

BRN

GRY

BLK

BRN

BLK

BRN

GRY

BLK

BRN

BLK

BRN

BLK

BRN

BLK

BRN

BLK

BRN

BLU

BRN

WHT/BLK

WHT/BRN

Cooling/heating

Alarm output

Solar input on/off output heating cooling

2

1

3

E13H

E12H

E11H

2

1

3

E12H

E11H

E13H


1–77


11

3

4

Legend

A11P

A12P

A3P (*KRTW)

Main PCB

User interface PCB


A4P (EKRP1HB) Solar/remote alarm PCB

A4P (*KRTR) Receiver PCB

E11H-E12H-E13H Backup heater element 1-2-3 (6KW)

E4H Booster heater (3kW)

E5H

E6H

F1B

F1T

F2B

F8U, F9U

FU1

FU2

FuS, FuR

K1M

K3M

K4M

K5M

Switchbox heater

Expansion vessel heater

Fuse backup heater

Thermal fuse backup heater

Fuse booster heater

Fuse 1.0A F 250V

Fuse 3.15A T 250V for PCB

Fuse 5A T 250V

Fuse 5A 250V for solar/remote alarm PCB

Contactor backup heater step


Pump relay


K7M

M1P

M2S

Relay for solar pump

Pump

2way valve for cooling mode

M3S

PHC1

Q1DI

Q1L

Q2L, Q3L

R1H (*KRTR)

R1T (*KRTW/R)

R2T (EKRTETS)

R11T

R12T

R13T

R14T

R5T (*KHW*)

S1L

S1S

S2S

SS1

S1T

S2T

TR1

V1S, V2S

X1M-X10M

X2Y

3way valve: floorheating/domestic hot water

Optocoupler input circuit


Thermal protector backup heater

Thermal protector 1/2 booster heater

Humidity sensor

Ambient sensor







Flowswitch

Solar pumpstation relay

Benefit kWh rate power supply contact

Dip switch

Thermostat switchbox heater

Thermostat expansion vessel heater

Transformer 24V for PCB

Spark suppression 1, 2

Terminal strips

Connector

5

Notes

1

2

3

4

This wiring diagram only applies to the hydromodule switchbox

Use one and same dedicated power supply compressor module switchbox, hydromodule switchbox and

*KHW* option

Field wiring

NO/

NC





5

6

Do not operate the unit by short-circuiting any protection device



7

8

For *KHWSU*V3, refer to option manual

Option PCB works with an external 230V AC power supply (L, N)

9 For EKSOLHWAV1, refer to option manual

10 For backup heater KW reduction, refer to installation manual

1–78


ESIE08-02

Symbols


Option

PCB

Field wiring

Field wiring

Wire colour

Wiring Diagrams

1

3

4

5


1–79

3

4

5

Wiring Diagrams

11

6.6

Wiring Diagram for EKSWW150~300V3/Z2

Wiring diagram

The illustration below shows the wiring diagram of the domestic hot water tank.

EKHB

SWB

7 8 21 22

ESIE08-02

1

1

RESET

3

2 4

2

Q2L

400V 230V

E4H

1–80


ESIE08-02

Legend

Notes

Wiring Diagrams

E4H

Q2L

Booster heater

Thermostat protector booster heater

1

2

3

4

This wiring diagram applies to the EKSWW option.

Field wiring Protective earth (screw)

Terminal strip

BLK = Black, YLW = Yellow, BRN = Brown, GRN = Green

Please refer to the EKSWW**0V3/Z2 option manual for more installation details.

1

3

4

5


1–81

Wiring Diagrams

11

6.7

Wiring Diagram for EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2 with EKSOLHWAV1

Wiring diagram

3

4

5


EKSOLHWAV1 WITH EKHWS*B*V3

EKHWS*B*V3

SWITCHBOX

X2M

19

20

EKHBH/X*

SWITCHBOX

1

M

BRN

Q3L

2 1

BRN

BRN

YLW/GRN

X8M

4

3

2

1

BLK

E4H

Q2L

BRN

2 1

BRN

YLW/GRN

X6M

2

1

EKHWS*B*Z2

SWITCHBOX

Q2L

4 3

EKSOLHWAV1 WITH EKHWS*Z2

EKSOLHWAV1

X4M

2

1

X2M

13

14

EKHBH/X*

SWITCHBOX

1

M

X2M

19

20

EKHBH/X*

SWITCHBOX

BRN

Q3L

2 1

BRN

BRN

YLW/GRN

X8M

4

3

2

1

Q2L

E4H

BLK

BRN

4

2

3

1

BLK

BRN

YLW/GRN

X6M

2

1

Q3L

4 3

EKSOLHWAV1

X4M

2

1

X2M

13

14

EKHBH/X*

SWITCHBOX

ESIE08-02

1–82


ESIE08-02

Legend

Notes

Wiring Diagrams

1

E4H

F2B

F2U

K3M

L

N

Q2L

Q2T

Q3L

Q3T

X2M~X4M

X5M~X8M

Y1S

Booster heater

Fuse booster heater

Fuse 5A / 250V


Line

Neutral

Thermal protector 1 domestic hot water tank

Thermostat protector 1 domestic hot water tank



Terminal strip

Terminal block

Solenoid valve

3

1

2

3

Field wiring

Terminal strip

Protective earth

Field wiring

BRN

Wire colour

BLK = Black, YLW = Yellow, BRN = Brown, GRN = Green, RED = Red, BLU = Blue, WHT = White, PNK

= Pink, VIO = Violet, GRY = Grey, ORG = Orange

For more installation details, please refer to the relevant installation manual.

4

5


1–83

Wiring Diagrams

11

6.8

Wiring Diagram for EKHWSU150~300*V3 with EKSOLHWAV1

Wiring diagram

3

4


EKSOLHWAV1 WITH EKHWSU*B*V3

EKHWSU*B*V3

SWITCHBOX

Q3T

2 1

Q3L

BRN

2 1

BRN

BRN

X8M

4

3

2

1

YLW/GRN

1

M

EKSOLHWAV1

EKUHW2WB

BLU

1

2 BRN

YLW/GRN

Y1S

Q2T

Q2L

2

1

2

1

L N

F2B

X5M 1 2

3

X7M

2

1

X2M

19

20

F2U

U V

R S

W

K3M

T

5

Q2L

4 3

BLK

E4H

Q3L

BRN

4 3

BRN

YLW/GRN

X6M

2

1

X2M

13

14

X4M

2

1

EKHBH/X*

SWITCHBOX

ESIE08-02

1–84


ESIE08-02

Legend

Notes

Wiring Diagrams

1

E4H

F2B

F2U

K3M

L

N

Q2L

Q2T

Q3L

Q3T

X2M~X4M

X5M~X8M

Y1S

Booster heater

Fuse booster heater

Fuse 5A / 250V


Line

Neutral





Terminal strip

Terminal block

Solenoid valve

3

1

2

3

Field wiring

Terminal strip

Protective earth

Field wiring

BRN

Wire colour

BLK = Black, YLW = Yellow, BRN = Brown, GRN = Green, RED = Red, BLU = Blue, WHT = White, PNK

= Pink, VIO = Violet, GRY = Grey, ORG = Orange

For more installation details, please refer to the relevant installation manual.

4

5


1–85

Wiring Diagrams

11

6.9

Wiring Diagram for EKSWWU150~300V3

Wiring diagram


SOLENOID VALVE

Y1S

3

4

Q1T

Q3L

2

1

2

1

X5M

EKHBH/X005/6/7

SWITCHBOX

L N

F2B

X7M F2U

R S T

K3M

U V W

21 22 7 8

X1M

5

4

Q2L

3

BLK

4

Q3L

3

BRN

2

Q2L

1

E4H

BRN

BLK

YLW/GRN

X6M

ESIE08-02

1–86


ESIE08-02

Legend

Notes

Wiring Diagrams

1

E4H

F2B

F2U

K3M

L

N

Q1T

Q2L

Q3L

X1M

X5M~X7M

Y1S

Booster heater

Fuse booster heater

Fuse 5A/250V


Line

Neutral

Thermostat domestic hot water tank

Thermostat protector booster heater

Thermostat protector domestic hot water tank

Terminal block

Terminal block

Solenoid valve

3

1

2

3

4

This wiring diagram applies to the EKSWWU option.

Field wiring Protective earth (screw)

Terminal strip



Please refer to the EKSWWU**0V3 option manual for more installation details.

4

5


1–87


11

6.10

Wiring Diagram for EKHWE150~300*V3/Z2 with EKSOLHWAV1

6.10.1 EKHWE150~300*V3 with EKSOLHWAV1

3

Wiring diagram


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

HYDRAULIC SWITCHBOX

*KHWE**0A3V3

WATER TANK

SWITCHBOX

X3M L N

2 4

1 3

F2B

X10M

19

20

P1

P2

SETPOINT Q2L: 89 C

11 21 31

Q2L

12 22 32

X9M

14

13

1

2

U V

R S

W

K3M

T

E4H 230V~

X2M 14 13 1 2 X4M 20 19 X2M

4

YLW/GRN

BLU

BRN

M

1

SOLAR PUMP

EKSOLHWAV1 (OPTION)

5

Legend

E4H

F2B

K3M

L

N

Q2L

Q3L

X2M~X4M

X9M~X10M

Booster heater

Fuse booster heater


Line

Neutral

Thermal protector booster heater

Thermal protector hot water tank

Terminal block

Terminal block

Notes

1

2

3

Field wiring

Terminal strip

Protective earth

Field wiring

BRN

Wire colour



Please refer to the *KHWE* manual for more installation details.

1–88


ESIE08-02

6.10.2 EKHWE150~300*Z2 with EKSOLHWAV1

Wiring diagram


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

HYDRAULIC SWITCHBOX

X3M

L1 L2

2 4

1 3

F2B

U V

R S

W

K3M

T

*KHWE*00A3Z2

WATER TANK

SWITCHBOX

X10M

19

20

P1

P2

SETPOINT Q2L & Q3L: 89 C

11 21 31

Q2L

12 22 32

11 21 31

Q3L

12 22 32

E4H 400V~

X9M

14

13

1

2

X2M

14 13 1 2

X4M

20 19

X2M

Wiring Diagrams

1

3

YLW/GRN

BLU

BRN

M

1

SOLAR PUMP

EKSOLHWAV1 (OPTION)

4

Legend

Notes

E4H

F2B

K3M

L

N

Q2L

Q3L

X2M~X4M

X9M~X10M

Booster heater

Fuse booster heater


Line

Neutral

Thermal protector booster heater

Thermal protector hot water tank

Terminal block

Terminal block

1

2

3

Field wiring

Terminal strip

Protective earth

Field wiring

BRN

Wire colour



Please refer to the *KHWE* manual for more installation details.

5


1–89

Wiring Diagrams

11

6.11

Wiring Diagram for EKRTR / EKRTW

3

Wiring diagram

The illustration below shows the wiring diagram of the EKRTR / EKRTW.

X2M 1

H

2

C L

3 4

N

4a 8 only for

EKRTW option

5

A3P

X1M C

COM

H t

R1T

5

X2M

1 2 3 4 4a

H C L N

8 only for

EKRTR option

A4P

X1M

H C

COM

X2M

L N

PC only for

EKRTETS option

A3P

t

R2T t R1T X1M

%H2O R1H

4

5

ESIE08-02

1–90


ESIE08-02

Legend

Notes

Symbols

Wiring Diagrams

1

A3P

A4P

R1H

R1T

R2T

X1M-X2M


Receiver PCB

Humidity sensor

Ambient sensor


Terminal strips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

This wiring diagram only applies to the indoor unit.

Use one and same dedicated power supply for indoor unit, outdoor unit and *KHW* option.

Field wiring

NO/

NC





Do not operate the unit by short-circuiting any protection device.



For *KHWSU*V3, refer to option manual.

Option PCB works with an external 230V AC power supply (L, N).

For EKSOLHWAV1, refer to option manual.

3

4

5


Option

PCB

Field wiring

Field wiring

Wire colour


1–91


11

6.12

Wiring Diagram for EKSOLHWAV1 Solar Kit

3

4

Wiring diagram

The illustration below shows the wiring diagram of the EKSOLHWAV1 with EKHWS*V3.

EKHWS*V3

SWITCHBOX

4

Q2L

3

E4H

BRN

2

Q2L

1

X2M 13 14 1 2 X4M

E(B\D)(H\L)Q* HYDRAULIC

MODULE SWITCHBOX

1

Q3L

2

BRN

BLK

YLW/GRN

X6M

BRN

BRN

X8M

1

M solar pump

EKSOLHWAV1

X2M 20 19


MODULE SWITCHBOX

Legend

5

E4H

F2B

F2U

K3M

L

N

Q2T

Q2L

Q3L

Q3T

X2M~X4M

X5M1~X7M

Y1S

Booster heater

Fuse booster heater

Fuse 5A/250V


Line

Neutral


Thermal protector

Thermal protector 2

Booster heater


Terminal block

Terminal block

Solenoid valve

Notes

1

2

3

BRN

Field wiring

Field wiring

Wire colour

Terminal strip

Protective earth



For more installation details please refer to the relevant installation manual.

1–92



Wiring diagram

The illustration below shows the wiring diagram of the EKSOLHWAV1 with EKHWS*Z2.

EKHWS*Z2

SWITCHBOX

X2M 13 14

4

Q3L

3

1 2 X4M


MODULE SWITCHBOX

E4H

BLK

BRN

2

4

Q2L

1

3

1

Q3L

2

BRN

BLK

YLW/GRN

X6M

BRN

BRN

X8M

1

M solar pump

EKSOLHWAV1

X2M 20 19


MODULE SWITCHBOX

Legend

E4H

F2B

F2U

K3M

L

N

Q2T

Q2L

Q3L

Q3T

X2M~X4M

X5M1~X7M

Y1S

Booster heater

Fuse booster heater

Fuse 5A/250V


Line

Neutral


Thermal protector

Thermal protector 2

Booster heater


Terminal block

Terminal block

Solenoid valve

Notes

1

2

3

BRN

Field wiring

Field wiring

Wire colour

Terminal strip

Protective earth




1

3

4

5


1–93

Wiring Diagrams

11

Wiring diagram

3

4

5

The illustration below shows the wiring diagram of the EKSOLHWAV1 with EKHWSU.

EKHWSU*V3

SWITCHBOX

EKUHWA

Y1S

BLU

BRN

YLW/GRN

Q2T

Q2L

2

1

2

1

X5M


MODULE SWITCHBOX

L N

F2B

X7M F2U

U V W

K3M

R S T

X2M 13 14 1 2 X4M

4

Q2L

3

E4H

BRN

4

Q3L

3

2

Q3T

1 2

Q3L

1

BRN

BLK

YLW/GRN

X6M

BRN

BRN

X8M

EKSOLHWAV1 solar pump

1

M


MODULE SWITCHBOX

X2M 20 19

ESIE08-02

Legend

E4H

F2B

F2U

K3M

L

N

Q2T

Q2L

Q3L

Q3T

X2M~X4M

X5M1~X7M

Y1S

Booster heater

Fuse booster heater

Fuse 5A/250V


Line

Neutral


Thermal protector

Thermal protector 2

Booster heater


Terminal block

Terminal block

Solenoid valve

1–94


ESIE08-02

Notes

Wiring Diagrams

1

2

3

BRN

Field wiring

Field wiring

Wire colour

Terminal strip

Protective earth




1

3

4

5


1–95

ESIE08-02

3

4

5

11

Wiring Diagrams

1–96


ESIE08-02

7 PCB Layout

7.1


Introduction

Outdoor units


■

■

It describes which unit uses which PCB types

It shows the PCB connectors.

This chapter contains the following PCB layouts:

Topic

7.2–PCB Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Compressor Compartment

7.3–PCB Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Compartment

7.4–PCB Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q* Hydraulic Compartment

7.5–PCB Layout for Solar/Remote Alarm (Optional)

PCB Layout

Part 1

1

3

See page

1–98

1–104

1–110

1–112

4

5


1–97

PCB Layout

11

7.2

PCB Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Compressor Compartment

Control & inverter

PCB (A1P)

The illustration below shows the PCB connectors.

X106A X107A F6U X111A P

X6A

3

X9A

4

5

X5A

X21A

X13A

X11A

X12A

X51A

X41A

X17A

X32A

X25A HAP X28A X77A LD F4U

ESIE08-02

NC

LC

N

WVU

LE

1–98


ESIE08-02


PCB (A1P)

X106

The picture below shows the PCB connectors.

X107A F6U X111A P

X6A

X9A

X5A

X21A

X13A

X11A

X12A

X41A

X17A

X32A

X25A X51A HAP X28A X77A LD F4U

PCB Layout

1

NC

LC

N

WVU

3

4

LE

5


1–99

PCB Layout

11

Connectors

3

4

5

Connector

X25A

X28A

X31A

X32A

X51A

X77A

X106A

X107A

X5A

X6A

X9A

X11A

X12A

X13A

X17A

X21A

X111A

HAP

NC-NL

N-P

F4U

F6U

U-V-W

LE-LD

The table below describes the PCB connectors.

M1F

M2F

-

R10T

-

-

NB-LB

C4

M1C

L1R

Connected to Description

X205A

X809A

R1T

R2T ~R5T

R6T

S1NPH

Y1E

Y1S

E1HC

S1PL

S1PH

On service PCB

For optional PCB KRP58M51

On communication PCB

Air thermistor

Coil thermistor

Discharge pipe thermistor

Suction pipe thermistor

Expansion valve

4-way valve

Crankcase heater

Low pressure switch


Connector for spare parts adaptor

For optional PCB KRP58M51

Fan motor

Fan motor

Fin thermistor

Indication CPU / Power supply

On noise filter

Capacitor

Fuse 6.3A/250V for Y1S, E1HC

Fuse 5.0A/250V for M1F, M2F

Compressor

Reactor coil

ESIE08-02

1–100


ESIE08-02

Service PCB (A2P)


Connectors

X205A


Connector

X205A

Connected to

X5A

Description

Inverter & control PCB

X205A

PCB Layout

1

3

4

5


1–101

ESIE08-02 PCB Layout

11

Noise filter PCB

(A3P)


NB LB

NB LB

3

4

5

Connectors

F1U

NF

LF

NA LA E


Connector

E

F1U

LA-NA

LB-NB

LF-NF

Connected to

-

X1M

X1M

LC-NC

X801A

Description

Via Z3C to X1M

Fuse 6.3A/250V

Power supply 1~ 230V

Inverter and control PCB

Communication PCB

F1U

NF

LF

NA LA E

1–102


ESIE08-02

Communication

PCB (A4P)


X809A

X809A

X803A

Connectors

X803A


Connector

X801A

X803A

X809A

E3

F3U -


NF-LF Noise filter PCB

W1M (1, 2, 3) To hydraulic compartment

A1P main

X1M

Inverter and control PCB

Earth

Fuse 6.3A/250V


X801A

F3U

E3

X801A

F3U

E3

PCB Layout

1

3

4

5

1–103

3

4

5

PCB Layout

11

7.3

PCB Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Compartment

Control PCB (A1P)


L21A L31A F3U F4U X9A X8A X4A X5A

ESIE08-02

L11A

E1

X17A

X13A

X11A

X12A

X51A

X41A

HAP

X21A

F5U

X6A

F1U

F2U

E

L1A L2A L3A NA F6U X77A X27A X28A X25A

1–104


ESIE08-02


PCB (A1P)

The picture below shows the PCB connectors.

PCB Layout

1

3

4

5


1–105

PCB Layout

11

Connectors

3

4

5


Connector

L11A

F6U

F5U

F4U

F3U

F2U

F1U

E1

E

HAP

X41A

X28A

X27A

X25A

X21A

X17A

X13A

X12A

X9A

X8A

X803A

X77A

X6A

X5A

X51A

X4A

X11A

N1A

L31A

L21A

L1A~NA


X109A

X108A

-

X1M (1-2-3)

-

X105A

X104A

On Inverter PCB (Diode module fan motor)

On Inverter PCB (PS Module)

Towards Hydrobox

For Optional PCB

For Optional PCB

On Inverter PCB

Connector for spare capacity adaptor

On Inverter PCB

E1HC

Y3S

Y1S

Y1E

S1NPH

R6T

R2T-R5T

R1T

N1B

L31B

L21B

X1M

(L1-L2-L3-N)

-

-

-

L11B

-

-

-

GRN

-

GRN

Crankcase heater

Liquid Injection Valve

4-way valve

Expansion valve

Pressure sensor

Liquid thermistor

Discharge-Suction-HEX-HEX middle- thermistor

Ambient thermistor

On Noise filter A3P

On Noise filter A3P

On Noise filter A3P

Towards main power supply

On Noise filter A3P

Fuse 6.3A / 250V for Hydrobox

Fuse 6.3A / 250V for Y1S-Y3S-E1HC-

Fuse 6.3A / 250V for M1F-M2F (AC)

Fuse 6.3A / 250V for PS Module A2P

Fuse 31.5A / 250V for Inverter Module L1 A2P

Fuse 31.5A / 250V for Inverter Module L2 A2P

Protective earth

Protective earth

Indication CPU/power supply

ESIE08-02

1–106


ESIE08-02

Inverter PCB (A2P)


PCB Layout

1

3

4

5


1–107

PCB Layout

11

Connectors

3

4


Connector

W109A

F7U

X106A

X107A

TP1

TP2

X141A

X142A

X111A

X105A

X108A

X104A

X32A

L12A

L32A

L22A

WVU

X191A

Connected to

-

-

-

-

-

X9A

M1F

M2F

R7T

X5A

X8A

X4A

S1PH

L1R

L2R

L3R

M1C

L4R

Description

On Control PCB

On Control PCB


Reactor inverter M1C



Compressor

Reactor inverter M1F-M2F

On Control PCB

Fuse 1.0A / 250V for M1F-M2F (DC)

Fan Motor upper

Fan Motor lower

-

-

Inverter DC checkpin

Inverter DC checkpin

Inverter Fin thermistor

On Control PCB

5

ESIE08-02

1–108


ESIE08-02

Noise filter PCB

(A3P)


PCB Layout

1

3

4

5

Connectors


Connector

L11B

L21B

L31B

N1B

L12B

L22B

L23B

Connected to

L11A

L21A

L31A

N1A

L1R

L2R

L3R

Description

On Control PCB (L1)

On Control PCB (L2)

On Control PCB (L3)

On Control PCB (N)





1–109

3

4

5

PCB Layout

11

7.4

PCB Layout for E(B\D)(H\L)Q* Hydraulic Compartment

Main PCB (A11P)


X15A X19A X3A X11A X12A

ESIE08-02

FU1

X20A

X16A

X14A

X21A

X13A

X17A

HAP

X1A

X60A

X4A

X18A

X40A

X10A

X61A

X2A

X33A X9A X8A X7A X6A X5A


1–110

ESIE08-02

Connectors

PCB Layout

The table below describes the PCB connectors for EKHBH(X).

X12A

X13A

X14A

X15A

X16A

X17A

X18A

X19A

X4A

X5A

X6A

X7A

X8A

X9A

X10A

X11A

X20A

X21A

X33A

X40A

X60A

X61A

FU1

HAP

Connector Connected to Terminals

X1A

X2A

X3A

-

-

-

-

-

Description

TR1

TR1

K5M (13-14) -

-

-

S1L

R1T (A1P)

R2T

R3T

R4T

R5T

K1M

K2M

K3M

K7M

K4M

M3S

PCB (A3P)

PCB (A2P)

-

Transformer (220V/24V)

Transformer (220V/24V)

Input Thermal protector Backup heater via K5M contact

Flowswitch





DHW thermistor (DHW option)

VRV checker connection

Contactor backup heater step 1

-

-

Contactor backup heater step 2


EKSOLHWAV1 pump relay

Pump relay

X2M 9-10 3-way valve: floorheating / DHW

X2M 1-2-3-4 Room thermostat (EKRTR / EKRTW)

ERHQ

M2S

Q2L

EKRP1HB

-

-

-

X1M 1-2-3

Remote controller PCB

Terminal nr X1M 1-2-3: internal wiring to outdoor

X2M 5-6-7 2-way valve for cooling

X2M 13-14 Thermal protector booster heater

-

-

-

CN2 Option PCB EKSOLHWAV1 / alarm-operation signal

Not applicable (not in use)



Fuse 3.15A/250V for PCB

Indication CPU / Power supply

1

3

4

5


1–111

3

4

5

PCB Layout

11

7.5

PCB Layout for Solar/Remote Alarm (Optional)

Main PCB (A4P)


X2M X2A SS1

ESIE08-02

F1U

F2U

X1A X1M

1–112


ESIE08-02

X2M X2A SS1

PCB Layout

1

F1U

F2U

Connectors

X1A X1M


Connector Connected to Description

F1U

F2U

X2M

X2A/CN2

SS1

X1A/CN1 -

-

X1M -

-

Fuse 5A/250V

Fuse 5A/250V

Not used

X33A (A11P) Main PCB

Dipswitch 1, sealed in ON position

Short using connector labelled X1A

Connect to solar pump station on remote alarm output

3

4

5


1–113

ESIE08-02

3

4

5

11

PCB Layout

1–114


ESIE08-02

Part 2

Functional Description

2

4


This part contains information on the functions used to control the system. Understanding these functions is vital when diagnosing a malfunction that is related to the functional control.

Overview


Chapter

1–General Functionality

2–Hydraulic Module Functional Concept

3–Compressor Compartment Functional Concept

See page

2–3

2–23

2–37

3

4

5

Part 2 – Functional Description 2–1

ESIE08-02

1

2

3

5

2–2 Part 2 – Functional Description

ESIE08-02 General Functionality

Part 2

1

1 General Functionality

2

1.1


Introduction

Overview

This chapter will explain all functions not related to the compressor frequency control, fan control and expansion valve control. These functions have been programmed to ensure the unit's reliability and lifetime, enable the operation in case of malfunction.

3

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

1.2–Function of Thermistors

1.3–Forced Operating Mode (Emergency Operation)

1.4–Simulated Operation Function

1.5–Restart Standby

1.6–Automatic Restart

1.7–Forced Thermostat OFF

1.8–Test Run Control

1.9–4-way Valve Control

1.10–Pump Down and Forced Defrost Operation

1.11–Defrost Operation

1.12–Freeze Prevention Function

1.13–Crankcase Heater Control

1.14–Benefit kWh Rate Power Supply

See page

2–13

2–14

2–15

2–17

2–18

2–19

2–4

2–6

2–8

2–9

2–10

2–11

2–12

4

5

Part 2 – Functional Description

2–3

4

t >

IR5T

M


1

1.2

Function of Thermistors

Locating of the thermistors

V3

2

3

FCU1

T1

T1

M

M

M

R12T t >

: COOLING (EKHBX)

: HEATING (EKHBX + EKHBH)

EVAPORATOR

CONDENSOR

R6T

R11T t >

R14T t >

PHE

R13T t >

R3T

R5T

R4T p >

R2T

R1T

HEATING

COOLING

W1

5

T1

FCU1

T1

M

M1

M

R12T t >

R11T t >

R14T t >

: COOLING (EKHBX)

: HEATING (EKHBX + EKHBH)

EVAPORATOR

CONDENSOR

PHE

R13T t >

R3T

R6T

R5T

R4T p >

R2T

R1T

HEATING

COOLING t >

IR5T t >

M

2–4



Functions of the thermistors

1

Location

Compressor compartment heat exchanger

Compressor compartment ambient

Discharge pipe

Suction pipe

Inverter power module

Outdoor heat exchanger middle temperature

Liquid refrigerant temperature

Outlet water temperature after PHE

Outlet water temperature after BUH


Inlet water temperature R14T

DHW temperature

Thermistor Mode

R4T

R1T

R2T

R3T

R10T (V3)

R7T (W1)

R5T

R6T

R11T

R12T

R13T

R15T

Function

Cooling

■

Inverter current protection control

Heating ■ Inverter current protection control

■

Defrost control

Cooling ■ Outdoor fan speed control

■

PMV control

■

■

Pressure difference control

Overall current protection control

Heating ■ Defrost control

■

Forced thermostat OFF

■ Overall current protection control

Cooling

■

Discharge superheat control

■

■

Expansion valve control

Crankcase heater

Heating ■ Expansion valve control

■

Crankcase heater

Cooling ■ Expansion valve control (SH control)

Heating

■

Expansion valve control (SH control)

■ Suction pipe superheat protection control

Cooling

■

Outdoor fan speed control

■

■

Inverter fin temperature control

Pressure difference control

Heating ■ Inverter fin temperature control

Cooling

■

Calculate the expected high pressure

■ Outdoor fan speed control

Heating

■

Calculate the expected low pressure

Heating ■ Calculate the subcool

■

Expansion valve control

Cooling ■ Controlling the H/P operation (thermostat

ON/OFF, capacity control)

Heating

■ Freeze prevention control

Heating

■

Controlling the BUH operation (thermostat

ON/OFF, capacity control)

Cooling

■

Compressor frequency control (target Te)

■ Freeze-up control

Heating

■

Compressor frequency control (target Tc)

■

■

Hot start control

Peak cut-OFF

Heating ■ Start up control (BUH), temperature drop prevention (defrost)

DHW

■

■

Freeze prevention control

Controlling the H/P, BSH operation

(thermostat ON/OFF), DHW priority instruction

2

3

4

5


2–5

General Functionality ESIE08-02

1

1.3

Purpose

Forced Operating Mode (Emergency Operation)

2

The table below describes the purpose of the forced operating mode.

If...

■

■

■

Then...

R/C is defective

Hydraulic compartment PC board is defective

Compressor compartment PC board is defective

Forced operating mode can be used to go to cooling or heating. In forced operating mode, the compressor is forced to operate until the defective indoor or outdoor PC board is back online.

3

Starting conditions

You can operate the system manually by changing the emergency switch on the outdoor PC board from "normal" to "emergency". When the system is operating in "emergency" it can not control the water temperature. Compressor will operate with fixed capacity request.

The outdoor unit must be set to "emergency" while the power is off.

4

Ending conditions

You can end the emergency operation by changing the "emergency" switch back to "normal" while the power is OFF.

5

Emergency operation

Below table explains what will happen when the switch is set to "emergency":

Changing the switch to "emergency" for the… Switches ON the…

Hydraulic compartment

Compressor compartment

■ Pump

■

■

Compressor

Outdoor fan(s)

How to set


To set emergency operation, proceed as follows:

Step Action

1

2

Turn OFF the power.

Switch ON the emergency switch on the outdoor PCB.

EMERGENCY

ON COOL

1 2 3 4

OFF HEAT

2–6



Step Action

3

Set the emergency switch on the outdoor PCB to the forced mode you prefer (Cooling or

Heating).

1

EMERGENCY

ON COOL

2

4

1 2 3 4

OFF HEAT

Turn ON the power supply.

3

Active components

Attention!

Additional info

Component

Compressor

4-way valve

Fan

Pump

Forced cooling

ON

OFF

H fan speed

ON

Forced heating

ON

ON

H fan speed

ON

Forced defrosting

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

Confirm the operation of the pump during forced operation.

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

During emergency operation, do not attempt to operate the equipment from the remote controller.

■

■

If a safety device is activated during emergency, all actuators are turned OFF

Freeze-up prevention (Cooling)

High pressure control (Heating)

In cooling, the unit runs for 20 minutes and then stops for 10min in order to avoid freeze-up of the indoor heat exchanger.

In heating, defrost is activated for 3 minutes once every hour.

Emergency operation can not be carried out when the PC board itself is defective.

The unit will not regulate the temperature during emergency operation.

Change the position of the emergency switch only when the power is turned off.

In case compressor compartment broken/no compressor compartment connected:

■ The hydraulic compartment will go automatically in emergency operation.

The space heating and/or Hot water operation will be performed by the backup or/and Booster heater only.

■ Emergency operation by hydraulic compartment will only operate in case a malfunction is applicable.

4

5


2–7


1.4

Simulated Operation Function

1

3

2

General description

In case of a thermistor malfunction, simulated operation is performed in two different ways as shown below even while the malfunction is detected.

A. Operation continues while the malfunction code is displayed on the remote controller.

■

■

■

■

■

Applicable thermistors:

Outside air temperature thermistor

Heat exchanger distribution pipe thermistor (in cooling operation only)

Intermediate heat exchanger thermistor (in heating operation only)

Liquid pipe thermistor

Hydraulic compartment heat exchanger thermistor

4

5

Note

B. Operation continues even the malfunction is detected. The remote controller displays

"Inspection/Test Run". Only when the button is pushed, the malfunction code appears.


■ Radiation fin thermistor

In case of a thermistor malfunction other than A and B above, a malfunction stop is made and no simulated operation is carried out.

■

■

■

■




Heat exchanger distribution pipe thermistor (in heating operation only)

Intermediate heat exchanger thermistor (in cooling operation only)

2–8



1.5

Restart Standby

1

To prevent the compressor from frequent ON/OFF and to equalize the pressure in the refrigerant line, the unit conducts a forced thermostat OFF condition for 3 minutes after the compressor has stopped.

Moreover, the fans conduct residual operation for a period of time to expedite equalization and to prevent refrigerant from entering the evaporator.

2

Compressor

Thermostat OFF

ON

Restart standby complete

OFF


Cooling

Operation complete

110

130

166

87

0

Heating

10 sec. 30

30

0

30 sec.

sec.

sec.

Moves to "Stop" or "Starting control" after completion of "Restart standby".

Outdoor unit fan

ON

Residual operation

OFF

For 5 min.

3

4

5


2–9


1.6

Automatic Restart

1

Purpose

The purpose of the auto-restart function is to automatically resume the same operating mode as when the unit was operating when the power supply is restored after a power failure.

Do not use the "Automatic Restart" function to daily start/stop the unit.

3

2

Precautions when turning OFF power

■

■

■

■

When you have to turn OFF the power supply in order to carry out maintenance, make sure to turn the remote control's ON/OFF switch OFF firstly.

If you turn OFF the power supply while the remote control's ON/OFF switch is still ON, the

"automatic restart function" automatically starts the hydro-box pump immediately and the outdoor unit fan starts automatically 3 minutes after the power supply is turned back ON.

Do not start/stop the unit by disconnecting the power supply. Stop the unit by stop commando from the remote controller or optional controller before disconnecting the power supply. Be sure that the compressor and the outdoor fans are stopped before disconnecting the power supply so the

"Refrigerant Recovery function" has been finished correctly.

When restarting the unit after the power was disconnected for a longer period leave the unit OFF with the power supply connected for about half an hour (See "Crankcase Heater Control").

4

5

2–10



1.7

Outline

Forced Thermostat OFF

1

The unit will perform the forced thermostat off function in following conditions:

Condition 1 (Cooling)

■ Thermostat off due to freeze-up prevention.

Based on the judgment to prevent the indoor heat exchanger from freezing, the thermostat is forcedly turned OFF.

■ Thermostat off due to low outdoor temperature

When the outside temperature is <10°C DB in cooling mode, the unit will conduct a forced thermostat off operation to protect the system.

Condition 2 (Heating)

Thermostat off due to low / high outdoor temperature.

■ When the outside temperature is for W1 < -25°CDB / > 35°CDB and for V3 < -20°CDB / > 35°CDB in heating mode, the unit will conduct a forced thermostat off operation to protect the system.

Condition 3 (Hot water operation)

Thermostat off due to low / high outdoor temperature

■ When the outside temperature is for W1 < -25°CDB / > 35°CDB and for V3 < -20°CDB / > 35°CDB in Hot water operation mode, the unit will conduct a forced thermostat off operation to protect the system.

2

3

4

Note

See also "1.12–Freeze Prevention Function" on page 2–17.

5


2–11


1

1.8

Purpose

Test Run Control

When operating the units for the first time after installation, the unit will - depending on the selected operation mode - perform a test run operation first.

3

2

Automatic test run

When the unit is put into operation (by pressing the y

button) for the first time, the system will automatically perform a test run in cooling mode. The test run will take up to 3 minutes, during which no specific indication is given on the user interface.

During the automatic test run, it is important to ensure that the water temperature does not drop below

10°C, which might activate the freeze-up protection and thereby prevent the test run to finish.

Should the water temperature drop below 10°C, press the

❈

/

❃

button so the

❈

icon is displayed. This will active the backup heater during the automatic test run and raise the water temperature sufficiently.

If the automatic test run has ended successfully, the system will automatically resume normal operation.

If there are misconnections or malfunctions, an error code will be displayed on the user interface. To

resolve the error codes, see "Troubleshooting".

4

5

Note

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

When the compressor compartment is put into pump down operation (see the outdoor unit installation manual), the automatic test run flag will be cleared. The next time the system is put into operation, the automatic test run will be executed again.

When running in test run mode, the unit will sense on site installation parameters (e.g.: failure to open stop valves,...) and indicate the applicable malfunction code if required.

If the remote controller shows E3, E4 or L8 as an error code, it is possible that the stop valve is closed.

Check the inter unit branch wiring connection (1-2-3 wiring) when error code U4 or UF is displayed on the remote controller.

When error code U2 is displayed on the remote controller, check for voltage imbalance.

When error code L4 is displayed on the remote controller, it is possible that the air flow passage is closed.

When there is no error code displayed, cooling operation continues without interruption. (However, this control is once again performed after refrigerant is recovered by means of the pump down switch and at the time of the first operation after the outdoor PC board replacement.)

2–12



1.9

Purpose

4-way Valve Control

1

The purpose of the 4-way valve control is to control how the superheated refrigerant passes through the 4-way valve. The 4-way valve control carries out the changeover switching of the 4-way valve. This changeover switching is only carried out during operation, because a certain pressure difference is required to move the internal cylinder.

When...

Cooling

Heating

Then the 4-way valve connects the outlet of the compressor with...

Outdoor heat exchanger

Indoor heat exchanger

2

Method

Time chart

The table below describes the 4-way valve control operation.

In...

■

■

■

Heating, except for defrosting

Cooling

Defrosting

The 4-way valve is...

ON

OFF

The time chart below illustrates the 4-way valve control.

Compressor

ON

OFF

3

4

5

Unit mode

Defrosting

4-way valve

Cooling

Heating

ON

OFF

ON

OFF


2–13


1

1.10

Pump Down and Forced Defrost Operation

Outline

This unit is equipped with an automatic pump down operation which will collect all refrigerant from the field piping and hydro-box in the outdoor unit. To protect the environment, make sure to perform the following pump down operation when relocating or disposing of the unit.

2

Note

The outdoor unit is equipped with a low pressure sensor to protect the compressor by switching it off.

Never short-circuit the low pressure sensor during pump down operation!

Procedure

3

4

5

Note

1

Stop space and Domestic hot water demand (red LED OFF and shower icon not displayed) and select Maximum pump speed.

2

Switch the power supply to the outdoor unit OFF and back ON.

3

Activate "pump down/forced defrost" on the compressor module PCB by pressing BS4 for at least

5 seconds.

4

The compressor and outdoor fan will start automatically.

5

Request space heating via remote controller as soon as possible, in order to activate the circulation pump (to prevent the plate heat exchanger from freeze-up) and allow BUH operation if required.

6

a) Forced defrost can be stopped by pressing BS4 on outdoor PCB.

b) Once operation stops (after 3 to 5 minutes), close the liquid and the gas stop valve.

7

Pump down is now finished. U4 may be displayed on the remote controller, this is not a malfunction.

8

After "pump down/forced defrost" is finished or stopped, keep the circulation pump running for at least 5 minutes.

9

Switch OFF the power supply of the outdoor unit.

■

■

■

Make sure that the water temperature and volume is sufficient to perform the "pump down/forced defrost" operation.

Make sure to re-open both stop valves before restart operation of the unit.

After a finished or stopped pump down, the unit will perform a test run at first operation (same as during commissioning).

2–14



1.11

Defrost Operation

Outline

Defrost starting conditions

1

When the unit is operating in heating mode, a defrost operation will be conducted in order to avoid ice formation on the outdoor unit heat exchanger.

1

Defrost will start when the following conditions have been realized:

&

■

OR

Integrated compressor running time is 25 minutes or more since the completion of the previous defrost operation.

■ Defrost upper limit time A is met.

■ Outdoor unit heat exchanger area temperature (Tb) is within the defrost requesting area.

2

3

W1 only

Evaporating temperature Te or

Outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature Tb

Areas

-25

-14

-20

-11

-15 -10

-9

Defrost permitting area

-7

-20

-5

-16

-1

10

Factory setting

Outdoor Temp. Ta

-3

-7

-10

-12

-15

-20

Defrost requesting area

-25

Factory setting (Request)

-24

-28

-30

-32

2

Forced defrost switch “BS4”.

3

After one hour of heating operation in emergency operation.

Defrost upper limit A

■

■

Outdoor temperature > -5°C : 2 hours

Outdoor temperature

≤ -5°C

: 6 hours

4

5


2–15


1

Defrost control

2

Defrosting start

Previous control

Compressor

4-way valve

ON


150 pls

Outdoor unit fan

ON

Hydro-box pump

ON

OFF

Defrosting complete

0 Hz

OFF

250 pls

(wet protection control)

ON

0 pls (5~60 sec.) 0 pls (5 sec.)

ON

OFF

3

4

Defrost ending conditions

5

Defrosting ends when the following conditions have been realized. Note that defrosting can be operated for 10 minutes at longest.

OR

&

&

&

&

Defrost Time>1 min.

Tb>12

Defrost Time>1 min.

Water outlet temperature < / = 2,5

Defrost Time>10 min.

Tb>9

Defrost Time>10 sec.

Hp>2.45 MPa

2–16



1.12

Freeze Prevention Function

1

Purpose

In order to avoid formation of ice on the hydraulic module heat exchanger in cooling mode, the system automatically starts up a freeze prevention cycle when a number of specific conditions are fulfilled.

Freeze Prevention start conditions

Freeze prevention start decided by the hydraulic module.

2

Action

When start condition is met, the compressor will be forced stopped for a minimum of three minutes.

Freeze prevention -

Reset conditions

After three minutes forced stop, the compressor operation permission will be released in case the outlet water temperature > outlet water setpoint + 3°C.

3

OR and

*Outlet water temperature <6

*or and

Evaporating temperature < 3 [ Continuously for 2 minutes ]

Evaporating temperature < 5

Compressor frequency 52Hz

Continuously for 30 seconds

4

Outlet water temperature <3

5


2–17


1

1.13

Crankcase Heater Control

Outline

After the compressor has been turned off, the crankcase heater control will be activated in order to avoid refrigerant from dissolving in the compressor oil.

2

Trigger conditions

ON

OFF

3

70˚C 75˚C

Discharge pipe temperature

4

5

2–18



1.14

Benefit kWh Rate Power Supply

Warning!

1

Electricity companies throughout the world work hard to provide reliable electric service at competitive prices and are often authorized to bill clients at benefit rates. E.g. time-of-use rates, seasonal rates,

Wärmepumpentarif in Germany and Austria, ... .

This equipment allows for connection to such benefit rate power supply delivery systems.

Consult with the electricity company acting as provider at the site where this equipment is to be installed to know whether it is appropriate to connect the equipment in one of the benefit kWh rate power supply delivery systems available, if any.

■

■

When the equipment is connected to such benefit kWh rate power supply, the electricity company is allowed to: interrupt power supply to the equipment for certain periods of time demand that the equipment only consumes a limited amount of electricity during certain periods of time.

The unit is designed to receive an input signal by which the unit switches into forced off mode. At that moment, the outdoor unit compressor will not operate.

2

3

4

For a benefit kWh rate power supply like illustrated below as type 1

■

■

If the benefit kWh rate power supply is of the type that power supply is not interrupted, then control of the heaters is still possible.

For the different possibilities of controlling heaters at moments that benefit kWh rate is active, refer

to "[D] Benefit kWh rate power supply" on page 4-32.

If heaters must be controlled at moments that the benefit kWh rate power supply is off, then these heaters shall be connected to a separate power supply.

During the period that the benefit kWh rate is active and power supply is continuous, then stand-by power consumption is possible (PCB, controller, pump, ...).

For a benefit kWh rate power supply like illustrated below as types 2 or 3

Benefit kWh rate power supplies that completely shut power supply are not allowed for this application because of the water freeze prevention that would not be powered.

5

Possible types of benefit kWh rate power supply

Possible connections and requirements to connect the equipment to such power supply are illustrated in the figure below:


2–19

1

3

4

5

2


3

[D-01]=1

1

2

1

L N

S2S

3

1

2

2

L N

S2S

3

1

2

3

L N

S2S

4 3

1

2

2

L N

S2S

4 3

1

2

3

L N

S2S

3

[D-01]=2

1

2

1

L N

S2S

4

4

3 4

17 18 X2M

A1P

X40A

1

2

3

4

0

X

*

DHQ/

*

DLQ/

*

BHQ/

*

BLQ

Benefit kWh rate power supply box

Receiver controlling the signal of the electricity company

Power supply to outdoor unit

Voltage free contact

Allowed

Not allowed

When the outdoor unit is connected to a benefit kWh rate power supply, the voltage free contact of the receiver controlling the benefit kWh rate signal of the electricity company must be connected to clamps

17 and 18 of X2M (as illustrated in the figure above).

When parameter [D-01]=1 at the moment that the benefit kWh rate signal is sent by the electricity company, that contact will open and the unit will go in forced off mode

(1)

.

When parameter [D-01]=2 at the moment that the benefit kWh rate signal is sent by the electricity company, that contact will close and the unit will go in forced off mode

(2)

.

■ type 1

The benefit kWh rate power supply is of the type that power supply is not interrupted.

■ type 2 and 3

The benefit kWh rate power supply is of the type that power supply will be interrupted after elapse of time or is interrupted immediately.

2–20


ESIE08-02

Warning!

Note

General Functionality

■

■

Benefit kWh rate power supplies that completely shut power supply like illustrated above as types

2 and 3 are not allowed for this application because of the water freeze prevention that would not be powered.

When connecting the equipment to a benefit kWh rate power supply, change field settings [D-01] and both [D-01] and [D-00] in case the benefit kWh rate power supply is of the type that power

supply is not interrupted (like illustrated above as type 1). Refer to "[D] Benefit kWh rate power supply" on page 4-32.

1

2

■

■

If the benefit kWh rate power supply is of the type that power supply is not interrupted, the unit will be forced to off. Controlling the solar pump is still possible.

Water pipe freeze prevention has higher priority than benefit kWh rate. In case of water piping freeze prevention, the backup heater can function while the unit is in forced off mode by benefit kWh function.

3

4

5


2–21

3

4

5

1

2


2–22


ESIE08-02 Hydraulic Module Functional Concept

Part 2

1

2 Hydraulic Module Functional Concept

2

2.1


Introduction

Overview

This chapter will explain more details about the various functions that are programmed for the hydro-box.


Topic

2.2–Pump Blockage Prevention Control

2.3–Pump Operation Control

2.4–Defrost control

2.5–Cooling operation

2.6–Heating operation

2.7–H/P hot water heating operation

2.8–H/P hot water heating priority function

2.9–Booster heater operation

2.10–Backup heater operation

2.11–Emergency operation

See page

2–24

2–25

2–27

2–28

2–29

2–30

2–31

2–32

2–33

2–35

3

4

5


2–23

3

4

5

Hydraulic Module Functional Concept ESIE08-02

1

2.2

Outline

Pump Blockage Prevention Control

In order to prevent pump operation failure (blockage) due to no pump operation for long-term, pump will operate at regular intervals.

2

General

In case the pump was not operating for continuously 24 hours, pump will run for a short period.

2–24



2.3

Pump Operation Control

1

Outline

When heating / cooling and (or) domestic hot water operation is activated the pump will operate.

Details

Heating / cooling mode

The pump operation pattern is determined by some system parameters and field settings.

When the unit is put into heating / cooling operation (by pressing the ON / OFF button, LED lit - or via central room thermostat) the pump will operate according to below pattern.

No central room thermostat connected (default field setting)

2

Heating / Cooling

At interface

Thermostat

Water circuit

Pump

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

180 sec.

120 sec.

180 sec.

120 sec.

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

3

4

Central room thermostat connected

5

Central room thermostat

OFF

Pump

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

Continuously pump operation (adapted field setting)

Heating / Cooling

At interface

OFF

Thermostat

Water circuit

Pump

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

Applicable condition is irrelevant for the pump operation status


2–25


1

Domestic hot water mode

When the unit is put into domestic hot water [DHW] operation (by pressing the shower button, shower icon is displayed) the pump will operate according to below pattern.

3

2

4

ON

Thermostat DHW mode

OFF

Compressor

ON

OFF

ON

Pump

OFF

R3T > 36 C

ON

OFF

Pump

R3T < 36 C

MAX

100 sec.

R3T > 36 C

Applicable condition depends on the Heating / Cooling mode status

5

Remark

■

■

■

■

■

The pump will stop just before compressor start up. This function is applicable at continuous pump operation as well.

Pump operation at domestic hot water mode is independent on the heating / cooling mode and related setting.

Pump will continue for 1 minute in case unit is stopped (via ON / OFF button or central room thermostat) and BUH was active.

Central room thermostat determines operation mode (cooling or heating).

Pump can run for pipe freeze-up prevention, see page 4-28.

2–26



2.4

Defrost control

Defrost operation during space heating operation

■

■

■

■

■

■

Conditions during defrost cycle:

Outdoor demand operation mode is heating

Backup heater is based on BUH heating thermostat-ON / OFF state

Three-way valve is space heating side

Two-way valve is open

Pump on and after defrost cycle keeps on for 6 minutes additionally

Booster heater is based on BSH domestic hot water heating thermostat-ON / OFF state

Remark

During additional pump operation of 6 minutes. Pump operation signal is NOT displayed on the interface.

Defrost operation during domestic hot water heating defrost

■

■

■

■

■

■

Conditions during defrost cycle:

Outdoor demand operation mode is heating

Backup heater is OFF

Three-way valve is sanitary water heating side

Two-way valve hold last state

Pump ON and after defrost cycle keeps on for 6 minutes additionally

Booster heater is BSH sanitary water heating thermostat-ON / OFF state

Remark

During additional pump operation of 6 minutes. Pump operation signal is NOT displayed on the interface.

1

2

3

4

5


2–27

5


1

2.5

Cooling operation

3

2

4

Remark

Cooling condition ON

When the water temperature zone > zone B (

ΔT > 0)

&

[

No hot water heating priority instruction

Cooling condition OFF

When the water temperature zone = zone A (

ΔT = -1) or

[

&

&

[

[

Hot water heating priority instruction or

[



ΔT > 0)

Hot water heating priority instruction

ΔT = outlet - target

Condition ON indicate that H/P will operate in cooling mode.

Condition OFF indicate that H/P will not operate in cooling mode.

ESIE08-02

2–28


Remark


2.6

Heating operation

Heating condition ON


ΔT > 0)

&

[


Heating condition OFF

When the water temperature zone = zone A (

ΔT = -1) or

[

&

&

[

[

Hot water heating priority instruction or

[



ΔT > 0)

Hot water heating priority instruction

ΔT = target - outlet

Condition ON indicate that H/P will operate in heating mode.

Condition OFF indicate that H/P will not operate in heating mode.

2

1

3

4

5


2–29


1

2.7

H/P hot water heating operation

3

2

The H/P hot water heating thermostat ON / OFF judging is always carried out when hot water mode is

ON (active on interface).

Hot water H/P thermostat ON

When

ΔT (T

HPMAX

- [6.01] - [6.00] - water temperature tank)

≥

0°C

T

HP ON

Hot water H/P thermostat OFF

When

ΔT (T

HPMAX

- [6.01] - water temperature tank)

≤

0°C

T

HP OFF

H/P will only OPERATE when hot water H/P thermostat ON and has the permission determined by setting [8] (see setting [8.01] & [8.02]).

4

Remark

5

2–30



2.8

Remark

H/P hot water heating priority function

The H/P domestic hot water heating priority instruction is determined by the request level between heating / cooling and domestic hot water.

{

Hot water heating priority instruction active

&

■

■

■

Request level hot water heating mode higher than heating (cooling) mode

Balance between DHW and heating request (default): DSW_No4=OFF

Domestic water tank installed: DSW_No2=ON

■

■

H/P domestic water heating thermostat-ON

Anti-recycle timer, setting [8.02] not active

Hot water heating priority instruction is not applicable.

In case of domestic water heating operation mode is not active (not activated on the interface, schedule timer), setting [5.02] applicable or DSW_No4=ON (*).

(*): In case the DSW_No4 is ON, the DHW production will only become active if the system reach an thermostat OFF for cooling or heating.

3

4

2

1

5


2–31


1

2.9

Booster heater operation

3

2

4

Remark

Booster heater thermostat ON

When the water temperature in tank drops 2°C below “target DHW + setting [7.00]”.

Booster heater operates

■

■

T

DHW

≤

T

HP ON

■ Delay timer of (20 ~ 95) minutes starts (setting [8.03])

After this delayed time booster heater operates

T

DHW

≥

T

HP ON

■ Delay timer of 20 minutes (fixed) starts

After this delayed time booster heater operates

Booster heater thermostat OFF (stops operation)

When the water temperature in tank reach “target DHW + setting [7.00]”.

Delay timer is reset.

■

■

Booster heater operation prohibition / permission can be determined by schedule timer.

Booster heater function can be limited by field setting [4-03], see page 4-22.

5

ESIE08-02

2–32



2.10

Backup heater operation

Normal backup heater operation

In order to provide bigger heating capacity by low outdoor temperatures the backup heater can / will provide additional capacity.

Backup heater permission decision

BUH operation permission / prohibition by setting [4.00]

Backup heater priority decision

BUH operation priority by setting [4.01]

Ambient temperature

≤

setting [5.01] equilibrium or

{

&

{

BUH operation ON

■

■

■

■

BUH permissioned to operate ([4.00]=1) temperature

Request to operate BUH (determined by capacity demand)

Delay timer of 6 minutes is over

■ Or

{

■

■

[4.01] = 1 AND booster heater is NOT operating

[4.01] = 0

Piping freeze-up prevention activated

2

3

4

1

BUH will stop operation when one of the below conditions are applicable:

{ or

BUH operation OFF

■

■

■

BUH not permissioned to operate ([4.00]=0)

NO request to operate BUH (determined by capacity demand)

Ambient temperature > setting [5.01] + 3°C

■

■

[4.01] = 1 AND booster heater is operating

Piping freeze-up prevention de-activated

5

Remark

■

■

■

■

The BUH heater will stop immediately by following safety items:

NO flow signal

Outlet water temperature after BUH higher than 55°C

Return water temperature thermistor abnormality

Thermal protector of BUH is open

Start up control by space heating operation

In order to start up the heat pump in controlled way when low outside air and low water temperature.

Start up operation

BUH operates when:

&

{

&

{

&

{

■

■

■

■

■

Indoor demand operation mode is heating

No defrost operation

Inlet water temperature lower than 15°C

Outside air temperature lower than 22°C

Outlet water temperature after BUH lower than 55°C [overheat protection

■ temperature]

No return water temperature thermistor abnormality [error code 80 on interface]


2–33


This control overrules the settings [4] & [5].

BUH forced OFF when pump OFF.

1

5

3

2

Heat exchanger freeze prevention

BUH control

In order to prevent breakage by heat exchanger freeze from defrost (start up) operation when low outside air and low water temperature.

Space heating defrost operation

BUH operates when:

&

{

&

{

&

{

■

■

■

■

■


Defrost operation

Return water temperature below security level

Outlet water temperature after BUH lower than 55°C [overheat protection temperature]


This control overrules the settings [4] & [5].

BUH forced OFF when pump OFF.

4

BUH protection control

In order to prevent breakage by BUH.

■

■

■

■

The BUH heater will stop immediately by following safety items:

NO flow signal

Outlet water temperature after BUH higher than 55°C [overheat protection temperature]


Thermal protector of BUH is open [error code AA on interface]

Remark (during commissioning)

BUH operates for short periods. Due to remaining air in the piping short ‘no flow’ BUH stops and delay timer restarts.

2–34



2.11


Indoor control by emergency.

In order to provide the customer a minimum heating capacity. The unit will go automatically in emergency operation when malfunction occur at the outdoor or indoor unit. This minimum heating capacity will be provided by BUH.

Space heating operation by emergency

{

&

BUH operates when:

■

■

■

Heat pump abnormality


Request to operate BUH (determined by capacity demand)

■ Delay timer of 6 minutes is over or

{

■

■

[4.01] = 1 AND booster heater is NOT operating

[4.01] = 0

This control overrules the settings [4.00] & [5].

BUH forced OFF when pump OFF or no flow.

2

1

3

4

5


2–35

3

4

5

1

2


2–36


ESIE08-02 Compressor Compartment Functional Concept

Part 2

1

3 Compressor Compartment Functional Concept

2

3.1


Introduction

Overview

This chapter will explain more details about the various functions that are programmed for the

Altherma R410A inverter units.


Topic

3.2–Function Outline

3.3–Frequency Regulating Functions

3.4–Expansion Valve Regulating Functions

3.5–Outdoor Unit Fan Speed Control

See page

2–38

2–41

2–55

2–59

3

4

5


2–37

4

5

Compressor Compartment Functional Concept ESIE08-02

1

3.2

Function Outline

Introduction

This chapter will show an overview of all applicable functions in cooling and heating mode.

Content

2

Topic

3.2.1–Function Outline in Heating Mode

3.2.2–Function Outline in Cooling Mode

See page

2–39

2–40

3

2–38



3.2.1

Function Outline in Heating Mode

Flow chart

Heating operation

Power supply ON

Initialize motorized valve

Initialize microcomputer

A

Crank case heater control Turn on the power to crankcase heater

Remote controller ON operation judgment

Cooling Operation mode judgment

Heating

Heating

Emergency

Emergency operation

Cooling

Thermostat ON judgment

Normal control

Starting control

4-way valve changeover

Hot start control

Compressor step control

Motorized valve PI control

Low pressure protection control

High pressure protection control

Heating overload control

B

Discharge pipe temperature protection control


Inverter fin temperature protection control


Suction pipe superheat degree protection control

Simulated operation

Defrosting condition

Defrost operation

Thermostat OFF judgment

Thermostat OFF by < temperature

Δ

> Tr

Thermostat OFF by outdoor

Remote control operation

OFF judgment

Standby judgment

Malfunction stop judgment

Malfunction code indication

Defrost ending judgment


Hot start control

B

Restart standby

A

1

2

3

4

5


2–39


1

3.2.2

Function Outline in Cooling Mode

3

2

4

5

Flow chart

Cooling

Power supply ON

Initialize motorized valve

Initialize microcomputer

A

Crank case heater control Turn on the power to crankcase heater

Remote controller ON operation judgment

Cooling

Cooling

Operation mode judgment

Heating

Heating

Thermostat ON judgment

Starting control


Hot start control

Emergency

Emergency operation

B

Normal control

Compressor step control

Motorized valve PI control

Low pressure protection control

High pressure protection control

Discharge pipe temperature protection control


Inverter fin temperature protection control


Low outdoor temperature cooling control

Simulated operation

Oil recovery operation starting judgment

Oil recovery operation

Thermostat OFF judgment

Thermostat OFF by <

Δ

> Tr

Thermostat OFF by freeze-up protection

Remote control operation

OFF judgment

Standby judgment

Malfunction stop judgment

Oil recovery operation ending judgment

B

B

Restart standby

A

2–40



3.3

Frequency Regulating Functions

Introduction

One of the main functions of the µ-controller will be the control of the compressor frequency. The next chapter will explain how the compressor frequency is determined.

1

Content

2

Topic

3.3.1–Starting Frequency Control

3.3.2–Starting Control

3.3.3–General Frequency Control

3.3.4–Low Pressure Protection Control

3.3.5–High Pressure Protection Control

3.3.6–Discharge Pipe Temperature Control

3.3.7–Suction Pipe Superheat Protection Control (Heating Mode)

3.3.8–Inverter Current Protection Control

3.3.9–Protection Control by Overall Current

3.3.10–Inverter Cooling Fin Temperature Control

3.3.11–Pressure Difference Control

3.3.12–Oil Recovery Operation

See page

2–42

2–43

2–44

2–45

2–46

2–47

2–48

2–49

2–50

2–51

2–52

2–54

3

4

5


2–41


1

3.3.1

Starting Frequency Control

Outline

The inverter compressor will start up with a limited fixed frequency value for a specified period of time in order to prevent liquid back to the compressor, and to limit the starting current.

2

General

The normal starting control time is 2~3 minutes. The maximum starting frequency control time is limited to 10 minutes.

During compressor start-up, a pressure difference will be built up in order to have sufficient pressure difference for the 4-way valve to change over.

3

Graph

Hz

52 Hz

Normal control

4

41 Hz

ON ±1 min 2~3 min time

5

Ending condition

The starting control will be terminated when the low pressure value < 6 bar or when the maximum starting time of 10 minutes has been reached in case the low pressure value stays > 6 bar.

2–42



3.3.2

Starting Control

Starting control

When compressor start up, the starting frequency is fixed for specified period of time at low frequency to prevent returning of refrigerant.

1

Compressor

Pressure equalizing start

Pressure equalizing complete

Pressure equalizing control before compressor start

Starting control

Starting control complete

112Hz

Cooling or

65 pls


480 pls

8 Step ON

(Cooling Ta

≤

C C)

Outdoor unit fan

OFF

C)

10~120 sec.

Pump ON

OFF

2

3

4

5


2–43


1

3.3.3

General Frequency Control

Outline

After the "Starting frequency control" function has been terminated, the ideal compressor frequency will be determined by the "General frequency control".

2

General

3

4

5

Note

Cooling

Heating

The compressor operation frequency is controlled in order to keep a constant evaporation temperature in cooling and a constant condensing temperature in heating.

The frequency can be changed every 20 seconds.The maximum frequency change = 2 steps/change.

(= max 6 steps/min)

During abnormal situations (e.g. inverter current protection) the change per step is also = 2 steps/change, but the 20 seconds interval may be decreased, so a quicker change is possible.

When other control functions are activated (e.g. discharge pipe control), they can change the compressor frequency using other inputs than the ones normally being used by the "General frequency control" function.

In cooling, the target operation frequency will be determined by the indoor

Δt and the evaporating temperature.

Δt cool = Remote controller set temperature - Outlet water temperature.

Depending on the cooling load, the target evaporating temperature (Te) will be a value between 2°C

≤

Te

≤

20°C TBC.

In heating, the target operation frequency will be determined by the indoor

Δt and the condensing temperature.

Δt heat = Outlet water temperature - Remote controller set temperature.

Depending on the heating load, the target condensing temperature (Tc) will be a value between 28°C

≤

Tc

≤

58°C TBC.

2–44



3.3.4

Low Pressure Protection Control

Outline

Details

Flow chart

1

In order to prevent low pressures in the system, the below control function will be activated.

Low pressure is a calculated value during heating operation. Low pressure is detected by the pressure sensor during cooling operation.

2

O

R

[When cooling operation] [When heating operation]

Normal operation Normal operation

Lp < 0.12

MPa

1

&

&

Lp > 0.15MPa

30 sec.elapsed

OR

Within 5 minutes after starting

Within 10 minutes after defrosting

Lp < 0.12MPa

Lp > 0.15MPa

continuous for 1 min.

Compressor upper

Condition E limit frequency

123 Hz

Compressor upper limit frequency

41 Hz

Lp < 0.12MPa continues for 10 sec.

Lp > 0.15MPa

continues for 10 sec.


72 Hz

Condition E

Lp < 0.12MPa continues for 1 min.


41 Hz

Condition E

Lp < 0.12 MPa continues

10 times or less stopping for 5 minutes in 200 minutes

Compressor stop : 0 Hz + OFF

Stopped 11 times in 200 minutes

Malfunction stop (E4 indication)

Condition 1

During Start control and [Freeze-up signal hydro-box or Te 2 ]

10 times or less stopping in 200 minutes

Condition E

OR

5 minutes after the completion of startup control

&

10 minutes after defrost

Lp > 0.15MPa continues for 1 minute

3

4

5


2–45


1

3.3.5

High Pressure Protection Control

Outline

In order to prevent abnormal high pressures in the system and hence avoiding activation of the high pressure safety device the below control function will be activated.

2

Details

■

■

The high pressure value will be calculated from the low pressure, power input and compressor frequency. Low pressure is a calculated value during cooling operation. The high pressure value is detected by the pressure sensor.

HPS opens at: 40 bar (tolerance: +0 / -0.15)

HPS closes at: 30 bar (tolerance: +/- 0.15)

3

Flow chart

4

5

[When cooling operation] [When heating operation]

Normal operation

Normal operation

Compressor operation frequency - 1 step/10 sec

OR

HP > 36.3 bar

HP > 37.3 bar

Compressor operation frequency 62 Hz

·

HPS activates

·

HP > 39.2 bar for

1 minute

HP < 35.8 bar

HP < 33.8 bar HP > 37.3 bar

&

·

HP < 3.68 Mpa

·

30 sec elapsed

Compressor operation frequency + 1 step/1 min

HP < 34.8 bar

Compressor operation frequency + 1 step/5 min

&

OR

Compressor operation frequency 62 Hz

·

HP > 39.2 Bar

·

HPS activates

15 times or less stopping in

300 minutes

Compressor stop

·

HPS activates

·

Stopped 16 times in

300 minutes

15 times or less stopping in

300 minutes

OR

Compressor stop

·

HPS activates

·

Stopped 16 times

in 300 minutes



Minimum frequency

As the bearing resistance limit pressure decreases during low frequency of the compressor, the lower limit of frequency is restricted.

[In cooling/heating operation]

Normal operation

Hp

≥

3.04MPa

Hp

≤

2.84MPa

After 30 seconds

Compressor frequency lower limit

48Hz

2–46



3.3.6

Discharge Pipe Temperature Control

Outline

The compressor operating frequency will be controlled in order to avoid abnormal high compressor temperatures (see also expansion valve control).

Flow chart

Normal operation

Compressor upper limit frequency step / 20 sec

OR

&

300 sec

Td

>

120

C

C

continues for 5 minutes


62 Hz

Td

<

100

&

C

Upper limit frequency

= Maximum frequency

Td

<

105

C


+ 1 step / 1 min

Td

<

100

&

C

C

5 min elapsed

OR

C

continues for 10 minutes

C

Compressor stop

Stopped 11 times in 200 minutes

Malfunction stop (F3 indication)

10 times or less stopping in 200 minutes

1

2

3

4

5


2–47


1

3.3.7

Suction Pipe Superheat Protection Control (Heating Mode)

Outline

In case the suction superheat value in heating mode is too high, the oil return to the compressor will be insufficient. In order to avoid that the compressor oil will be accumulated in the outdoor unit heat exchanger, the upper limit frequency will be decreased.

2

Flow chart

3

4

OR

·

Suction SH > 12˚C

·

Suction SH > 10˚C

·

EV opening degree

= 480 pls

Lowering upper limit frequency for 1-step every 20 seconds

OR

OR

Normal operation

OR

·

Suction SH < 6˚C

·

&

·

Suction SH < 10˚C

·

EV opening degree

< 450 pls

·

Suction SH < 6˚C

·

&

·

Upper limit frequency = Maximum frequency

·

OR

·

Suction SH < 8˚C

·

&

·

Suction SH < 10˚C

·

EV opening degree < 450 pls

Raising upper limit frequency for 1-step

·

Suction SH > 12˚C every 20 seconds

·

&

·

Suction SH > 10˚C

·

EV opening degree = 450 pls

5

2–48



3.3.8

Inverter Current Protection Control

Flow chart

Restricts compressor operation frequency to prevent compressor from tripping due to inverter overcurrent.

Inverter current

> Stepping down current

Normal operation

Compressor frequency

1 step / 6 sec

Inverter upper limit frequency

= Maximum frequency


+ 1 step / 2 min

The condition of Inverter current < Stepping down current continues for 2 minutes

1

2

Stepping-down current QA

&

O

R

Outdoor heat exchanger temperature (liquid)

...

Indoor heat exchanger temperature


...

25

Stepping-down current PA


< Indoor heat exchanger temperature


< 25

3

4

5


2–49


1

3.3.9

Protection Control by Overall Current

Flow chart

Monitors the overall current and restricts the upper limit compressor operating frequency to prevent circuit breakers from exceeding the rated capacity.

2

Normal operation

Outdoor unit current

> upper limit current value

Upper limit compressor operating frequency

1 step / E sec.


upper limit current value


> upper limit current value

&

Outdoor unit current upper limit current value

Upper limit compressor operating frequency = Maximum frequency

Upper limit compressor operating frequency

+ 1 step / 2 min

3

Upper limit current

(A)

Takes the following values depending on the outside temperature.

Also varies depending on model.

4

5

Overall current

(A)

Current A

Current B

Current C

Current D

25 28

Outdoor air temp.

43 50 Ta

A

B

C

D

E

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

24.0A

24.0A

23.0A

16.0A

10 (sec.)

13.5A

11.2A

11.2A

11.2A

6 sec.

2–50



3.3.10 Inverter Cooling Fin Temperature Control

Outline

1

This control will restrict the compressor upper limit frequency in order to protect the electronic components in the switch box from overheating (L4-error activation).

By lowering the compressor frequency, the current drawn by the compressor will be reduced and as a result the temperature inside the switch box will drop.

2

Flow chart

Inverter fin temperature

≥

83˚C

Normal operation

Inverter upper limit frequency

= Maximum frequency


+ 1 step / 2 min

Fin temperature

≤


– 1 step / 16 sec

80˚C lasts for 2 minutes

3

4

5


2–51


1

3.3.11 Pressure Difference Control

Outline

To ensure the compression ratio (pressure difference between high and low pressure) at low outdoor temperature conditions in cooling mode and high outdoor temperature conditions in heating mode, the outdoor fan and target compressor frequency may be varied.

2

Cooling

3

4

5

In cooling low ambient conditions, the outdoor fan speed and compressor frequency will be adapted to secure the differential pressure between high and low pressure.

Normal control

Upper limit (step 8)

HP > 37 bar

&

HP < 19 bar

&

OR

OR

Δ

P < 9.3 bar

Compression ratio > 2.1


Condition A

Condition A Condition B

90 seconds have passed

HP < 16 bar

OR


Δ

P < 8 bar

Condition A

Compression ratio

≤

1.8

Condition B


Condition A

Condition B

&

HP > 29 bar

Δ

P > 11 bar


&

Condition B


HP > 23 bar

OR

&

Δ

P > 10 bar







Condition A

Condition B



&

Tfin

<

66˚C


HP < 16 bar

OR

Δ

P < 8 bar

Compression ratio

≤

1.8



= Outdoor fan OFF

OR

HP > 17 bar

Tfin

≤

81˚C

&

Δ

P > 9 bar


2–52


ESIE08-02

Frequency restriction in cooling

Heating

Compressor Compartment Functional Concept

1

Upper limit frecuency

Lower limit frecuency

011

123 Hz

Ta

≤

20˚C

Upper limit frequency

Lower limit frequency

Normal control

014

174 Hz

41 Hz

011

123 Hz

72 Hz

Ta

≥

21˚C

014 / 016

139 Hz

72 Hz

016

174 Hz

High outdoor ambient (overload conditions):

In heating overload conditions, the outdoor fan speed will be adapted to secure the differential pressure between high and low pressure.

OR

·

Hp-Lp < 0.39 MPa

·

Hp > 3.72 MPa

Outdoor unit fan

– 1 step / 30 sec.

·

·

Normal operation

Hp-Lp > 0.59 MPa

Hp < 3.63 MPa

OR

·

&

·

OR

·

OR

·

Hp-Lp > 0.69 MPa

·

Hp-Lp > 1.08 MPa

·

&

·

Hp < 3.53 MPa

·

Outdoor unit fan = 8 step

·

Hp < 2.75 MPa

·

Lp < 0.12 MP

Outdoor unit fan

+ 1 step / 30 sec.

Only the fan speed will be adapted in heating overload conditions.

No adjustments to the compressor frequency will be made.

2

3

4

5


2–53

4

5


1

3.3.12 Oil Recovery Operation

Outline

When the compressor operates for a certain period of time at low frequency, the oil level in the compressor may become low due to incomplete oil return. To prevent damage to the compressor and in worst case avoid compressor lock, an oil recovery operation will be conducted.

2

Details

During the oil recovery operation, the operation frequency of the compressor will be increased for a time period of 5 minutes. Oil recovery operation is only executed in cooling mode. In heating mode, oil return to the compressor is guaranteed by the defrost operation.

3

2–54



3.4

Expansion Valve Regulating Functions

Introduction

Content

This chapter will explain the functions that are used to control the expansion valve opening.

Topic

3.4.1–Expansion Valve Control at Startup

3.4.2–General Expansion Valve Control

3.4.3–Discharge Pipe Temperature Protection Control

See page

2–56

2–57

2–58

1

2

3

4

5


2–55


1

3.4.1

Expansion Valve Control at Startup

Outline

Before going to the general expansion valve control, the expansion valve opening will be limited in order to avoid the risk of liquid back and allow quick build up of pressure difference.

2

Details

During startup, the opening degree is determined by both the compressor frequency & the suction superheat. During startup, it is not possible to use only the value of the suction superheat because the operation is not stable yet. As a consequence also the SH value will not be stable.

Graph

3

4

Pressure equalizing start

Pressure equalizing complete

Pressure equalizing control before compressor start

Starting control

Starting control complete

Compressor


Cooling or

Heating(<25˚ C)

65 pls

Heating(>25˚ C)

480 pls

5

Ending condition

The starting control will be terminated when the low pressure value < 6 bar or when the maximum starting time of 10 minutes has been reached in case the low pressure value stays > 6 bar.

2–56



3.4.2

General Expansion Valve Control

Outline

1

After the start up control function has been terminated the general expansion valve control function will regulate the expansion valve opening in function of the target suction SH value.

The discharge SH value will be used to set the target SH value.

The measured suction SH value will be used to control the opening of the expansion to the target SH value.

2

Details

Control

When the unit is in cooling or heating operation the opening of the expansion valve will be controlled in order to keep the amount of superheat at the evaporator outlet constant. This way the evaporator can be used at maximum efficiency under all conditions. The initial target heat exchanger outlet superheat value = 5°C.

The target heat exchanger outlet superheat value can be increased in case the discharge superheat value decreases.

The target heat exchanger outlet superheat value can be decreased in case the discharge superheat value increases.

3

4

During normal control 2 situations can decide on the expansion valve opening degree:

1

Target superheat amount:

■ When the target heat exchanger outlet superheat > actual heat exchanger outlet superheat --> the expansion valve will close.

■ When the target heat exchanger outlet superheat < actual heat exchanger outlet superheat --> the expansion valve will open.

The superheat amount is checked every 10 seconds.

2

Frequency change: At the time of compressor frequency change, the expansion valve opening will be changed with a fixed value. This value will be in function of the amount of compressor frequency change.

5

Calculations

The heat exchanger outlet superheat value is calculated from the saturated suction temperature Te

(using indoor coil sensor in cooling, outdoor coil sensor in heating) and the suction pipe temperature

R4T: SH = R4T-Te

The discharge superheat value is calculated from the saturated discharge temperature Td (HP value calculated out of PI, frequency and Te) or Tc and the discharge pipe temperature R3T: SH = R3T-Td or R3T or SH = R3T-Tc (whichever is the lowest)


2–57


1

3.4.3

Discharge Pipe Temperature Protection Control

Outline

The expansion valve opening will be controlled in order to avoid abnormal high compressor discharge temperatures (see also compressor operating frequency control).

2

Details

3

Normal control

Td

>

95˚C

Electronic expansion valve opening degree lower limit

+5 pulses/Cooling for 2 minutes & heating for 1 minute

Td

<

90˚C

Td

<

80˚C


-5 pulses/Cooling for 2 minutes & heating for 1 minute

Td

>

100˚C


+10 pulses/Cooling for 2 minutes & heating for 1 minute

Td: Compressor discharge pipe temperature (˚C)

4

5

2–58



3.5

Outdoor Unit Fan Speed Control

Introduction

Content

This chapter will explain how the outdoor fan speed is determined in cooling and heating operation.

Topic

3.5.1–Outdoor Unit Fan Speed Control

See page

2–60

1

2

3

4

5


2–59


1

3

4

3.5.1

Outdoor Unit Fan Speed Control

Fan speed control

The outdoor fan speed will be controlled in function of the actual outdoor ambient temperature, the condensation pressure, pressure difference between low and high pressure and compression ratio.

For details please refer to "Pressure Difference Control".

2

Fan step table

6

7

4

5

8

Step

2

3

0

1

M1F

0 rpm

250 rpm

400 rpm

285 rpm

360 rpm

445 rpm

545 rpm

660 rpm

850 rpm

Cooling

M2F

0 rpm

0 rpm

0 rpm

250 rpm

325 rpm

410 rpm

510 rpm

625 rpm

815 rpm

M1F

0 rpm

250 rpm

285 rpm

335 rpm

395 rpm

470 rpm

560 rpm

660 rpm

842 rpm

Heating

M2F

0 rpm

0 rpm

250 rpm

300 rpm

360 rpm

435 rpm

525 rpm

625 rpm

807 rpm

5

2–60


ESIE08-02



Chapter

1–Troubleshooting

2–Error Codes: Hydraulic Compartment

3–Error Codes: Compressor Compartment

4–Error Codes: System Malfunctions

5–Additional Checks for Troubleshooting

Part 3

Troubleshooting

4

See page

3–3

3–41

3–55

3–93

3–107

4

5

Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–1

ESIE08-02

1

3 3

5

3–2 Part 3 – Troubleshooting

ESIE08-02 Troubleshooting

Part 3

1

1 Troubleshooting

1.1


Introduction

Overview

When a problem occurs, you have to check all possible malfunctions. This chapter gives a general idea of where to look for malfunctions.

Not all repair procedures are described. Some procedures are considered common practice.


Topic

1.2–General Troubleshooting Flowchart

1.3–Overview of General Problems

1.4–Procedure of Self-Diagnosis by Remote Controller

1.5–Fault-diagnosis by Remote Controller

1.6–Fault-diagnosis manual reset in the memory

1.7–Fault Diagnosis by LED

1.8–Overview of Error Codes

1.9–Overview of the Compressor Compartment Safety Devices

1.10–Overview of the Hydraulic Compartment Safety Devices

See page

3–4

3–5

3–24

3–25

3–26

3–29

3–34

3–38

3–39

4

5

Part 3 – Troubleshooting

3–3

Troubleshooting ESIE08-02

1

1.2

General Troubleshooting Flowchart

3 3

4

5

Doesn't run at all

The pump comes on but the compressor doesn't run.

Cooling starts but stops right away.

The unit won't run again for a while after stopping.

The unit runs but doesn't cool the room.

The units runs but doesn't heat the room.

Wait until power failure is over.

YES

Is there a power failure?

NO

Normal

(1)When

(2)When

Turn the power supply switch ON or replace the fuse.

YES

The power supply switch is

OFF or the switch's fuse is burnt.

NO

Is the remote controller's operation lamp blinking?

Runs

Set the remote controller's temperature setting to: cooling:Minimum heating:Maximum

Ask for the character code of the malfunction code.

YES

Doesn't run

NO

Troubleshooting by remote controller malfunction code.

Is the remote

YES controller's operation lamp blinking?

Troubleshooting by remote controller malfunction code.

YES

Is the remote controller's operation lamp blinking?

Machines equipped with wireless remote controllers only.

NO

Cooling

NO

Refer to "Remote controller display malfunction code and contents".

(1) The operation circuit fuse is disconnected or is making poor contact.

(2) The operation swich is broken or its contact is defective.

(3) The high pressure switch is broken.

(4) The fan motor's magnetic switch is broken.

(5) The fan motor's overcurrent relay is being actuated or is broken.

(6) The compressor's overcurrent relay is broken.

(7) The compressor's protective thermostat is broken.

(8) The electrical system insulation is defective.

(9) The compressor's magnetic switch's contact is defective.

(10) The compressor is broken.

(11) Thermostat is broken.

(12) The cool/heat selector is broken.

(13) The operation switch is broken.

(14) The compressor's magnetic swich is broken.

(15) Over-charged with refrigerant.

(16) Air is mixed inside the refrigerant circuit.

(17) The pressure switch is broken.

(18) The outdoor unit fan motor's magnetic switch is broken.

(19) The outdoor unit fan motor's auxiliary relay is broken.

(20) The outdoor unit's heat exchanger is dirty.

(21) There is something blocking the outdoor unit's air flow.

(22) Malfunction of the outdoor unit's fan.

Heating

(23) flow error

Nomal

Try turning the

Operation switch OFF and On.

Measure the suction

/disharge temperature.

Did you allow 3 minutes to elapse after turning ON?

YES

Temperature differential is 8~18˚C

(Temperature differential

=suction temperature - discharge temperature)

YES

Runs

NO

Operation is normal.

Is there something causing the indoor load to be large, such as an open window or door?

NO

Measure the suction

/disharge temperature.

Operation is normal.

Is there something causing the indoor heat load to be large, such as an open window or door?

YES

Temperature differential is 14~30˚C

NO

(Temperature differential

=discharge temperature - suction temperature)

(24) Overcurrent relay (for compressor)

(25) Compressor's protective themostat

(26) The causes for the overcurrent relay (for compressor) being actuated are:

(26)-1 Power supply voltage is lower than prescribed.

(26)-2 High pressure is too high.

(26)-3 The power supply cord is too small.

(26)-4 The compressor is broken.

(27) The causes for the compressor's protective thermostat

(27)-1 Internal leak of the-4way valve

(No substantial difference between suction and discharge temperature.

(27)-2 Unsatisfactory compression from the compressor

(27)-3 Different kind of refrigerant is charged.

(27)-4 Malfunction of the expansion valve

(27)-5 Unsatisfactory refrigerant circulation

OK.We'll be right over.

(Service work required)

3–4



1.3

Overview of General Problems

1

General guidelines

Before starting the troubleshooting procedure, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and look for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.

Warning! When carrying out an inspection on the switch box of the unit, always make sure that the main switch of the unit is switched off.

When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and find out why the safety device was activated before resetting it. Under no circumstances safety devices may be bridged or changed to a value other than the factory setting. If the cause of the problem cannot be found, call your local Daikin dealer.

If the pressure relief valve is not working correctly and is to be replaced, always reconnect the flexible hose attached to the pressure relief valve, to avoid water dripping out of the unit!

General symptoms

1.3.1

1.3.2

1.3.3

1.3.4

1.3.5

1.3.6

1.3.7

1.3.8

1.3.9

1.3.10

1.3.11

1.3.12

1.3.13

Equipment Condition Remedy

Equipment does not Operate

Indoor Pump Operates, but Compressor does not

Cooling/Heating Operation Starts but Stops Immediately

After Unit Shuts Down, It cannot be Restarted for a While

Equipment Produces Loud Noise or Shakes

Remote Controller LCD Displays “88”

The Unit is Turned on (y LED is lit) but the Unit is not Heating or Cooling as Expected

The Unit is Turned on but the Compressor is not Starting

(Space Heating or Domestic Heating)

Pump is Making Noise (Cavitation)

The Water Pressure Relief Valve Opens

The Water Pressure Relief Valve Leaks

The User Interface Displays "n" when Pressing Certain Buttons

Space Heating Capacity Shortage at Low Outdoor Temperatures

See page 3-7

See page 3-8

See page 3-10

See page 3-12

See page 3-14

See page 3-16

See page 3-17

See page 3-18

See page 3-19

See page 3-20

See page 3-21

See page 3-22

See page 3-23

4

5


3–5

3 3


1

Error codes

When a safety device is activated, the user interface LED will be flashing, and an error code will be displayed.

A list of all errors and corrective actions can be found in the table below.

Reset the safety by turning the unit OFF and back ON.

Instruction to turn the unit OFF

User interface mode

(heating/cooling =)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Domestic hot water

mode (w)

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Push the y

button

1 time

1 time

—

—

Push the v

button

1 time

—

1 time

—

4

5

3–6



1.3.1

Equipment does not Operate

Applicable model

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

Error detection method

Error generating condition

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Fuse blown or disorder of contact in operation circuit

Faulty operation switch or contact point

Faulty high pressure switch

Faulty magnetic switch for fan motor

Activation or fault of overcurrent relay for fan motor

Faulty overcurrent relay for compressor

Faulty compressor protection thermostat

Insufficient insulation in electric system

Faulty contact point of magnetic switch for compressor

Malfunction of compressor

Defective remote controller

Troubleshooting

Is power switch

OFF or fuse for power switch blown?

NO

Is there power failure?

NO

YES

Turn on power switch or replace fuse.

If high-harmonics circuit breaker is not used on inverter compressor, have the circuit breaker replaced.

YES

Wait until power returns.

Is operation switch pressed repeatedly?

NO

Is

thermostat changed and reset again?

NO

YES

YES

Is operation lamp on

LCD remote controller flashing?

NO

NO

Possibly faulty electric component

YES

Normal.

Equipment starts operation 3 minutes later (3-min standby).

Diagnose based on error code on remote controller.

Normal.

Equipment starts operation 3 minutes later (3-min standby).

Check electric system.

Caution

Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector, or parts damage may occur.

1

4

5


3–7

Troubleshooting

1

1.3.2

Indoor Pump Operates, but Compressor does not


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*



3 3

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

Faulty thermistor

Faulty indoor/outdoor unit PC board

Faulty magnetic switch

Faulty power transistor

Faulty compressor

4

5

ESIE08-02

3–8



Troubleshooting

·

pump runs at set flow rate.

Is the power switch OFF or the fuse for power switch blown?

NO

Is the heating switch turned on at outdoor temperature >35 C

NO

1

Is rated voltage applied at the compressor terminals?

YES

YES

YES

Turn on the power switch or replace fuse.

Normal.

(Thermostat OFF by outdoor temperature)

Replace the compressor.

NO

2

Is rated voltage output from the magnetic switch or power transistor?

NO

3

Is rated voltage output from the PC board?

YES

YES

Replace the magnetic switch or power transistor.

Check the thermistor.

Sensor

NO

Hydraulic compartment PC board

Input to PC board


PC board

Relay

Output from

PC board

Input to PC board

3

Output from relay or microcomputer

Replace the PC board.

Magnetic switch

COMP

2

Output from magnetic switch or SW circuit of power transistor

1

Output from magnetic switch or U,V,W of power transistor


1

4

5

Caution


3–9

Troubleshooting

1

1.3.3

Cooling/Heating Operation Starts but Stops Immediately


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*



3 3

Supposed causes

4

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Excess charge of refrigerant

Air intrudes into refrigerant system

Faulty pressure switch

Faulty magnetic switch for outdoor unit fan motor

Faulty aux. relay for outdoor unit fan motor

Soiled heat exchanger of outdoor unit

There is an interfering item in air flow of outdoor unit

Malfunction of outdoor unit fan

Soiled air filter of hydro-box

Malfunction of hydro-box pump (flow error)

5

ESIE08-02

3–10



Troubleshooting

Caution

1

Is the operation lamp of remote controller flashing?

YES

NO

Does the pump/fan rotate?

YES

Is the filter soiled?

NO

YES

NO

Is there any item disturbing air/waterflow?

YES

NO

Is the heat exchanger soiled?

NO

Possible causes as follows:

∗ Refrigerant overcharge

∗ Mixing of air in refrigerant system

∗ Faulty pressure switch

YES flow error

Hydro-box flow error

Diagnose based on the error code on remote controller

Malfunction of fan motor or pump. Check the magnetic switch and aux. switch for pump/fan motor

Cleaning

Remove the disturbing item.

Cleaning of the heat exchanger

After vacuum drying, charge correct amount of refrigerant

Check the pressure switch.

4


5


3–11


1

1.3.4

After Unit Shuts Down, It cannot be Restarted for a While


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*



3 3

Supposed causes

4

5

■

■

■

■

Overcurrent relay (for compressor)

Compressor protection thermostat

■

■

■

■

Overcurrent relay may act due to the following reasons:

Lower voltage of power supply

Excess level of high pressure

Insufficient size of power cable


Compressor protection thermostat may act due to the following reasons:

■ Internal leakage of four-way valve (There is no difference between suction and discharge temperature)

■

■

■

■

Insufficient compression of compressor

Incorrect refrigerant

Faulty expansion valve

Insufficient circulation of refrigerant

3–12



Troubleshooting

Turn the operation switch

ON and OFF, then wait at

ON side.

Does the unit start operation after 3 minutes?

NO

Is the discharge side of compressor hot after unit stop?

YES

[Electric system]

NO

Power supply voltage is within ±10 % of specified voltage.

Not so hot YES

YES

Check on the cause why overcurrent relay (for compressor) or compressor protection thermostat acted.

NO

Is the size of power cable through total length correct?

[Refrigerant circuit]

YES

After vacuum drying, charge correct amount of refrigerant. Then, start operation again.

NO

Normal. Unit is in 3-min standby mode

Contact power company.

Check compressor.

Replace power cable.

Is there any temperature difference between inlet and outlet of expansion valve?

YES

Is there any temperature difference between suction side and discharge side of fourway valve?

NO

NO

YES


Expansion valve malfunction

Four-way valve malfunction

Check compressor.


1

4

5

Caution


3–13

Troubleshooting

1

1.3.5

Equipment Produces Loud Noise or Shakes


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*



3 3

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

Faulty installation


Air intrudes into refrigerant system

Flushing noise due to refrigerant shortage. (Sound of shoo...)

4

5

ESIE08-02

3–14



Troubleshooting

[Installation work side]

Does the noise generate with vibration of whole ceilings and walls?

YES

NO

Does the noise generate with vibration of unit mounting section?

YES

[Power supply side]

NO

Is the piping secured?

YES

Does the fan contact with other parts?

NO

YES

Correction of installation

Reinforcement for ceilings or walls

Continuous slight noise of "shoo..." during cooling or defrosting

Insert shock absorber in mounting section, or strengthen the mounting section.

YES

Normal. The sound is flushing noise of gas (refrigerant) inside air conditioning unit

Insert cushion materials to the pipe support such as saddle.

NO

Sound of

"shoo..." generates just after operation start or stop, or defrosting start or stop.

NO

YES

Normal. The noise is a sound generated at the time of gas

(refrigerant) flow change or stop

Disassemble and remove parts contact.

NO

Does the pipe contact with casing?

NO

YES

Is the noise flushing sound from pressure reducing

YES valve or capillary tube?

NO

Creak during heating and after operation stop

NO

Correct piping manually or attach a dead weight to pipe

YES

Normal. Creak generates by shrinkage of resin parts due to temperature change.

Normal.

Is this an impact noise at the start/end of defrosting?

NO

YES

It is normal.

∗


∗

Air intrudes into refrigerant

system

∗

Flushing noise due to

refrigerant shortage.

(Sound of shoo...)

YES

After vacuum drying, charge correct amount of refrigerant.


1

4

5

Caution


3–15


1

1.3.6

Remote Controller LCD Displays “

88”


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*



3 3

Supposed causes

Troubleshooting

4

5

Trouble generates just after power supply ON

NO

Is the position of (SS 1) on hydraulic compartment PC board at

"Emergency"?

NO

Check the unit based on hydrobox LED and outdoor unit LED.

(Trouble Shooting)

YES

YES

Caution

The unit is checking to confirm that remote controller is normal.

Indication appears for short time.

Turn the switch to "Normal", and reset power supply.


3–16



1.3.7

The Unit is Turned on (y LED is lit) but the Unit is not Heating or Cooling as

Expected

1

Applicable models

EKSWW(U)150~300V3/Z2, EKHWS(U)150~300V3, EKHWS200~300Z2, EKHWE150~300V3,

EKHWE200~300Z2, E(B\D)(H\L)Q*



Supposed causes - corrective action

Possible causes

The temperature setting is not correct.

The water flow is too low.

The water volume in the installation is too low.

Corrective action

■

■

Check the controller set point.

■ Check that all shut off valves of the water circuit are completely open.

Check if the water filter needs cleaning.

Make sure there is no air in the system (purge air).

■

■

■

Check on the manometer that there is sufficient water pressure. The water pressure must be >0.3 bar (water is cold), >>0.3 bar

(water is hot).

Check that the pump speed setting is on the highest speed.

Make sure that the expansion vessel is not broken.

■ Check that the resistance in the water circuit is not too high for the pump (refer to "Setting the pump speed" on page 19).

Make sure that the water volume in the installation is above the minimum required value (refer

to the "Specifications" chapter in part 1).

4

5


3–17


1

1.3.8

The Unit is Turned on but the Compressor is not Starting (Space Heating or

Domestic Heating)






3 3


4

5

Possible causes

The unit must start up out of its operation range

(the water temperature is too low).


In case of low water temperature, the system utilizes the backup heater to reach the minimum water temperature first (15°C).

■

■

Check that the backup heater power supply is correct.

Check that the backup heater thermal fuse is closed.

■

■

Check that the thermal protector backup heater is not activated.

Check that the backup heater contactors are not broken.

3–18



1.3.9

Pump is Making Noise (Cavitation)

1







Possible causes

There is air in the system.

Water pressure at pump inlet is too low.


■

■

Purge air.

■ Check on the manometer that there is sufficient water pressure. The water pressure must be >0.3 bar (water is cold), >>0.3 bar

(water is hot).

Check that the manometer is not broken.

Check that the expansion vessel is not broken.

■ Check that the setting of the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel is correct (refer to the

"Specifications" chapter in part 1).

4

5


3–19


1

1.3.10 The Water Pressure Relief Valve Opens






3 3


Possible causes Corrective action

The expansion vessel is broken.

Replace the expansion vessel.

The water volume in the installation is too high.

Make sure that the water volume in the installation is under the maximum allowed value (refer

to the "Specifications" chapter in part 1.)

4

5

3–20



1.3.11 The Water Pressure Relief Valve Leaks

1







Possible causes

Dirt is blocking the water pressure relief valve outlet.


Check for correct operation of the pressure relief valve by turning the red knob on the valve counter clockwise:

■ If you do not hear a clacking sound, contact your local Daikin dealer.

■

In case the water keeps running out of the unit, close both the water inlet and outlet shut-off valves first and then contact your local Daikin dealer.

4

5


3–21


1

1.3.12 The User Interface Displays "n" when Pressing Certain Buttons






3 3


Possible causes

The current permission level is set to a level that prevents using the pressed button.


Change the "user permission level" field setting

[0-00], see page 4-19.

4

5

3–22



1.3.13 Space Heating Capacity Shortage at Low Outdoor Temperatures

1







Possible causes

Backup heater operation is not activated.

The backup heater equilibrium temperature has not been configured correctly.

Too much heat pump capacity is used for domestic water heating (applies only to installations with a domestic hot water tank).


■

■

Check that the "backup heater operation status" field setting [4-00] is turned on, see

"Field settings" on page 4-22.

Check whether or not the thermal protector of the backup heater has been activated (refer to Main components, "Thermal protector backup heater" on page 6 for location of the reset button).

■ Check whether booster heater and backup heater are configured to operate simultaneously (field setting [4-02], see "Field

settings" on page 4-22)

■

Check whether or not the thermal fuse of the backup heater is blown (refer to Main components, "Thermal fuse" on page 6 for location of the reset button).

Raise the "equilibrium temperature" field setting

[5-01] to activate backup heater operation at a higher outdoor temperature.

■

Check that the "space heating priority temperature" field settings are configured appropriately:

■

Make sure that the "space heating priority status" field setting [5-02] is enabled.

■ Raise the "space heating priority temperature" field setting [5-03] to activate booster heater operation at a higher outdoor temperature.

4

5


3–23


1

1.4

Procedure of Self-Diagnosis by Remote Controller

The inspection/test button

The following modes can be selected by using the [Inspection/Test Operation] button on the remote control.

System settings can be made.

■ Auto restart

■ Backup heater operation

■ Others

Depress Inspection/Test Operation button for more than 4 seconds.

Local setting mode

Service mode

Service data can be obtained.

■ Malfunction code history

■ Temperature data of various sections

3 3

4

Depress Inspection/Test Operation button for more than 4 seconds.

Press Inspection/Test Operation button once.

Normal mode



Or after 30 minutes.

Following codes can be checked.

■ Malfunction codes

■ Indoor model code

■ Outdoor model code

Inspection mode

After 10 seconds

Test operation mode

Thermostat is forcibly turned on.


5

Remark

Above information is general. Not all settings are applicable for ALTHERMA.

3–24



1.5

Fault-diagnosis by Remote Controller

Explanation

If operation stops due to malfunction, the remote controller’s operation LED blinks, and malfunction code is displayed. (Even if stop operation is carried out, malfunction contents are displayed when inspection mode is entered.) The malfunction code enables you to tell what kind of malfunction caused

operation to stop. See page 3-34 for malfunction code and malfunction contents.

1

Malfunction code

Inspection display

Inspection/Test button

4

5


3–25

4

5


1

1.6

Explanation

Fault-diagnosis manual reset in the memory

In order to reset the malfunction code in the remote controller memory, following actions have to be performed.

Remark

For some malfunction codes it’s required to manually reset the malfunction code in the memory before the unit can be restarted.

See instruction on page 3-34.

3 3

3–26



1.6.1

Remote Controller Display Malfunction Code and Contents

1

L1

L4

L5

J5

J6

J7

J8

H9

J1

J3

J3

E9

F3

H3

Malfunction code

E1

E3

E4

C0

C4

EC

HC

7H

8H

AA

A1

80

81

89

E5

E7

L8

L9

LC

P1

P4

PJ

Contents/Processing

Inlet water temperature thermistor abnormality

Outlet water temperature thermistor abnormality

Water heat exchanger freeze-up abnormality

Flow abnormality

Outlet water temperature too high

Booster or backup heater thermal protector is open

Hydraulic compartment PCB abnormality

Flow switch abnormality

Heat exchanger thermistor abnormality

Domestic hot water temperature too high

Domestic hot water temperature thermistor abnormality

Compressor compartment PC board malfunction

High pressure malfunction

Abnormality of low pressure

Stall prevention

Malfunction of transmission system (between control PCB and inverter PCB)

Open phase or voltage unbalance

Abnormal radiation fin temperature sensor

Failure of capacity setting

Remarks

Compressor motor lock malfunction

Fan motor lock or outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction

Malfunction of electronic expansion valve

Discharge pipe temperature malfunction

Failure of high pressure switch

Malfunction of outdoor air temperature sensor system

Malfunction of pressure sensor

Malfunction of discharge pipe temperature sensor system


Suction pipe thermistor malfunction

Malfunction of heat exchanger temperature sensor system

Malfunction of subcooling heat exchanger thermistor

Malfunction of liquid pipe thermistor

Compressor compartment PC board malfunction

Radiation fin temperature rise

Instantaneous over current

Electronic thermal

Failure of low pressure sensor system. Check if the stop valve is open.

Compressor motor lock, incorrect wiring.

Malfunction of inverter cooling

Possibility of compressor motor grounding or shortage of motor winding

Possibility of compressor overload, open circuit in compressor motor

Possibility of compressor seizing

Either capacity data is set incorrectly, or capacity has not been set for the data IC

4

5


3–27


1

3 3

4

5

Legend

Malfunction code

U0

U0

U0

U2

U4/UF

UF

U5

UA


Lack of gas malfunction

Abnormal power supply voltage

Failure of transmission (between compartments)

Failure of transmission (between compartments) or

Gas shortage

Failure of transmission (between hydraulic compartment and remote controller)

Incorrect hydraulic compartment connected to the system

Remarks

Abnormal suction pipe temperature

Including malfunction of K10R, K11R

Transmission between compartments is not being carried out correctly.

(1)

Transmission between compartments is not being carried out correctly.

or

There is very little or no refrigerant flow within the hydraulic compartment.

Transmission between hydraulic compartment and remote controller is not being carried out correctly.

Note

Colour Meaning

Error code displays automatically and system stops.

Inspect and repair it.

In case of shaded error codes, ‘inspection’ is not displayed. The system operates but be sure to inspect and repair it.

Error code displays with blinking.

The system operates, but be sure to inspect and repair it.

(1)

There is a possibility of open phase power supply, check power supply also.

3–28



1.7

Fault Diagnosis by LED

Introduction

Overview

Several methods can be used to consult the system malfunction.

Fault diagnosis by LED is applicable on hydraulic compartment (PCB A11P) and compressor compartment (PCB A2P).


Topic

1.7.1–Troubleshooting by LED on the Hydraulic Compartment PCB

1.7.2–Troubleshooting by LED on the Compressor Compartment PCB (A1P)

1.7.3–Troubleshooting by LED on the Compressor Compartment Service PCB

(A2P)

See page

3–30

3–31

3–32

1

4

5


3–29


1

1.7.1

Troubleshooting by LED on the Hydraulic Compartment PCB

Overview

Troubleshooting can be carried out by service monitor LED (green). (Blinks when normal) w

: LED on / x

: LED off / c

: LED blinks

Microcomputer Normal

Monitor

HAP (LED-A)

w x


Failure of hydraulic compartment PC board ass’y (Note 5)

Malfunction of power supply or failure of PC board ass’y or broken transmission wire between compartments. (Note 4)

3 3

Notes

4

1

When the INSPECTION/TEST button of remote controller is pushed, INSPECTION display blinks entering INSPECTION mode.

2

In the INSPECTION mode, when the ON/OFF button is pushed and held for 5 seconds or more, the aforementioned malfunctioning history display is off. In this case, after the malfunction code blinks 2 times, the code display turns to “00” (=Normal) and the unit No. turns to “0”. The

INSPECTION mode automatically switches to the normal mode (set temperature display).

3

Operation halts due to malfunction depending on the model or condition.

4

Troubleshoot by turning off the power supply for a minimum of 5 seconds, turning it back on, and then rechecking the LED display.

5

3–30



1.7.2

Troubleshooting by LED on the Compressor Compartment PCB (A1P)

Overview

Notes

Remark

1

The following diagnosis can be conducted by turning on the power switch and checking the LED indication on the printed circuit board of the compressor compartment.

w

: LED on / x

: LED off /

c

: LED blinks / — : Not used for diagnosis

LED detection

HAP H1P Description

(Green)

c w x c

(Red)

x

—

— w

Normal

Faulty compressor compartment PCB (Note 1)

Power supply abnormality, or faulty compressor compartment PCB (Note 2)

Activation of protection device (Note 3)

1

Turn off the power switch, and turn it on again after 5 seconds or more. Check the error condition, and diagnose the problem.

2

Turn off the power switch. After 5 seconds or more, disconnect the connection wire (2). Then turn on the power switch. If the HAP on the compressor compartment PCB flashes after about 10 seconds, the hydraulic compartment PCB is faulty.

3

Also check for open phase.

4

The error detection monitor continues to indication the previously generated error until the power switch is turned off.

Be sure to turn off the power switch after inspection.

5


3–31


1

1.7.3

Troubleshooting by LED on the Compressor Compartment Service PCB (A2P)

Take the following steps to check contents of retry and malfunction:

To enter "Monitor mode," push the MODE (BS1) button when in "Setting mode 1."

<Display of RETURN 2>

When SET (BS2) button is pushed, the LED display for RETURN 2 turns ON.

<Selection of retry or malfunction item>

Push the SET (BS2) button to set the LED display to retry or malfunction item.


When SET (BS2) button is pushed, the LED display for RETURN 3 turns ON.

3 3


When the RETURN (BS3) button is pushed, the

LED display for RETURN 1 turns ON.

Push the RETURN (BS3) button to return the system to the initial state of "Monitor mode."

∗

Pushing the MODE (BS1) button will bring the system to the "Setting mode 1."

4

5

3–32



Overview

1 2

w

: ON x

: OFF c

: BLINK

3

E1

E3

E4

E5

E7

P1

P4

PJ

U0

H3

H9

J1

J3

J5

J6

J7

L8

L9

LC

J8

L1

L4

L5

Malfuncti on code

Contents of retry or malfunction

C4

E9

F3

U2

U4

UA

UF

HA

P

H1

P

H2

P

H3

P

H4

P

H5

P

H6

P

H7

P

HA

P

H1

P

H2

P

H3

P

H4

P

H5

P

H6

P

H7

P

HA

P

H1

P

H2

P

H3

P

H4

P

H5

P

H6

P

H7

P

Hydraulic compartment heat exchanger thermistor

Faulty compressor compartment PC board

Abnormal high pressure

Abnormal low pressure

Compressor motor lock

Abnormal fan motor

DC motor 1 lock

DC motor 2 lock

Abnormal electronic expansion valve

Abnormal inverter transmission

Disconnected electronic expansion valve connector

Malfunction due to wet conditions

Abnormal discharge pipe temperature

Abnormal discharge pipe temperature

Disconnected discharge pipe thermistor

Abnormal high pressure switch c c w w x x c c c c w x c x x c c c w w x x x c c c w w x x c x c c x w x c x c c c w x x x c c c c w w x x x c c c w w x x c x c c x w x c x x c c w x x x c c c c w w x x x x

Abnormal outdoor air thermistor c c w x x c c c c c w w x x x c c c w w x x c x

Abnormal pressure sensor c c w x c x x c c c w w x x x x c c x w x c c x c c w x x x x c c c w w x x x x

Abnormal discharge pipe thermistor

Abnormal suction pipe thermistor c c w x x x c c c c w w x x x x c c w x x c x c c c w w x x x x c c w x x c c x c c w w x x x x Abnormal heat exchanger distributor pipe thermistor

Abnormal intermediate heat exchanger thermistor

Abnormal liquid pipe thermistor c c w x x c c c c c w w x x x x

PC board failure

Elevated radiation fin temperature

Compressor instantaneous overcurrent c c w x c x x x c c w w x x x x c c x w x c c c c c w x x x x c c c w w x x x x c c w x x c x x c c w w x x x x c c w x x c x c c c w w x x x x

Compressor overload

Compressor lock

Abnormal transmission (between the control and the inverter)

Unbalanced power supply voltage c c x w x x c c c c w x x x x c c c w w x x x x c c w x x x c c c c w w x x x x c c w x x c x x c c w w x x x x c c w x x c x c c c w w x x x x c c w x c x x x c c w w x x x x c c w x c x x c c c w w x x x x c c w x c c x x c c w w x x x x

Abnormal radiation fin thermistor

Faulty capacity setting

Abnormal gas shortage

Gas shortage warning

Abnormal gas shortage


Inverter undervoltage and overvoltage

SP-PAM overvoltage c c x w c x x x c c w x x x x c c c w w x x x x c c w x x c x x c c w w x x x x c c w x c c x c c c w w x x x x c c x w c x x c c c w x x x x x c c w w x x x c c c w w x x c x c c w x x x c x c c w w x x x c

Abnormal transmission (between indoor and outdoor units)

Faulty field setting switch

Improper piping and improper communication wiring c c w x x x c x c c w x x c x x c c w w x x x x c c w w x x c x c c w x x c x x c c w w x x x x c c w x c x c x c c w w x x x x c c c c c c w w x x x x

1

4

5


3–33

3 3

4

5

Troubleshooting

1

1.8

Overview of Error Codes

ESIE08-02

3–34



1.8.1

Hydraulic Module Malfunction

Explanation for symbols

: High probability of malfunction

{ : Possibility of malfunction

: Low probability of malfunction

— : No possibility of malfunction (do not replace)

Overview

8H

AA

A1

80

81

89

7H

C0

C4

EC

HC

Remote

Controller

Display

Location of Malfunction

Other than PC

Board

Compressor

Compartment

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

{

—

—

—

—

PC Board

Hydraulic Compartment

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Remote

Controller

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Contents of Malfunction Details of

Malfunction

(Reference

Page)

Inlet water temperature thermistor abnormality

3–43

Outlet water temperature thermistor abnormality 3–43

Water heat exchanger freeze-up abnormality

Flow abnormality

Outlet water temperature too high

Booster heater thermal protector is open

Hydraulic compartment PCB abnormality

Flow switch abnormality

3–42

Heat exchanger thermistor abnormality

Domestic hot water temperature too high

Domestic hot water temperature thermistor abnormality

3–43

3–43

1

4

5


3–35


1

1.8.2

Compressor Compartment Malfunction






3 3

4

5

Overview

E9

F3

H3

H9

E3

E4

E5

E7

Remote

Controller

Display

Other than PC

Board

E1


Compressor

Compartment

PC Board

Hydraulic compartment

—

Remote

Controller

—

J1

J3

J5

J6

J7

J8

L1

L4

L5

L8

L9

LC

P1

P4

PJ

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Contents of Malfunction

Compressor compartment P.C board malfunction

Abnormality of high pressure (HPS)

Abnormality of low pressure

Compressor motor lock malfunction

Malfunction of outdoor unit fan motor

Malfunction of Electronic expansion valve

Discharge pipe temperature malfunction

Faulty high pressure switch (HPS)

Malfunction of outdoor air temperature sensor system

Malfunction of pressure sensor


Suction pipe thermistor malfunction

Malfunction of heat exchanger temperature sensor system

Malfunction of subcooling heat exchanger temperature sensor system (compressor compartment)

Malfunction of liquid pipe thermistor

(compressor compartment)

Outdoor PC board malfunction

High temperature of radiation fin

Overcurrent of DC output (instantaneous)

Electronic thermal switch (time lag)

Stall prevention (time lag)

Malfunction of transmission system (between control PCB and inverter PCB)

Open phase or voltage unbalance

Malfunction of radiator fin temperature thermistor

Error in capacity setting

Details of

Malfunction

(Reference

Page)

3–56

3–57

3–59

3–62

3–64

3–67

3–70

3–72

3–74

3–75

3–74

3–74

3–74

3–74

3–74

3–77

3–79

3–81

3–83

3–85

3–87

3–89

3–90

3–91

3–36



1.8.3

System Malfunction

1






Overview

Remote

Controller

Display

Other than PC

Board


Compressor

Compartment

PC Board

Hydraulic Compartment

Remote

Controller

U0

U2

U4

or

UF

UF

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

U5

UA

—

—

—

Contents of Malfunction

Gas shortage


Transmission error (between compartments)

(1)

Malfunction of transmission (between compartment) or

Gas shortage

Transmission error (between hydraulic compartment and remote controller)

Incorrect hydro-box connected to this system

Details of

Malfunction

(Reference

Page)

3–94

3–96

3–99

3–102

3–104

3–105

Note

(1)

Possibility of open phase power supply.

4

5


3–37

4

5

Troubleshooting

1

1.9

Overview of the Compressor Compartment Safety Devices

High pressure switch

Open

4.0 Mpa +0/-0.15

Close

3.0 +/-0.15

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

Fuse

6.3A/250V

3 3

ESIE08-02

3–38


ESIE08-02

1.10

Overview of the Hydraulic Compartment Safety Devices

Hydraulic

Compartment

E(B\D)(H\L)Q* hydraulic compartment

Q1L (Clixon)

F1T (Thermal fuse)

S1L

75 ± 4°C

94°C +0 / -10°C

16 l / min

Tank

EKSWW

EKSWWU

EKHWS - V3

EKHWS - Z2

EKHWSU - V3

EKHWE - V3

EKWE - Z2

Q2L

Q2L

Q3L

Q2L

Q3L

Q2L

Q3L

Q2L

Q3L

Q2L

Q2L

Q3L

85°C ± 3°C

85°C ± 3°C

85°C ± 3°C

85°C ± 3°C

85°C ± 3°C

91°C ± 3°C

85°C ± 3°C

85°C ± 3°C

85°C ± 3°C

89°C +0 / -8°C

89°C +0 / -8°C

89°C +0 / -8°C

Troubleshooting

Reference

AS17WW0046-B

4SW04143-1

Reference

4SW03476-1

4SW03476-1

4SW05637-1

4SW05637-2

4SW05637-1

4SW05637-3

4SW05724-1

4SW05724-1

1

4

5


3–39

ESIE08-02

3 3

4

5

1

Troubleshooting

3–40


ESIE08-02 Error Codes: Hydraulic Compartment

Part 3

1

2 Error Codes: Hydraulic Compartment

2.1


Introduction

Shutdown

Overview

In the first stage of the troubleshooting sequence, it is important to correctly interpret the error code on the remote controller display. The error code helps you to find the cause of the problem.

For some errors, the system only shuts down when the error occurs several times. This means that you have to wait until the system shuts down to be able to see the flashing LED on the front panel and the error code on the remote controller.


Topic See page

2.2–“A1” Malfunctioning Hydraulic Compartment PCB

2.3–“C4, 81, 80, HC” Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Hydraulic Module)

2.4–“7H” Water flow too low

3–42

3–43

3–44

2.5–“8H” Hydraulic Module: Outlet water temperature too high (> 65°C)

2.6–“AA” Hydraulic Module: Open thermal protector / fuse of backup heater or booster heater

2.7–“C0” Hydraulic Module: Flow switch failure

3–47

3–48

3–51

2.8–“EC” Hydraulic Module: Domestic hot water tank temperature too high (> 89°C) 3–52

2.9–Freeze-up Protection Control, High Pressure Control or Hydraulic Compartment Heat Exchanger Thermistor Abnormality

3–53

4

5


3–41


1

2.2

“

A1” Malfunctioning Hydraulic Compartment PCB

Remote controller display

A1

LED indications

The table below shows the LED indications.

Operation

Normal

3 3

Malfunctioning

HAP (green)

c c c w x

ESIE08-02

Caution

Normal reset?

No

Yes

The malfunction may be caused by an external factor, rather than damaged parts.

Locate the cause and correct the situation.

Replace hydraulic module

PCB A11P


3–42



2.3

“

C4, 81, 80, HC” Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Hydraulic Module)


C4, 81, 80, HC

Method of malfunction detection

The temperatures detected by the thermistors are used to determine thermistor errors.

Malfunction decision conditions

When the thermistor input is more than 4.96 V or less than 0.04 V during compressor operation*.

* (reference)

When above about 212°C (less than 120 ohms) or below about –50°C (more than 1,860 kohms).

Note: The values vary slightly in some models.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

Faulty connector connection

Faulty thermistor

Faulty PCB

Troubleshooting

Check the connector connection.

1

3

4

5

Is it normal?

YES

Check No. 04

Thermistor resistance check

NO

Correct the connection.

Is it normal?

NO

YES

Replace the thermistor.

(Replace the hydraulic compartment PCB.)

Replace the hydraulic compartment PCB.

C4: Hydraulic Compartment heat exchanger thermistor

81: Outlet water temperature thermistor

80: Inlet water temperature thermistor

HC: Domestic hot water temperature thermistor

(*) See also "Check No.4 - Resistance Conversion Table (Ambient, Coil, Fin)" on page 3-111.


3–43

Error Codes: Hydraulic Compartment ESIE08-02

1

2.4

“

7H” Water flow too low


7H

The malfunction is detected by the flow switch.



The error is generated in case the water flow is too low or no water flow at all (minimum required water flow is 16 l/min).

3 3

Supposed causes

4

5

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Closed shut off valve

Air in the system

Clogged water filter

Insufficient water pressure

Too high external static pressure (pump speed setting)

Malfunction of pump

Pump fuse open [FU2]

Malfunction of pump relay [K4M]

■

■

During defrost

Malfunction of the backup heater [Q1L, F1T]

Backup heater fuse [F1B]

In case of EKSWW(U) / EKHWS(U) / EKHWE

■

Malfunction of the 3-way valve

In case of the EKSWWU / EKHWSU

■

■

Malfunction of the tank thermostat [Q1T, Q3L]

Malfunction of 2-way valve

3–44


ESIE08-02

Troubleshooting


1

Check the installation conditions

Open shut-OFF valves

Yes

Hydro-box pump runs

[1]

Yes

No

No

Open the shut-OFF valve

Make sure that the pump signal is displayed on the interface [2]

A

Water pressure is sufficient

[3]

Yes

No Charge additional water to the system

Water circuit is sufficiently airpurged / Airpurge valve is open

No

Purge the water circuit

Open the airpurge valve

Yes

Is the water filter clogged / dirty Yes Clean the water filter

No

External static pressure is in range of the hydro-box pump range

[4]

Yes

Domestic hot water tank is installed

Yes

No

No Make the correct pump speed setting

B

No

3-way valve is correct connected to

X2M 9-10-11

Correct operation of the 3-way valve

Yes

Tank type is

EKSWWU/EKHWSU

Yes

No B

No

Yes

Check the 3-way valve position

Replace in case required

Connect the wires correctly according the installation manual

2-way valve on the flow inlet operates correctly

Yes

B

No Change the 2-way valve

3

4

5


3–45

1

3 3

4

5


B

Flow error occured during defrost operation

No

Yes

Malfunction of the backup heater

No

Yes

[6] when the pump is running the resistance value on the

connector of the flow switch is lower than 1 ohm

No

Replace the flow switch

Yes Check the circuit for blockages

Check the thermal protector (Q1L) / fuse (F1T) of the backup

Check the backup heater fuse F1B

A

Power supply (230V) towards the hydro-box pump is OK

Yes

No

Power supply to relay (K4M) is OK

No

Replace the fuse (FU2)

Replace the hydro-box pump

Yes

Control signal (230V) to relay coil is OK

(X15A)

No

Replace the hydro-box PCB (A1P)

Yes Replace the relay (K4M)

Hydro-box pump is blocked

No

Yes

Unblock the pump [5]

[1]: When the pump starts (push the ON/OFF button), manometer needle moves, pump vibrations can be detect. In case unclear perform item A.

[2]: When the pump runs, pump signal is displayed on the interface controller. The pump will run for

15 seconds before error code 7H will be displayed.

In order perform item A completely, several pump restarts can be required.

[3]: Check the installation manual for the minimum required water pressure in the system.

[4]: Check the installation manual for the external static pressure values of the different pump speeds.

[5]: Close the shut-off valves, reduce the water pressure (check manometer). Remove the front screw to unblock the pump rotor.

[6]: Disconnect the connector of the flow switch on the PCB (X4A) and measure the resistance value on the connector of the flow switch.

At a restart of the system, the pump will operate for 15 seconds before error code occurs.

Use this 15 seconds to confirm the resistance value of the flow switch before the pump will be stopped due to error 7H.

3–46



2.5

“

8H” Hydraulic Module: Outlet water temperature too high (> 65°C)


8H


The malfunction is detected by outlet water thermistor after backup heater [R2T].


The error is generated in case the outlet water temperature is higher than 65°C.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

Malfunction of the outlet water thermistor [R2T]

Malfunction of the backup heater relays [K1M, K2M]

In case of combination with boiler

■ Incorrect cooperation of systems

Troubleshooting

Check the thermistor connector connection

Is it Normal?

Yes

Check N . 04


No Correct the connection

Is it Normal?

Yes

No Replace the thermistor

Backup heater relay (K1M, K2M) contacts are open

No Replace the applicable relay

Yes

External heat source in the water circuit?

No


Yes Improper combination

1

3

4

5


3–47


1

2.6

“

AA” Hydraulic Module: Open thermal protector / fuse of backup heater or booster

heater


AA


■

■

The malfunction is detected by activation of thermal protector of the:

Backup heater [Q1L, F1T]

■

■

Booster heater

Q2L: EKSWW / EKHWE / EKHWS***V3 / EKHWSU

Q3L: EKSWWU / EKHWS***Z2

3 3


The error is generated in case the temperature of the backup heater or booster heater rise above specific temperature.

4

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

Malfunction of the booster heater relay [K3M]

Malfunction of the backup heater relays [K1M, K2M]

Incorrect parameter of the solar pump station (maximum tank temperature is too high, etc.)

Fuse FU2 blown

5

3–48



Troubleshooting

1

Switch off the heating/cooling request and if applicable the domestic hot water request via the remote controller.

Reset the error code AA via the remote controller. [1]

Turn OFF the power supply to the hydro-box PCB.

Remark: Power supply is performed via outdoor unit

Is the connector X3A

properly connected

Yes

Hydro-box pump fuse (FU2) is conductive

Yes

Check the condition of the

BUH thermal fuse (F1T).

[X2M N .11-12]

No Properly connect the connector.

No Replace the fuse (FU2)

The F1T is conductive

Yes

Check the condition of the

BUH thermal protector (Q1L).

[X2M N .12 / K4M A1]

No Replace the backup heater

The Q1L is conductive

No

Yes

Turn ON the power supply to the hydro-box PCB.

Remark: Power supply is performed via outdoor unit

Reset the thermal protector.

Power supply (230V) towards the safety relay (K5M) is OK.

[K5M N .A1-A2]

Yes

Check the condition of the safety relay (K5M) contact.

[K5M N .13-14]

No

The contact N .13-14 is conductive

Yes

Domestic hot water tank is connected

Yes

Is the clixon of the tank tripped Q2L or Q3L

No

No

No

Yes

Replace the safety relay.

Dipswitch

SS2-2 is ON

No

Yes

Set dipswitch SS2-2 OFF.

Reset the error code and switch the power OFF and ON [1]

Replace hydro-box PCB

Is the relay K3M open

No

Yes Reset the tank clixon.

Replace K3M and reset clixon

Is the relay K3M open

No

Yes Reset the error code and switch the power OFF and ON [1]


Is the connector X21A properly connected

Yes

Is the connection on

X2M: 13-14 properly done

Yes

No

No

Properly connect the connector.

Connect the field wires properly on X2M:13-14.

Is the connection on

Q2L or Q3L in the tank properly done

No

Connect the field wires properly on Q2L or Q3L

!For the EKHWE, check the connection on X9M:13-14 as well!

* See check No 16: Thermal Protector

Yes


3

4

5


3–49

3 3

4

5

1


[1]: The error has to be erased from the memory via the remote controller before the power is switched OFF and ON.

The error code has to be erased via following procedure:

A) Switch off the heating / cooling request and if applicable the domestic hot water request via the remote controller.

B) Push the "inspection / test button" z

(the error code will be displayed and 'inspection' icon kl is blinking) and press the ON/OFF button y

till the error code is replaced by '00'.

3–50



2.7

“

C0” Hydraulic Module: Flow switch failure


C0


The protection device circuit checks the flow input signal during pump stop operation.


The error is generated in case flow input signal during pump stop operation occurs.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

Blocked flow switch

Malfunction of the flow switch

Water flow caused by external source

Troubleshooting


1

3

4

Is there an external pump installed in the water circuit of the hydro-box

Yes

Remove the external pump or separate the external pump hydraulically from the hydro-box via a balance vessel.

No

[1]

The resistance value on the connector of the flow switch is lower than 1 ohm

No

Measured value should be ’open loop’.

Replace A11P PCB.

Yes

Remove the flow switch and confirm if the flow switch is blocked by dirt

Is the flow switch blocked by dirt

Yes

Remove the dirt and confirm correct operation via measure resistance value on the connector of the flow switch.

After dirt is removed and spoon is located vertical: resistance value should be lower than 1 ohm.

!Confirm the condition of the filter in the water circuit!

No

Replace flow switch

[1]: Disconnect the connector of the flow switch on the PCB (X4A) and measure the resistance value on the connector of the flow switch.

5


3–51


1

2.8

“

EC” Hydraulic Module: Domestic hot water tank temperature too high (> 89°C)


EC


The malfunction is detected by domestic hot water tank thermistor (R5T).


The error is generated in case the domestic hot water temperature rise above 89°C.

3 3

Supposed causes

■

■

Malfunction of the domestic hot water tank thermistor [R5T]

Incorrect parameters on the solar pump station

Troubleshooting

4

Check N . 04


5

Is it Normal?

Yes

Solar panels are connected to the tank via EKSOLHWAV1

Yes

No

Replace the thermistor

No Replace the applicable relay

Maximum tank temperature set point via the solar pump station thermistor is correct?

[1]

No

Adapt the maximum tank set point via the solar pump station to the correct value [1]

Yes


[1]: Confirm the maximum allowed tank temperature via solar panels in the installation manual of

EKSOLHWAV1.

3–52



2.9

Freeze-up Protection Control, High Pressure Control or Hydraulic Compartment

Heat Exchanger Thermistor Abnormality

Remote Controller

Display

A5

1

Method of

Malfunction

Detection

Malfunction

Decision

Conditions

Supposed Causes

■

■

■

High pressure control

During heating operations, the temperature detected by the HC heat exchanger thermistor is used for the high pressure control (stop, fan stop, etc.).

Freeze-up protection control (operation halt) is activated during cooling operation according to the temperature detected by the HC heat exchanger thermistor.

The temperature detected by the HC heat exchanger thermistor is used to determine thermistor error.

3

■

■

■

High pressure control

During heating operations, the temperature detected by the HC heat exchanger thermistor is above 68°C.

Freeze-up protection

When the HC heat exchanger temperature is below 1°C during cooling operation.

HC Heat Exchanger Thermistor Abnormality

When the input voltage of thermistor during the compressor is operating is 4.96V or more.

4

5

■

■

■

■

■

Operation halt due to clogged water filter of the hydraulic compartment.

Operation halt due to short-circuit.

Detection error due to faulty HC heat exchanger thermistor.

Detection error due to faulty HC PCB.

Stop valve closed.


3–53


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4

5

Caution

Check the stop valve.

Is it opened?

YES

Check the water circuit.

NO

Is there any short-circuit?

NO

Check the inlet water filter.

YES

Is it very dirty?

NO

Check the thermistor connector connection.

YES

Is it normal?

YES

Check No. 03/04*

Indoor unit heat exchanger thermistor check

NO

Open the stop valve.

Provide sufficient water piping.

Clean the water filter.

Correct the connection.

Check thermistor resistance value

YES

Replace the indoor unit PCB.

NO

Replace the thermistor

(replace the indoor unit PCB).

(R8503)

(*) See also "Check No.3 - Checking the Thermistors" on page 3-110.


Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector, or parts damage may be occurred.

3–54


ESIE08-02 Error Codes: Compressor Compartment

Part 3

1

3 Error Codes: Compressor Compartment

3.1


Introduction

Overview



Topic See page

3.2–“E1” Compressor Compartment PCB Abnormality

3.3–“E3”Abnormal High Pressure (Detected by the HPS)

3.4–“E4” Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor

3.5–“E5” Compressor Motor Lock

3.6–“E7” Malfunction of Fan Motor

3.7–“E9” Malfunction of Electronic Expansion Valve

3.8–“F3” Malfunction in Discharge Pipe Temperature

3.9–“H3” Malfunctioning HPS System

3.10–“H9, J3, J5, J6, J7, J8” Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Outdoor Unit)

3.11–“J1” Malfunction of Pressure Sensor

3.12–“L1” Faulty Compressor Compartment PC Board

3.13–“L4” Radiation Fin Temperature Increased

3.14–“L5” DC Output Overcurrent (Instantaneous)

3.15–“L8” DC Output Overcurrent (Instantaneous)

3.16–“L9” Stall Prevention (Time Lag)

3.17–“LC” Malfunction of Transmission system (Between Control PCB and Inverter

PCB)

3.18–“P1” Open Phase or Power Supply Voltage Imbalance

3.19–“P4” Malfunction of Radiator Fin Temperature Thermistor

3.20–“PJ” Capacity Setting Error

3–89

3–90

3–91

3–72

3–74

3–75

3–77

3–79

3–81

3–83

3–85

3–87

3–56

3–57

3–59

3–62

3–64

3–67

3–70

4

5


3–55

Error Codes: Compressor Compartment ESIE08-02

1

3.2

“

E1” Compressor Compartment PCB Abnormality


E1

Microcomputer checks whether E

2

PROM is normal.



E

2

PROM:

When E

2

PROM malfunctions when turning the power supply on

3 3

Supposed causes

Faulty compressor compartment PCB

Troubleshooting

4

Turn the power supply off once and then back on

5

Is normal reset possible?

NO

YES

Turn the power supply off and disconnect the fan motor connector from the PCB, then turn the power supply on again. Is "E1" displayed?

YES

Problem could be caused by external factor (noise, etc.) other than malfunction.

Replace the outdoor PC board (A1P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

Replace the control PC board (A1P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

NO

Fan motor check

Caution


3–56



3.3

“

E3”Abnormal High Pressure (Detected by the HPS)


E3


The protection device circuit checks continuity in the high pressure switch.


When the high pressure switch is actuated

Actuating pressure: see table below

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Faulty high pressure switch

Disconnection in high pressure switch harness

Faulty connection of high pressure switch connector

Clogged hydraulic compartment suction filter (in heating operation)

Dirty compressor compartment heat exchanger

Faulty compressor compartment fan

Refrigerant overcharge

Stop valve is left closed.

HPS settings

The table below contains the preset HPS values.

High pressure switch

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

Open

4.0 Mpa +0/-0.15

Close

3.0 +/-0.15

Fuse

6.3A/250V

1

4

5


3–57


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4


(1).

Is the stop valve open?

NO

YES

Are control and protection HPS connected to outdoor unit PC board?

(Note)

NO

YES

Turn off the power supply. Wait for

10 minutes after compressor stops operating, then check the following.

5

Caution


Connect correctly.

Is there continuity in control and protection HPS?

NO

YES

Is high pressure abnormally high? (2)

NO

Set the remote controller and turn on again.

YES

Replace HPS with no continuity.

Correct the high pressure.

Is the malfunction code of "H3" displayed?

YES

Replace the high pressure switch (HPS).

NO

* Replace the compressor compartment

PC board (A1P) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

* Replace the inverter PC board (A2P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

(1) See also "Check No.1 - Checking the Installation Condition" on page 3-108.

(2) See also "Check No.6 - Evaluation of Abnormal High Pressure" on page 3-114.


3–58



3.4

“

E4” Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor


E4


[In cooling]

■ Detect malfunctions by the pressure sensor (S1NPH).

[In heating]

■ Detect malfunctions by the heat exchanger distribution pipe thermistor (R4T).


[In cooling]

■ When the detection pressure is the following value:

0.12 MPa or less continues for 5 minutes

[In heating]

■ When the saturated pressure equivalent to the detection temperature is the following value:

0.12 MPa or less continues for 5 minutes

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

The stop valve remains closed

Faulty pressure sensor and intermittent harness


Abnormal drop of low pressure

(inadequate refrigerant)

(Abnormal refrigerant piping system (liquid pipe system))

(Faulty electronic expansion valve)

1

4

5


3–59


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4

5


YES

Is it in cooling operation?

NO

NO


YES

(In cooling operation)

Is the pressure sensor (connector

X17A) properly connected to the (A1p) PC board?

YES

Measure the voltage between the connector pins (1) and (3) above. (refer to *1)

Is the heat exchanger distribution pipe thermistor (connector :

X12A) properly connected to the outdoor PC board?

NO

Connect the connector properly.

Replace the low pressure sensor.

Remove the thermistor from the outdoor PC board and measure resistance between the pins (5) and (6).

Is it normal?

Check 3-4

NO

Replace the group thermistor.

Is the relation between low pressure and voltage normal? (refer to

*2)

YES

NO

YES

Replace the low pressure sensor.

Is low pressure abnormally low?

Check 7

NO

NO

* Replace the outdoor PC board (A1P) ERHQ***V3*

* Replace the Control PC board (A1P) ERHQ***W1*

[* Replace the PC board equipped with resin case.]

Correct the refrigerant system defect

■

■

See also

"Check No.7 - Evaluation of Abnormal Low Pressure" on page 3-115.

"Check No.3 - Checking the Thermistors" on page 3-110.

3–60


ESIE08-02

Graphs

Error Codes: Compressor Compartment

1

Outdoor unit PC board A2P

+5V

Microcomputer

A/D input

GND

X64A

2

1

4

3

Red

Black

White

∗

2 Measure voltage here.

(V2809)

1.5

PL

1.0

0.5

0

0.5

-0.5

0 0.5

1 1.5

2 2.5

3 3.5

4

Vcc

Output voltage V

PL=0.57V-0.28

PL: detected pressure (Mpa)

V: output voltage (V)


4

5

Caution


3–61


1

3.5

“

E5” Compressor Motor Lock


E5


Inverter PC board takes the position signal from UVW line connected between the inverter and compressor, and detects the position signal pattern.

3 3


The position signal with 3 times cycle as imposed frequency is detected when compressor motor operates normally, but 2 times cycle when compressor motor locks. When the position signal in 2 times cycle is detected

4

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

Compressor lock

High differential pressure (2.6MPa or more) starting

Incorrect UVW wiring

Faulty inverter PC board

Stop valve is left closed.

5

3–62



Troubleshooting

1

Check the installation conditions. (*)


NO

YES

Is the UVW wiring normal?

YES

NO


Connect correctly.

Is high pressure higher than 2.6 MPa at starting?

YES

Remedy the cause.

NO

Check and see whether compressor is short-circuited or ground.

YES

NO

Are inverter output voltages the same for 3 phases?

NO


Replace the inverter PC board (A1P)

(A2P)

YES

Does low or high pressure vary even instantaneously when restarting compressor?

YES

NO


(*) See also "Check No.1 - Checking the Installation Condition" on page 3-108.


4

5

Caution


3–63


1

3.6

“

E7” Malfunction of Fan Motor


E7


Abnormality of fan motor system is detected according to the fan speed detected by hall IC when the fan motor runs.

3 3


■

■

■

When the fan runs with speed less than specified for 15 seconds or more when the fan motor running conditions are met

When connector detecting fan speed is disconnected

When malfunction is generated 4 times, the system shuts down.

4

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

■

Malfunction of fan motor

The harness connector between fan motor and PC board is left in disconnected, or faulty connector

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 only: faulty connector X191A (L4R)

Fan does not run due to foreign matters tangled

Malfunction of the compressor compartment (inverter) PC board

Blowout of fuse

5

3–64



Troubleshooting

Is the supply voltage within the range 180 to 220

VAC? (V3 models) or

380~415 VAC ±10%

(W1 models)

NO

YES

Turn OFF the power again (and wait for 10 minutes).

Is the fan motor connector correctly connected to the outdoor PC board?

Is the connector X191A of reactor coil (L4R) correctly connected?

NO

YES

Is there any foreign matter around the fan?

NO

YES

Remove the fan motor connector.

Ask repair so that the supply voltage will be within the normal range.

Properly connect the connector.

Remove the foreign matter.

Is the fan easily rotatable by hand?

YES

Check 9 check the resistance value for the fan motor.

NO

A

(*) See also "Check No.9 - Fan Motor Signal Line" on page 3-117.

Replace the fan motor.

1

4

5


3–65

1

3 3

4

5


Caution

ESIE08-02

A

Is the resistance value of the fan motor normal?

YES

NO

Is the fuse conductive?

(*1)

YES

Properly plug the fan motor connector and then turn ON the power again.

NO

Does "E7" appear again?

YES


Replace the fuse.

* Replace the outdoor PC board (A1P) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

* Replace the inverter PC board

(A2P) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

NO

There is no problem with the unit.

An external factor (noise, etc.) other than unit failure may be a cause of the malfunction.


(*1): FUSE CONDUCTIVE

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

F6U (A1P) [outdoor pc board]

F7U (A2P) [inverter pc board]

3–66



3.7

“

E9” Malfunction of Electronic Expansion Valve


E9

1


Method is determined according to the suction pipe superheat degree and electronic expansion valve opening degree calculated by values of low pressure sensor and suction pipe temperature thermistor.


■

■

■

When the following conditions are met for 10 minutes

Suction pipe superheat degree < 4°C

Minimum electronic expansion valve opening degree

Connector of electronic expansion valve is missing when the power is on.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Faulty electronic expansion valve

Faulty solenoid valve

Faulty check valve

Disconnection of electronic expansion valve harness

Faulty connection of electronic expansion valve connector

Faulty thermistor

Faulty mounting

Faulty pressure sensor

Faulty Outdoor control PC board

4

5


3–67


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4

5

Turn OFF the power supply once and then turn it ON again.

NO

Does the malfunction code "E9" recur?

YES

Is the electronic expansion valve connector properly connected to the outdoor PC board?

(*1)

YES

NO

Is the coil resistance of the electronic expansion valve normal?

(*2)

YES

NO

Is the temperature sensor of each thermistor (suction pipe, discharge pipe, intermediate heat exchanger and heat exchanger distribution pipe thermistors) mounted properly?

NO

YES

Are the characteristics of each thermistor normal?

(*3)

YES

Are the pressure sensor characteristics normal?

(*4)

YES

A

NO

NO

Connect properly.

Replace the coil of the electronic expansion valve.

Mount properly.

Replace the abnormal thermistor.

Replace the pressure sensor.

ESIE08-02

3–68



A

Actually, it is in wet operation.

Refer to Check 13,14,15 to eliminate the causes of wet operation.

Restart operation.

1

Caution


Does the malfunction code "E9" recur?

YES

NO

*1: Electronic expansion valve and connector No. X21A

*2: Electronic expansion valve connector and coil resistance criteria.

See also Check No. 2.

* Replace the outdoor PC board

(A1P) ERHQ***V3*

* Replace the control PC board (A1P)

ERHQ***W1*

It is believed that factors (noise, etc.,) other than failure caused the malfunction.

(Orange) 1

(Red) 2

(Yellow) 3

(Black) 4

(Gray) 5

(White) 6

*3: For thermistor temperature and resistance characteristics, see

Check 4,5

.

*4: For voltage characteristics of the pressure sensor, see the right

figure.

Measurement spot

1 - 5

2 - 5

3 - 5

4 - 5

Criteria

40 ~ 50

40 ~ 50

40 ~ 50

40 ~ 50

P = 1.38V 0.69

P : Detected pressure (MPa)

V : Output voltage

3.5

3.0

2.5

P

1.0

0.5

2.0

1.5

0

0.5

0.5

0 0.5

1 1.5

2 2.5

Output voltage V (VDC)

3 3.5

■

■

■

■

■

■

See also

"Check No.2 - Checking the Expansion Valve" on page 3-109.

"Check No.4 - Resistance Conversion Table (Ambient, Coil, Fin)" on page 3-111.

"Check No.5 - Resistance Conversion Table (Discharge Pipe Sensor)" on page 3-113.

"Check No.12 - Check for Inadequate Refrigerant" on page 3-120.

"Check No.13 - Check for Excessive Refrigerant Charging" on page 3-121.

"Check No.14 - Check for Factors Causing Wet Operation" on page 3-122.


4

5

3–69


1

3.8

“

F3” Malfunction in Discharge Pipe Temperature


F3


Abnormality is detected according to the temperature detected by the discharge pipe temperature sensor.


■

■

When the discharge pipe temperature rises to an abnormally high level

When the discharge pipe temperature rises suddenly

3 3

Supposed causes

4

■

■

■

■

■

Faulty discharge pipe thermistor

Faulty connection of discharge pipe thermistor

Insufficient refrigerant amount

Faulty compressor

Disconnection of discharge pipe thermistor

5

3–70



Troubleshooting

1

Is the discharge pipe temperature high?

YES

NO

Is the discharge pipe thermistor correctly connected to PCB (A1P)?

NO

YES

Is the discharge pipe thermistor attached to the discharge pipe?

NO

YES

Is the discharge pipe thermistor characteristic normal? (*)

YES

NO

Abnormality in refrigerant system such as gas shortage, faulty compressor, etc.

Conduct inspection

Connect correctly, and operate the unit again.

Attach the thermistor, and operate the unit again.

Replace the discharge pipe thermistor.

4

* Replace the outdoor unit PC board (A1P) ERHQ***V3*

* Replace the control PC board (A1P) ERHQ***W1*

(*) See also "Check No.5 - Resistance Conversion Table (Discharge Pipe Sensor)" on page 3-113.


5

Caution


3–71


1

3.9

“

H3” Malfunctioning HPS System


H3

The protection device circuit checks continuity in the high pressure switch.



When there is no continuity in the high pressure switch, compressor stops operating.

3 3

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

Incomplete high pressure switch

Disconnection in high pressure switch harness

Faulty connection of high pressure switch connector


Disconnected lead wire

4

ESIE08-02

5

3–72



Troubleshooting

1

Is protection HPS connector (*1) correctly connected to compressor compartment PC board?

YES

Wait for 10 minutes after the unit stops operating, then check the following.

NO

Connect correctly.

Is there continuity in each protection

HPS?

NO

YES

NO

Is there continuity in lead wire?

YES

Replace HPS with no continuity.

Resistance in normal operation:

10 or less

Replace the lead wire.

* Replace the outdoor unit PC board


*1 Connector symbol

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3: X32A (A1P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1: X32A (A2P)


4

5

Caution


3–73


1

3.10

“

H9, J3, J5, J6, J7, J8” Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Outdoor Unit)


H9, J3, J5, J6, J7, J8


Abnormality is detected according to the temperature detected by each individual thermistor.


When thermistor is disconnected or short-circuited during operation

3 3

Supposed causes

■

■

■

Faulty thermistor

Faulty connection of connector

Faulty compressor compartment PC board (control PC board)

4

Troubleshooting

Check connectors for connection.

5

Normal?

YES

Remove thermistor from outdoor unit PC board, then measure the resistance using a tester.

NO

Connect correctly.

Normal?

YES

NO

Replace the thermistor.

* Replace the outdoor unit PC board

(A1P) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

* Replace the control PC board (A1P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

H9: Malfunction of outdoor temperature thermistor system

J3: Malfunction of discharge pipe thermistor system

J5: Malfunction of suction pipe thermistor system

J6: Malfunction of heat exchange thermistor

J7: Malfunction of subcooling heat exchanger thermistor

J8: Malfunction of liquid thermistor

(*) See also "Check No.3 - Checking the Thermistors" on page 3-110.


(*) See also "Check No.5 - Resistance Conversion Table (Discharge Pipe Sensor)" on page 3-113.


Caution

3–74



3.11

“

J1” Malfunction of Pressure Sensor


J1


The malfunction is detected by the pressure measured with pressure sensor (S1NPH)


When the detected pressure becomes following:

■

■

Detected pressure

≤ -0.05MPa continues 185 sec.

Detected pressure

≥ 4.4MPa continues 185 sec.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

Faulty pressure sensor


Incorrect connection of connector

Troubleshooting

Check if the connector for the pressure sensor (X17A) is correctly connected to the outdoor unit PC board (A1P)

1

4

5

Is it connected correctly?

NO

YES

Measure the voltage (V) between the pins # (2) and (3) of the above connector (*1).

YES

Is the relation between the pressure and the voltage normal?(*2).

NO

YES

Connect correctly.

Replace the pressure sensor (S1NPH).

* Replace outdoor unit PC

board (A1P) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

* Replace the control PC

board (A1P) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1


3–75


1

Graphs

Outdoor unit PC board A2P

+5V

Microcomputer

A/D input

GND

X64A

2

1

4

3

Red

Black

White

∗

2 Measure voltage here.

(V2809)

3 3

ESIE08-02

4

5

1.5

PL

1.0

0.5

0

0.5

-0.5

0 0.5

1 1.5

2 2.5

3 3.5

4

Vcc

Output voltage V

PL=0.57V-0.28

PL: detected pressure (Mpa)

V: output voltage (V)


Caution

3–76



3.12

“

L1” Faulty Compressor Compartment PC Board


L1

Applicable Models

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3, E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

1


■

■

■

Detect malfunctions by current value during waveform output before compressor startup.

Detect malfunctions by current sensor value during synchronized operation at the time of startup.

Detect malfunctions using an MP-PAM series capacitor overvoltage sensor.


■

■

■

■

■

When over-current is detected at the time of waveform output before operating the compressor

When the current sensor malfunctions during synchronized operation

When overvoltage occurs in MP-PAM

In case of IGBT malfunction

In case of faulty jumper setting

4

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

Faulty compressor compartment PC board (A1P)

IPM failure

Current sensor failure

MP-PAM failure

Failure of IGBT or drive circuit

5


3–77


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4

5

Caution

Is the power supply voltage between

- 180 and 240 VAC? (V3 models)

- 380~415 VAC ±10%

(W1 models)

NO

YES

Turn OFF the power supply once.

Request an improvement to make the power supply voltage fall within the standard range.

Is the lead wire for compressor connected to PC board and compressor without becoming loose?

NO

YES

Check the resistance value for the fan motor. (*)

Connect tightly and correctly.


YES

Does the fuse

F6U have continuity?

NO

NO

YES

Power ON again.


Replace the fuse.

Use only specified fuses.

Does "L1" malfunction reoccur?

YES

NO

Replace the PC board

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3: A1P

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1: A2P


An external factor (noise, etc.) other than unit failure may be the cause.

(*) See also "Check No.9 - Fan Motor Signal Line" on page 3-117.


3–78



3.13

“

L4” Radiation Fin Temperature Increased


L4

Fin temperature is detected by the thermistor of the radiation fin.


1


When the temperature of the inverter radiation fin increases abnormally due to faulty heat dissipation.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Activation of fin thermal switch

Faulty fin thermistor

High outside air temperature

Insufficient cooling of inverter radiation fin

Blocked suction opening

Dirty radiation fin

Faulty compressor compartment inverter PCB

Insufficient thermal conductive paste (after PCB replacement)

4

5


3–79

3 3

4

5


1

Troubleshooting

Can it be considered that the fin temperature was high? (*1)

NO

Is the connector of the fin thermistor correctly connected to the compressor compartment

PC board (*1)

YES

Check the resistance value of the thermistor according to the

Troubleshooting

Check No. 4

YES

NO

Eliminate the cause.

Connect correctly.

Is it normal?

YES

Does the malfunction code "L4" recur when the unit starts operation?

YES

NO





Continue operation.

* Fin temperature detection value

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

Detection

88 C

88 C

Reset

78 C

85 C


Caution

3–80



3.14

“

L5” DC Output Overcurrent (Instantaneous)


L5

1


Malfunction is detected by converting the current flowing to power transistor into voltage with CT1 (DC current sensor).


When overcurrent has run to power transistor.

(Actuated even by instantaneous overcurrent)

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

■

Faulty compressor coil (disconnection, poor insulation)

Compressor startup malfunction (mechanical lock)


Instantaneous fluctuation of power supply voltage

Faulty compressor (if bearing is scratched)

The stop valve is left closed.

4

5


3–81


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4

5

Caution

Check the installation conditions.

(*1)


YES

Is the compressor coil disconnected or is the insulation defective?

NO

Turn the main power supply off, and then disconnect the connection between the compressor and inverter.

NO

YES

Continuity check in the power transistor (IGBT) Is the continuity normal? (*2)

NO

YES



Replace the inverter PC board.

(A1P) ERHQ***V3*

(A2P) ERHQ***W1*

Is the inverter output voltage generated approximately at the same increasing speed for each phase after turning on again? (1) (U-V, V-W,

W-U)

NO

* When operating compressor with compressor output line disconnected, the compressor stops due to malfunction after elapsed time of 5 seconds.

Therefore, check the voltage increase for 5 seconds.

YES

Replace the inverter PC board.

(A1P) ERHQ***V3*

(A2P) ERHQ***W1*

Check the power supply voltage.

Is instantaneous voltage drop generated?

YES

Correct the power supply.

NO

(1) Approximate value

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

Instantaneous overcurrent detection value

51.7 A

32.7 A

Compressor inspection

Inspect according to the diagnosis procedure for abnormal noise, vibration, operating status, etc. of the compressor.

(*1) See also "Check No.1 - Checking the Installation Condition" on page 3-108.

(*2) See also "Check No.11 - Check for Power Transistor" on page 3-119.


3–82



3.15

“

L8” DC Output Overcurrent (Instantaneous)


L8


■

■

Malfunction is detected by converting the current flowing to power transistor into voltage with CT1

(DC current sensor).

Inverter PC board detects the disorder of position signal.


When compressor overload (except for when startup) is detected.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

Compressor overload (during operation)

Disconnected compressor coil

Faulty inverter

Faulty compressor (if bearing is scratched)

1

4

5


3–83


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4

5

Caution

Is the secondary current of the inverter higher than *A

(see below) for each phase?

YES

NO


Compressor overload

Inspection of the compressor and refrigerant system is required.

Continuity check in the power transistor

(IGBT) Is the continuity normal?

(*)

NO

YES

Replace the inverter PC board



Is the inverter output voltage generated approximately at the same increasing speed on each phase after turning on again? (*)

(U-V, V-W, W-U)

NO

* When operating compressor with compressor output line disconnected, the compressor stops



(A2P) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 due to malfunction after elapsed time of 5 seconds. Therefore, check the voltage increase for 5 seconds.

YES

*A Electronic thermal detection value

Detection value


Inspect according to the diagnosis procedure for abnormal noises, vibration, operating status, etc. of the compressor.

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

Cooling

Heating

Cooling

Heating

31A x 5 seconds or 20.1A x 260 seconds



(*) See also "Check No.11 - Check for Power Transistor" on page 3-119.


3–84



3.16

“

L9” Stall Prevention (Time Lag)


L9

1


■

■

Malfunction is detected by converting the current flowing to power transistor into voltage with CT1

(DC current sensor).

Inverter PC board detects the disorder of position signal.


■

■

When compressor overload (except for when startup) is detected

When position signal is disordered

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

Faulty compressor (lock)

Pressure differential startup

Faulty inverter

The stop valve is left closed.

4

5


3–85


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4

5

Caution

Check the installation conditions.

(*1)


YES

NO

Is the difference between high and low pressure before startup not more than 0.2MPa?

NO


Insufficient pressure equalization.

Check refrigerant system.

YES


Continuity check in the power transistor (IGBT) Is the continuity normal? (*2)

NO


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

* Replace the inverter PC Board (A2P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

YES

Is the inverter output voltage generated approximately at the same increasing speed on each phase after turning on again? (*) (U-V, V-W,

W-U)

NO

* When operating compressor with compressor output line disconnected, the compressor stops due to malfunction after elapsed time of 5 seconds.

Therefore, check the voltage increase for 5 seconds.

YES


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

* Replace the inverter PC Board (A2P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1


Inspect according to the diagnosis procedure for abnormal noises, vibration, operating status, etc. of the compressor.

(*) See also "Check No.1 - Checking the Installation Condition" on page 3-108.

(*) See also "Check No.11 - Check for Power Transistor" on page 3-119.


3–86



3.17

“

LC” Malfunction of Transmission system (Between Control PCB and Inverter

PCB)


LC

1


Checks and sees whether transmission between control and inverter PC board is carried out normally.


When the transmission is not carried out in a specified period of time or longer.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

■

Incorrect transmission wiring between control and inverter PC board/insufficient contact in wiring

Faulty control and inverter PC board

External factors (noise, etc.)

Faulty fan motor

Faulty fan motor connector contact

4

5


3–87


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4

5

Caution

Is the fan motor connector connected?

YES

Are connectors connecting the control and inverter PC board connected securely?

YES

NO

NO

Is the transmission wiring between the control and inverter PC board disconnected?

YES

NO

Disconnect the fan motor connector, and turn on again.

Connect the connector, and turn on again.

Connect the transmission wiring, and turn on again.

Fix the disconnection, and turn on again.

Is "E7" displayed on the remote controller? (Is "LC" not displayed?)

YES

NO

Is the microcomputer normal monitor (green) on inverter PC board blinking?

YES

NO

Is the microcomputer normal

LED on control PC board blinking?

NO

YES


Inverter transmission malfunctioned due to the malfunction of fan motor.



* Replace the inverter PC Board




* Replace the control PC Board


Check for faulty connector connection in the transmission wiring and for clamps with high tension line.


3–88



3.18

“

P1” Open Phase or Power Supply Voltage Imbalance


P1

1


Malfunction is detected according to the voltage waveform of main circuit capacitor built in inverter.


When the aforementioned voltage waveform becomes identical with the waveform of the power supply open phase.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

Open phase

Voltage imbalance between phases

■

■

■

■

Faulty outdoor inverter PC board

Faulty main circuit capacitor

Power unit (Disconnection in diode module)

Faulty magnetic relay (K11R, K12R)

Improper main circuit wiring

Troubleshooting

Check LED on the outdoor unit PC board (Open phase?)

NO

YES

Open phase of power supply voltage?

YES

NO

Is the voltage imbalance between phases large?

YES

NO

(Note)

Target : 10V between phases,

R-S, S-T, T-R

Other factors than open phase

Field factors

Field factors





4

5

Caution



3–89


1

3.19

“

P4” Malfunction of Radiator Fin Temperature Thermistor


P4


Detection by open or short circuit of the radiator fin temperature thermistor during the compressor stops operating.


When open or short circuit of the radiator fin temperature thermistor is detected during the compressor stops operating

3 3

Supposed causes

■

■

Faulty radiator fin temperature thermistor


Troubleshooting

4

Check LED on the outdoor unit PC board.

5

Does the radiator fin temperature thermistor malfunction?

YES

Disconnect the connector from

X111A on inverter PC board, then check the thermistor resistance at the ordinary temperature.

NO

Probe other factors than the malfunction.

Normal? (*)

YES

Is reset possible?

YES

Reset

NO

NO

* Replace the inverter PC board (A2P) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1



* Replace the inverter PC board (A2P) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1



Caution

3–90



3.20

“

PJ” Capacity Setting Error


PJ


Check whether set value written in E

2

PROM (at factory) or set value of capacity setting adaptor (for replacement) is the same as compressor compartment capacity.


When the set value on E

2

PROM differs from the compressor compartment capacity or a capacity setting adaptor except for PC board applicable models is installed. (Malfunction decision is made only when turning the power supply on.)

1

Supposed causes

■

■

■

Improper set value of E

2

PROM

Improper capacity setting adaptor


Troubleshooting

4

Is the capacity setting adapter (CN26) connected to compressor compartment PC board? (*)

NO

YES

Make sure that the combination of connected capacity setting adapter

(CN26) is correct.

Connect the adapter for the applicable model.

If incorrect, correct the combination.

5

(*) Capacity setting adapter is not connected at factory. (Capacity is written in E²PROM.) Capacity setting adapter is required only when the PC board was replaced with spare PC board.


Caution


3–91

3 3

4

5

1


3–92


ESIE08-02

4 Error Codes: System Malfunctions


Part 3

1

4.1


Introduction

Overview



Topic

4.2–“U0” Gas Shortage (Malfunction)

4.3–“U2” Abnormal Power Supply Voltage

4.4–“U4”, “UF” Malfunction of Transmission between Compartments

4.5–“UF” Malfunction of Transmission between Compartments or Gas Shortage

4.6–“U5” Malfunction of Transmission between Hydraulic Compartment and

Remote Controller

4.7–“UA” Malfunctioning Field Setting Switch

See page

3–94

3–96

3–99

3–102

3–104

3–105

4

5


3–93

Error Codes: System Malfunctions ESIE08-02

1

4.2

“

U0” Gas Shortage (Malfunction)


U0



Detection based on difference in temperature between temperature preset by remote controller and hydraulic compartment water inlet temperature, motorized valve opening degree, compressor frequency and low pressure.

(In heating operation)

Detection based on difference in temperature between temperature preset by remote controller and hydraulic compartment water inlet temperature, motorized valve opening degree during the control of inlet water superheating, high pressure, HC heat exchanger temperature and HC inlet water temperature.

3 3

4



When compressor frequency does not increase even though the load is heavy because the motorized valve is opened to the fullest extent

[If low pressure drops when the compressor is at 41Hz, malfunction is confirmed.]

(In heating operation)

When suction gas superheat degree is large, compressor frequency is low and the motorized valve is opened to the fullest extent even though heating load is heavy

[If high pressure is lower than saturated pressure for indoor heat exchanger temperature (or indoor suction air temperature), malfunction is confirmed.]

5

Supposed causes

■

■

■

Refrigerant shortage (out of gas)

Clogged refrigerant piping system

Mismatching of wiring and piping

3–94


ESIE08-02 Error Codes: System Malfunctions

Troubleshooting

Collect refrigerant and recharge a proper amount of refrigerant after vacuum drying.

1

Check for refrigerant shortage. (*1)

Is the refrigerant level proper?

YES

Check the wiring and piping between the compartments.

NO

Is wiring and piping connection matched?

YES

NO

Match wiring and piping connection.

Check the refrigerant piping system for clogging. (*2)

4

See also:

■

■

(*1) "Check No.12 - Check for Inadequate Refrigerant" on page 3-120.

(*2) "Check No.8 - Clogged Points" on page 3-116.


5

Caution


3–95


1

4.3

“

U2” Abnormal Power Supply Voltage


U2


Malfunction is detected according to the voltage of main circuit capacitor built in the inverter and power supply voltage.

3 3


When the voltage of main circuit capacitor built in the inverter and power supply voltage drop:

■ for V3 only: 150-170 VAC or when the power failure of several tens of ms or longer is generated or DC voltage is not in range of 305~380 VDC.

■ for W1 only: 300-320 VAC or when the power failure of several tens of ms or longer is generated or DC voltage is not in scope of 508~620 VDC.

* Remote controller does not decide the abnormality.

4 Supposed causes

5

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Drop in power supply voltage (180 V or less)

Instantaneous power failure

Inverter open phase (Phase T)

Faulty main circuit wiring


Main circuit parts damaged

Faulty fan motor

3–96



Troubleshooting

1

Check LED on compressor compartment PCB (is

LED blinking)

NO

YES

Is the power supply within limits? (*1)

NO

YES

Is the wiring correct?

(*2)

YES

Check the inverter power transistor.

NO

Other factors.

Field factors.

Correct the wiring.

Is the power transistor faulty? (*3)

NO

YES

Replace the inverter PCB (A1P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

! Check for the PCB conditions. In case of significant failure, the PCB may have got faulty due to faulty compressor. Consequently, even if the PCB is replaced, it may get faulty again. To avoid that,recheck the compressor for grounding and for any broken wires. Furthermore, even after replacing the PCB, carry out inspections on the compressor

.


Is the fan motor resistance correct ?(*4)

YES

When the compressor is running, measure the voltage between + and

- of the electrolytic capacitor (C+,

C-).

NO

Is the measured voltage

220 VDC or more?

NO


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3


E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

YES

Monitor the voltage for instantanious voltage drop.

(*1): Power supply check

■ For E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 (Single phase models):

Is the power supply voltage between 220~240VAC ± 10% (50Hz).

■ For E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 (Three phase models):

Are the power supply voltages between L1 and L2, L2 and L3, L1 and L3 within 380~415VAC

± 10% and between L1 and N within the range of 220~240VAC ± 10% (50Hz).

4

5


3–97

1

3 3


Caution

ESIE08-02

■

■

■

(*2): Wiring check:

Check the several connections according to the wiring diagrams on page 1-68 and following.

V3/W1: Reactor coil resistance value ±0.2~1 Ohm.

V3: Check if capacitor C4 is correctly connected. GREY cable is connected at the side of the grey stroke on the capacitor.

■ W1: Confirm the conditions of F1U & F2U.

(*3): Power transistor check:

■

Refer to "Check No.11 - Check for Power Transistor" on page 3-119.

(*4): Check fan motor resistance:

■

Refer to "Check No.9 - Fan Motor Signal Line" on page 3-117.

■

■

Be sure to turn of power switch before connect or disconnect connector, or parts damage may occur.

When replacing inverter PCB, check for the PCB conditions. In case of significant failure, the PCB may have got faulty due to faulty compressor. Consequently, even if the PCB is replaced, it may get faulty again. To avoid that, recheck the compressor for grounding and for any broken wires.

Furthermore, even after replacing the PCB, carry out inspections on the compressor.

4

5

3–98



4.4

“

U4”, “UF” Malfunction of Transmission between Compartments


U4

or

UF

Error generation

The error is generated when the microprocessor detects that the transmission between the compartments is not normal over a certain amount of time.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■

The possible causes are:

Wiring transmission wire between compartments is incorrect

Malfunctioning hydraulic compartment PCB

Malfunctioning compressor compartment PCB

Outside cause (noise...).

1

4

5


3–99


1

Troubleshooting

3 3

4

5

Diagnosis of incorrect or broken/disconnected wiring. If the LEDs on the hydraulic compartment PC board are off, it indicates that the transmission wiring between compartments may be incorrect or broken/disconnected.

Is the power supply voltage between 180 and 220

VAC?

YES

NO

Field factor.

Is there miswiring, a wrong wire type, loose terminal or contact failure in the inter-compartment wiring? (*)

YES

Wire correctly and securely fasten the terminal screws.

Replace fuse. Use only specified fuses.

NO

Is

HAP on the compressor compartment PC board blinking?

NO

YES

Turn OFF the power supply and disconnect the connector of the outdoor fan motor. Then power ON again.

B

Is

HAP blinking?

(Compressor compartment PC board)

NO

YES

A


(*) E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

Does the fuse F3U on the communicator PC board (A4P) have No continuity?

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

Does the fuse F6U on the control PC board (A1P) have No continuity?

3–100




Replace the fuse. Use only specified fuses.

1

A

YES

Check the resistance value of the fan motor.


YES

NO

Does the fuse have continuity? (*)

YES

Check the fan output voltage. (*)

NO

B

Is the output voltage normal?

YES

After turning OFF the power supply, correctly insert the connector of the fan motor and then restore the power.

YES

NO

YES

Does "U4" malfunction reoccur?

NO

*

Replace the PC board (A1P)

*

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3



Replace the PC board (A1P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

After turning OFF the power supply, correctly insert the connector of the fan motor and then restore the power.

Does malfunction "U4" or "UF" reoccur?

NO

YES

(*) FUSE Conductive

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

F6U

F7U

(*) See also "Check No.10 - Fan Speed Pulse" on page 3-118.

Replace the hydraulic compartment PC board.


An external factor (noise, etc.) other than unit failure may be the cause.


4

5

Caution


3–101


1

4.5

“

UF” Malfunction of Transmission between Compartments or Gas Shortage


UF


■

■

Check the transmission between the compartments with a microcomputer when the power turned

ON.

Detect by checking the following temperature differences during compressor operation.

A: Difference in temperature detected by the indoor liquid thermistor (R3T) and the water inlet thermistor (R1T)

B: Difference in evaporation temperature (Te) (or condensation temperature (Tc) during heating operation) detected by the water heat exchanger thermistor (R2T) and the compressor sensor

3 3

4


■

■

When the wiring between compartments is incorrect.

When the following conditions continue for 20 minutes during compressor operation.

A: R2T – R1T < 4ºC, and

B: R2T – Te (or Tc during heating operation) > 14ºC (24ºC during heating operation)

5

Supposed causes

■

■

■

Faulty wiring between compartments

Refrigerant shortage (out of gas)

Clogged refrigerant piping system

Troubleshooting

Does "UF" appear when the power is turned ON?

YES

The phase of wiring between compartments is incorrect.

NO

Is the connection of wiring and piping between compartments correct?

NO

Correctly connect wiring between compartments.

Match the connection of the wiring and piping between compartments.

YES

Is the refrigerant level proper? (*1)

NO

YES

Recharge a proper amount of refrigerant after refrigerant collection and vacuum drying.

Check the refrigerant piping a system for clogging. (*2)

3–102



■

■

See also:

(*1) "Check No.12 - Check for Inadequate Refrigerant" on page 3-120.

(*2) "Check No.8 - Clogged Points" on page 3-116.


1

Caution

4

5


3–103


1

4.6

“

U5” Malfunction of Transmission between Hydraulic Compartment and Remote

Controller


U5


The error is generated when the microprocessor detects that the transmission between the hydraulic compartment and the remote controller is not normal over a certain amount of time.

3 3

Supposed causes

■

■

■


Malfunctioning remote controller

Malfunctioning hydraulic compartment PCB

Outside cause (noise...)

Troubleshooting

4

Hydraulic compartment unit

PCB microcomputer normal monitor flashing

NO

YES

Resets normally when power supply is turned off temporarily.

NO

YES

Hydraulic compartment PC board replacement.

Malfunction could be produced by noise.

Check the surrounding area and restart operation.

5

Is "U5" displayed constantly?

NO

YES

Failure of remote controller

PC board or replacement hydraulic compartment PC board.

Problem could be caused by external factor (noise etc.) other than malfunction.

Caution


3–104



4.7

“

UA” Malfunctioning Field Setting Switch


UA


The error is generated when incorrect combination is made or no compressor module is connected.

Supposed causes

■

■

■

■


Malfunctioning hydraulic compartment or compressor compartment PCB

Malfunctioning power supply PCB

Malfunctioning remote controller wiring

Transmission wiring between compartments

Caution


1

4

5


3–105

3 3

4

5

1


3–106


ESIE08-02 Additional Checks for Troubleshooting

Part 3

1

5 Additional Checks for Troubleshooting

5.1


Introduction

Overview

This chapter explains how you must check the units to carry out troubleshooting correctly.


Topic

5.2–Check No.1 - Checking the Installation Condition

5.3–Check No.2 - Checking the Expansion Valve

5.4–Check No.3 - Checking the Thermistors

5.5–Check No.4 - Resistance Conversion Table (Ambient, Coil, Fin)

5.6–Check No.5 - Resistance Conversion Table (Discharge Pipe Sensor)

5.7–Check No.6 - Evaluation of Abnormal High Pressure

5.8–Check No.7 - Evaluation of Abnormal Low Pressure

5.9–Check No.8 - Clogged Points

5.10–Check No.9 - Fan Motor Signal Line

5.11–Check No.10 - Fan Speed Pulse

5.12–Check No.11 - Check for Power Transistor

5.13–Check No.12 - Check for Inadequate Refrigerant

5.14–Check No.13 - Check for Excessive Refrigerant Charging

5.15–Check No.14 - Check for Factors Causing Wet Operation

5.16–Check No.15 - Tank Thermal Protector Actuation Check (Sticking Check)

5.17–Check No.16 - Magnetic Contactor Actuation Check (Sticking Check)

See page

3–116

3–117

3–118

3–119

3–120

3–121

3–122

3–123

3–125

3–108

3–109

3–110

3–111

3–113

3–114

3–115

4

5


3–107

3 3

4

5


1

5.2

Check No.1 - Checking the Installation Condition

Check No.01

.

1

To check the installation condition, proceed as follows:

Check the spaces for all air passage around the suction and discharge areas.

Is the minimum space rescpected?

No

Change the installation location.

Yes

Does the discharged air from other outdoor units cause an increase of the suction temperature?

Yes

Change the installation location.

Is the heat exchanger clean?

Yes

No

Clean the heat exchanger.

Is there enough air flow?

Yes

Check the outdoor ambient temperature R1T.

This temperature must be lower than 43˚C.

No

Change the installation location or direction.

3–108



5.3

Check No.2 - Checking the Expansion Valve

Checking

To check the electronic expansion valve, proceed as follows:

3

4

Step Action

1

2

Check if the expansion valve connector is correctly inserted in connector X21A of A1P.

Compare the expansion valve unit with the number of the connector to make sure it is correctly connected.

Switch the power OFF.

Switch the power ON to check whether the expansion valve is producing a clicking sound.

If...

The expansion valve has no clicking sound

Then...

Disconnect the valve connector without the clicking sound and proceed to step 5.

1

4 5

6

Check the coil current: Open circuit < normal < short circuit

The table below contains the reference resistance values.

—

White

White

Grey

Black

Yellow

Red

Orange

—

∞

45

ø

∞

45

ø

∞

Grey

∞

—

∞

45

ø

∞

45

ø

Black

45

ø

∞

—

∞

90

ø

∞

Yellow

∞

45

ø

∞

—

∞

90

ø

Red

45

ø

∞

90

ø

∞

—

∞

Check the clicking sound again.

If...

There is a clicking sound

There is no clicking sound

There is still no clicking sound

Then...

The expansion valve works properly.

Replace the expansion valve unit.

Replace outdoor PCB A1P.

Orange

∞

45

ø

∞

90

ø

∞

—

5


3–109

Additional Checks for Troubleshooting ESIE08-02

1

5.4

Check No.3 - Checking the Thermistors

Thermistors

If the cause of the problem is related to the thermistors, then the thermistors should be checked prior to changing the PCB.

■

■

For more information about these thermistors, see:

“Wiring Diagrams” (outdoor units)

"Function of Thermistors" on page 4-4.

3 3

4

5

Overview of thermistors

The table below contains an overview of the thermistors:

Thermistor



R3T

R4T

R5T

R6T

R10T

R7T

R11T

R12T

R13T

R14T

R5T

R1T

R2T

Description

Outlet water after PHE thermistor

Outlet water after BUH thermistor

Refrigerant liquid thermistor


Domestic hot water tank thermistor

Ambient air thermistor



Heat exchanger thermistor

Intermediate heat exchanger thermistor


Power module fin thermistor E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

Power module fin thermistor E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

Checking

To check the thermistors, proceed as follows:

Step Action

1

2

3

Disconnect the thermistor from the PCB.

Read the temperature and the resistor value.

Check if the measured values correspond with the values in the table on the next pages.

3–110



5.5

Check No.4 - Resistance Conversion Table (Ambient, Coil, Fin)

Temperature – resistance

The table below is the thermistor (


: water inlet, Coil / Outdoor: Ambient,

Coil, Pipe without discharge, Fin) temperature – resistance conversion table

.

Temp.

(°C)

A (k

Ω)

B (k

Ω)

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

10

15

16

17

18

19

11

12

13

14

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

-9

-8

-7

-6

0

-20 197.81

192.08

-15

-14

-13

-12

-11

-19

-18

-17

-16

186.53

175.97

166.07

156.80

148.10

139.94

132.28

125.09

118.34

-10 111.99

108.96

181.16

170.94

161.36

152.38

143.96

136.05

128.63

121.66

115.12

106.03

100.41

95.14

90.17

85.49

81.08

76.93

73.01

69.32

65.84

103.18

97.73

92.61

87.79

83.25

78.97

74.94

71.14

67.56

64.17

62.54

59.43

56.49

53.71

51.09

48.61

46.26

44.05

41.95

39.96

38.08

36.30

34.62

33.02

31.50

30.06

28.70

27.41

26.18

60.96

57.94

55.08

52.38

49.83

47.42

45.14

42.98

40.94

39.01

37.18

35.45

33.81

32.25

30.77

29.37

28.05

26.78

25.59

Temp.

(°C)

45

46

47

48

49

41

42

43

44

50

55

56

57

58

59

51

52

53

54

35

36

37

38

39

31

32

33

34

40

20

25

26

27

28

29

21

22

23

24

30

A (k

Ω)

B (k

Ω)

10.21

9.81

9.42

9.06

8.71

8.37

8.05

7.75

7.46

7.18

6.91

6.65

6.41

6.65

6.41

6.18

5.95

5.74

5.14

15.43

14.79

14.18

13.59

13.04

12.51

12.01

11.52

11.06

10.63

25.01

23.91

22.85

21.85

20.90

20.00

19.14

18.32

17.54

16.80

16.10

10.00

9.61

9.24

8.88

8.54

8.21

7.90

7.60

7.31

7.04

6.78

6.53

6.53

6.53

6.29

6.06

5.84

5.43

5.05

15.10

14.48

13.88

13.31

12.77

12.25

11.76

11.29

10.84

10.41

24.45

23.37

22.35

21.37

20.45

19.56

18.73

17.93

17.17

16.45

15.76

Temp.

(°C)

75

76

77

78

79

71

72

73

74

80

60

65

66

67

68

69

61

62

63

64

70

A (k

Ω)

B (k

Ω)

3.38

3.27

3.16

3.06

2.96

2.86

2.77

2.68

2.60

2.51

4.96

4.79

4.62

4.46

4.30

4.16

4.01

3.88

3.75

3.62

3.50

3.32

3.21

3.11

3.01

2.91

2.82

2.72

2.64

2.55

2.47

4.87

4.70

4.54

4.38

4.23

4.08

3.94

3.81

3.68

3.56

3.44

—

Applicable sensors

A:

Ambient, Coil, Pipe without discharge

B: Fin

1

4

5


3–111


1

Thermistor resistance check

3 3

4

5

Remove the connectors of the thermistors on the PCB, and measure the resistance of each thermistor using tester.

The relationship between normal temperature and resistance is shown in the graph and the table below:

-20

-15

-10

15

20

25

30

-5

0

5

10

35

40

45

50

Hydraulic compartment

3SA48002

R25°C=20 k

Ω

B=3990

197.8 k

Ω

148.2 k

Ω

112.0 k

Ω

85.52 k

Ω

65.84 k

Ω

51.05 k

Ω

39.91 k

Ω

31.44 k

Ω

24.95 k

Ω

19.94 k

Ω

16.04 k

Ω

12.99 k

Ω

10.58 k

Ω

8.669 k

Ω

7.143 k

Ω

Tank thermistor

3SA48009

R120=7.13 k

Ω

B=4177

2534 k

Ω

1877 k

Ω

1404 k

Ω

1059 k

Ω

806.5 k

Ω

618.9 k

Ω

478.8 k

Ω

373.1 k

Ω

292.9 k

Ω

231.4 k

Ω

184.1 k

Ω

147.4 k

Ω

118.7 k

Ω

96.13 k

Ω

78.29 k

Ω

3–112



5.6

Check No.5 - Resistance Conversion Table (Discharge Pipe Sensor)

Temperature – resistance

The table below is the discharge pipe thermistor temperature – resistance conversion table

.

22.0

24.0

26.0

28.0

266.3

242.5

221.0

201.6

30.0

184.1

32.0

34.0

36.0

38.0

168.3

154.0

141.0

129.3

40.0

118.7

42.0

44.0

46.0

48.0

109.0

100.2

92.2

84.9

50.0

78.3

52.0

54.0

56.0

48.0

72.2

66.7

61.6

57.0

Temp.

(°C)

Resist.

(k

Ω)

— —

—

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

—

1120.0

1002.5

898.6

0.0

806.5

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

724.8

652.2

587.6

530.1

10.0

478.8

12.0

14.0

16.0

18.0

432.9

392.0

355.3

322.4

20.0

292.9

92.0

94.0

96.0

98.0

16.9

15.8

14.8

13.9

100.0

13.1

102.0

104.0

106.0

108.0

110.0

9.6

12.3

11.5

10.8

10.2

112.0

114.0

116.0

118.0

120.0

7.1

9.0

8.5

8.0

7.6

122.0

124.0

126.0

128.0

6.7

6.4

6.0

5.7

Temp.

(°C)

Resist.

(k

Ω)

60.0

52.8

62.0

64.0

66.0

68.0

48.9

45.3

42.0

39.0

70.0

36.3

72.0

74.0

76.0

78.0

33.7

31.4

29.2

27.2

80.0

25.4

82.0

—

—

—

— —

23.7

—

—

—

Temp.

(°C)

Resist.

(k

Ω)

130.0

5.4

132.0

134.0

136.0

138.0

140.0

4.1

5.4

4.8

4.6

4.3

142.0

144.0

146.0

148.0

150.0

3.2

3.9

3.7

3.5

3.3

152.0

154.0

156.0

158.0

160.0

2.5

3.0

2.9

2.7

2.6

162.0

164.0

166.0

168.0

170.0

1.9

2.3

2.5

2.1

2.0

172.0

174.0

176.0

178.0

180.0

1.5

1.9

1.8

1.7

1.6

—

1

4

5


3–113


1

5.7

Check No.6 - Evaluation of Abnormal High Pressure

Abnormally high pressure level is mostly caused by the condenser side. The following contents are provided by service engineer based on their field checks. Further, the number is listed in the order of degree of influence.

In cooling operation

3 3

4

5

Check items (Possible causes) Judgment

Does the fan run normally? Visual inspection

Is the compressor compartment heat exchanger clogged?

Visual inspection

Is there clogging before or after the EV

(capillary)?

Is the check valve clogged?

*Heat pump model only

Check if there is a temperature difference before and after EV (capillary).

Check if the main valve unit of EV operates (by noise, vibration).

Check if there is a temperature difference before and after check valve.

→ If YES, the check valve is caught.

Check continuity by using a tester.

Is the HPS normal?

Is the outdoor unit installed under such conditions that short circuit easily occurs?

Visual inspection

Is the piping length 5 meters or less?

Does air enter the refrigerant system?

Is the refrigerant overcharged?

Visual inspection

Conduct refrigerant collection and vacuum drying, and then add proper amount refrigerant.


In heating operation

Check items (Possible causes)

Is the hydraulic compartment heat exchanger clogged?


(capillary)?


Is the HPS normal?

Is the piping length 5 meters or less?

Does air enter the refrigerant system?

Is the refrigerant overcharged?

Judgment

Visual inspection (endoscopic inspection may be needed)





Check continuity using a tester.

Visual inspection



3–114



5.8

Check No.7 - Evaluation of Abnormal Low Pressure

1

Abnormally low pressure level is mostly caused by the evaporator side. The following contents are provided based on field checking of service engineer. Further, the number is listed in the order of degree of influence.




Does the fan run normally?

Is the hydraulic compartment filter clogged?


(capillary)?


*Heat pump model only

Is the LPS normal?

Is the water circuit installed under such conditions that short circuit easily occurs?

Is the refrigerant gas short?

Judgment

Visual inspection

Visual inspection






Visual inspection


4

5


Does the outdoor unit fan run normally?

Is the outdoor unit heat exchanger clogged?

Is the unit installed under such conditions that air short circuit easily occurs?


(capillary)?


Is the LPS normal?

Is the refrigerant gas short?

Judgment

Visual inspection

Visual inspection

Visual inspection








3–115

5


1

5.9

Check No.8 - Clogged Points

Temperature differences must occur before or after the clogged points!

1

6

3

4 5

3 3

Hydraulic

Compartment

2

RAC COMP

Compressor

Compartment

4

Check points

1

2

3

4

5

6

Around expansion mechanism

Accumulator

Field piping

Stop valve

Water heat exchanger

Check factor Causes

Temperature difference

Frosting difference

■

■

■

Dust

Choked moisture

Reduced effective pipe diameter due to adherent contamination, etc.

■

Choked moisture

■

■

Dust

Choked moisture

Reduced effective pipe diameter due to adherent contamination, etc.

■

Collapsed pipe

Remedies

Replace the expansion valve.

Blow a nitrogen gas, and then replace the refrigerant.

Replace the heat exchanger or distributor.

Replace the pipe.




■

■

The stop valve is not fully open.

Contamination from water.

Open the stop valve fully.

Clean or replace heat exchanger.

3–116



5.10

Check No.9 - Fan Motor Signal Line

1

Turn the power supply off.

2

With the fan motor connector disconnected, measure the resistance between each pin, then make sure that the resistance is more than the value mentioned in the following table.

1

1 White

2 Orange

GND

3 Brown

4 Blue

5

6

7 Red

(S2675)

Measurement point

1 - 4

2 - 4

3 - 4

4 - 7

Judgment

1M

Ω or more

100k

Ω or more

100

Ω or more

100k

Ω or more

4

5


3–117


1

5.11

Check No.10 - Fan Speed Pulse

3 3

4

1

Disconnect the connector X106A with the power supply OFF and Operation OFF.

2

Is the voltage between pins 4 and 3 of X106A about 15 VDC after turning the power supply on?

3

Is the voltage between pins 4 and 1 of X106A about 5 VDC?

4

Connect the connector X106A with the power supply OFF and Operation OFF.

5

When making one turn of the upper fan motor by hand after turning the power supply on, is a pulse

(0 and 5 V) generated 4 times between pins 4 and 1 of X106A? (Measure at the contact terminal on the harness side with the connector connected.)

6

Disconnect the connector X107A with the power supply OFF and Operation OFF.

7

Is the voltage between pins 4 and 3 of X107A about 15 VDC after turning the power supply on?

8

Is the voltage between pins 4 and 1 of X107A about 5 VDC?

9

Connect the connector X107A with the power supply OFF and Operation OFF.

10 When making one turn of the lower fan motor by hand after turning the power supply on, is a pulse

(0 and 5 V) generated 4 times between pins 4 and 1 of X107A?

(2) (7): NO

→ Faulty PC board → Replace the PC board.

(3) (8): NO

→ Faulty PC board → Replace the PC board.

(5)(10): NO

→ Faulty hall IC → Replace the DC fan motor.

(2) (3) (5) (7) (8) (10): YES

→ Replace the PC board.

5

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

NC

NC

Fan speed pulse input (0V and 5V)

0V

15V

GND

250~350V(during operation)

(S2679)

3–118



5.12

Check No.11 - Check for Power Transistor

Judgment according to the continuity check by using an analog tester:

1

Do not touch the charged area (high voltage) for 10 minutes after turning the power supply off.

2

If you must touch such an area, make sure that the power supply voltage of power transistor is 50 V or less.

3

Disconnect the connector of the outdoor unit fan motor.

When the outdoor unit fan is rotating against a strong wind, the condenser is charged and electric shock may result. Therefore, disconnect the connector from the outdoor unit fan motor after confirming that the outdoor unit fan has stopped.

4

Before measuring the continuity, disconnect the connection between compressor and power transistor.

5

Measure the continuity in the following procedure.

[Judgment] Normal if the continuity check results in the following.

1

Power transistor

(on inverter PC board)

4

P — U

P — V

P — W

U — P

V — P

W — P

Continuity

Continuity

Continuity

∞

∞

∞

*

U — P

V — P

W — P

P — U

P — V

P — W

∞

∞

∞

Continuity

Continuity

Continuity

*

(S2678)

*

If there is continuity, the resistance should be the same as each phase.

*

If a digital tester is used for the measurement of continuity,

∞ and continuity may be reversed.

5


3–119


1

5.13

Check No.12 - Check for Inadequate Refrigerant

3 3

4

5

As criteria for judging whether refrigerant is inadequate or not, refer to the following operating conditions.

<Diagnosis of inadequate refrigerant>


1

As suction superheat degree increases due to gas shortage, the electronic expansion valve tends to open (opens fully) in order to avoid overheat operation.

2

In response to decreased evaporator capacity caused by gas shortage, capacity is controlled in the inverter in order to maintain low pressure, which results in a decrease in frequency.

3

Because of (1) and (2) above, the compressor frequency decreases despite a large difference

(large load) between temperature set by the remote controller and indoor suction temperature, resulting that cooling capacity becomes unavailable.

4

If gas shortage worsens, the electronic expansion valve remains fully open and suction superheat degree further increases. In addition, because the compressor frequency drops to the level of the lowest frequency (52 Hz) and the refrigerant flow rate decrease, low pressure cannot be maintained.

<Diagnosis of inadequate refrigerant>


1

As suction superheat degree increases due to gas shortage, the electronic expansion valve tends to open (opens fully) to avoid overheat operation.

2

As suction superheat degree increases due to gas shortage, compressor frequency decreases because suction superheat degree is controlled in order to prevent oil to the outdoor heat exchanger from being retained.

3

Because of (1) and (2) above, evaporator capacity and compressor frequency decrease despite a large difference (large load) between temperature set by the remote controller and indoor suction temperature, resulting that high pressure cannot be maintained and heating capacity becomes unavailable. Also a decrease in evaporator capacity frequently puts the system in defrost operation.

4

If gas shortage worsens, high pressure becomes smaller than saturated pressure equivalent to indoor heat exchanger temperature (or indoor suction temperature).

3–120



5.14

Check No.13 - Check for Excessive Refrigerant Charging

As criteria for judging whether refrigerant is excessively charged or not, refer to the following operating conditions.

<Diagnosis of excessive refrigerant charging>


1

Because high pressure rises due to excessive charging, overload control is carried out and capacity tends to run short.

2

Considering pressure load, compressor discharge pipe temperature is low.

3

Subcooled degree of condensate liquid becomes large. Therefore, temperature of blown air passing through subcooled part decreases in heating operation.

1

4

5


3–121


1

5.15

Check No.14 - Check for Factors Causing Wet Operation

3 3

4

5

Wet operation

Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, identify the faulty points.

Faulty crankcase heater

Refrigerant dwelling

Frequent starts and stops of the compressor

Excessive refrigerant charging

→

Faulty superheat degree control

Faulty electronic expansion valve

Faulty control

Faulty valve coil

Faulty valve body

Faulty low pressure sensor

Faulty suction pipe thermistor

Faulty control PC board

→

Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?

→

→

Are the voltage characteristics normal?

→

Is the connector properly connected?

Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?

Is the pressure value checked with the

Service Checker corresponding to the measurement of the sensor?

Dirty evaporator

→

Is the heat exchanger clogged?

Decreased evaporation capacity

Faulty fan motor

→

Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?

Are the motor coil resistance and insulation normal?

Decreased fan airflow rate

Decreased fan output

Faulty control PC board

(including capacity setting)

Note

Reference values for superheat degree to be used in the judgement of wet operation:

1

Suction pipe superheat degree: 4°C or more

2

Discharge pipe superheat degree: 5°C or less

(The values above must be used only for reference purposes. Even it is operated within the range above, operation may be normal in other conditions)

3–122



5.16

Check No.15 - Tank Thermal Protector Actuation Check (Sticking Check)

Check No. 16

Conduct the following to check the thermal protector.

1

Turn off the heater power supply breaker. (Earth leakage circuit breaker)

2

Check if the red buttons are popped up.

3

If the red buttons are popped up, push them as they originally were.

4

Check the continuity by a tester on the terminal strip of switch box as the table below.

5

“Continuity” = normal condition.

Q2L

Q3L

EKSWW*

1-2

3-4

EKSWWU*

1-2

3-4

1-2

3-4

EKHWS*

1-2

3-4

1-2

3-4

EKHWE*

11-12

21-22

31-32

31-32

■ EKSWW*

1

1 3

40A,120-277VAC

25A, 480VAC

T-0-D

T

RE

SET

R ESE

2

125VA, PT.DTY

120-480 VAC

4

4

1

4

5

2

THERM-O-DISC

150

F

(66

C)

125 F (52 C)

90

(32

F

C)

59T

400V 230V


3–123

1

Additional Checks for Troubleshooting

■ EKSWWU*, EKHWS*

X6M

1

1

Q2L

3

RESET

2

91

4

C

Q2T

3 3

E4H

4

230V

■ EKHWE*

5

1

1

Q3L

3

RESET

2

85

4

C

Q3T

2

X8M

ESIE08-02

1

1 3

40A,120-277VAC

25A, 480VAC

T-0-D

T

RE

SET

R ESE

2

125VA, PT.DTY

120-480 VAC

4

4

2

THERM-O-DISC

150 F

(66

C)

125 F (52 C)

90 F

(32

C)

59T

11 21 31

14

12

24 34

22 32


3–124


5.17

Check No.16 - Magnetic Contactor Actuation Check (Sticking Check)

Check No.17

Conduct the following to check the magnetic contactor.

1

Turn off the heater power supply breaker (Earth leakage circuit breaker).

2

Check the continuity of terminals of each magnetic contactor on top and bottom (3 positions on each side) of the magnetic contactor by a tester.

3

“No continuity” = normal condition.

1

4

5


3–125

3 3

4

5

1


3–126


ESIE08-02



Chapter

1–Pre-Test Run Checks

2–Field settings

3–Test Run and Operation Data

Part 4

Commissioning and

Test Run

4

3

See page

4–3

4–9

4–41

5

Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–1

ESIE08-02

1

3

4

5

4–2 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run

ESIE08-02

1 Pre-Test Run Checks

1.1


Introduction

Overview


■

■

Checks before test run

Test run checks


Topic

1.2–Checks before Test Run

1.3–Test Run Operation (Manual)

Pre-Test Run Checks

Part 4

1

3

See page

4–4

4–7

4

5

Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run

4–3

ESIE08-02 Pre-Test Run Checks

1

1.2

Checks before Test Run

Introduction

This chapter will show an overview of all checks before test run.

Content

3

Topic

1.2.1–General procedure

1.2.2–Initial Start-up at Low Outdoor Ambient Temperatures

1.2.3–Checks before Initial Start-up

1.2.4–Powering up the monobloc unit

1.2.5–MINIMUM water volume in the installation

4

5

1.2.1

General procedure

Before carrying out a test run, proceed as follows:

Step Action

1

2

■

■

Make sure the voltage at the primary side of the safety breaker is:

230 V ± 10% for 1-phase units

400 V ± 10% for 3-phase units

Fully open the liquid and the gas stop valve.

See page

4–4

4–4

4–5

4–6

4–6

1.2.2

Initial Start-up at Low Outdoor Ambient Temperatures

Unit with optional backup heater

During initial start-up or after a long period of standstill, and when water temperature is low, it is important that the water is heated gradually. Failure to do so may result in cracking of concrete floors due to rapid temperature change.

To do so, the lowest leaving water set temperature can be decreased to a value between 15°C and

25°C by adjusting the field setting [9-01] "heating set point lower limit". Refer to ‘‘Field settings” on page 4-9

Note

Heating between 15°C and 25°C is performed by the backup heater only. This feature is not available on units without a backup heater.

4–4



1.2.3

Checks before Initial Start-up

Warning!

Procedure

1

Turn off the power supply before making any connections.

After the installation of the unit, check the following before switching on the circuit breaker:

1

Field wiring

Make sure that the field wiring between local supply panel and monobloc unit, hydraulic compartment and valves (when applicable), hydraulic compartment and room thermostat (when applicable), and hydraulic compartment and domestic hot water tank has been carried out

according to the instructions described in the chapter ‘‘Field settings” on page 4-9, according to the

wiring diagrams and according to European and national regulations.

2

Fuses or protection devices

Check that the fuses or the locally installed protection devices are of the size and type specified in the chapter "Technical specifications" on page 27. Make sure that neither a fuse nor a protection device has been bypassed.

3

Booster heater circuit breaker F2B

Do not forget to turn on the booster heater circuit breaker F2B in the switch box (applies only to units with optional domestic hot water tank installed).

4

Earth wiring

Make sure that the earth wires have been connected properly and that the earth terminals are tightened.

5

Internal wiring

Visually check the switch box on loose connections or damaged electrical components.

6

Fixation

Check that the unit is properly fixed, to avoid abnormal noises and vibrations when starting up the unit.

7

Damaged equipment

Check the inside of the unit on damaged components or squeezed pipes.

8

Refrigerant leak

Check the inside of the unit on refrigerant leakage. If there is a refrigerant leak, call your local

Daikin dealer.

9

Power supply voltage

Check the power supply voltage on the local supply panel. The voltage must correspond to the voltage on the identification label of the unit.

10 Air purge valve

Make sure the air purge valve is open (at least 2 turns).

11 Pressure relief valve

Check if the backup heater vessel is completely filled with water by operating the pressure relief valve. It should purge water instead of air (applies only to units with optional backup heater installed).

Caution! Operating the system with the backup heater vessel not completely filled with water will damage the backup heater!

12 Shut-off valves

Make sure that the shut-off valves are correctly installed and fully open.

Caution! Operating the system with closed valves will damage the pump!

3

4

5


4–5

Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE08-02

1

1.2.4

Powering up the monobloc unit

When power supply to the monobloc unit is turned on, "88" is displayed on the user interface during its initialisation, which might take up to 30 seconds. During this process the user interface cannot be operated.

3

1.2.5

MINIMUM water volume in the installation

In order to secure the correct operation of the heat pump in all conditions, the minimum water volume in the installation should be 20l (°).

Caution!

The minimum water volume of the system is the available water volume in the most critical situation.

■ The most critical situation in this type of installation is in case all valves are closed. Available water volume is only field piping volume.

4

5

■ In this type of installation, the minimum water volume is equal to the total system water volume.

4–6

(°): The minimum water volume of 20l is excluding the internal water volume of hydraulic compartment.



1.3

Procedure

Notes

Test Run Operation (Manual)

1

If required, the installer can perform a manual test run operation at any time to check correct operation of cooling, heating and domestic water heating.

1

Push the z

button 4 times so the t icon will be displayed.

2

Depending on the hydraulic compartment model, heating operation, cooling operation or both must be tested as follows (when no action is performed, the user interface will return to normal mode after 10 seconds or by pressing the z button once):

■ To test the heating operation push the h

/ c

button so the h

icon is displayed. To start the test run operation press the y

button.

■ To test the cooling operation push the h

/ c

button so the c

icon is displayed. To start the test run operation press the y

button.

■ To test the domestic operation push the v

button. The test run operation will start without pressing the y

button.

3

The test run operation will end automatically after 30 minutes or when reaching the set temperature. The test run operation can be stopped manually by pressing the z

button once. If there are misconnections or malfunctions, an error code will be displayed on the user interface.

Otherwise, the user interface will return to normal operation.

4

To resolve the error codes, see “Part 3–Troubleshooting”.

3

4

■

■

To display the last resolved error code, push the z

button 1 time. Push the z

button again 4 times to return to normal mode.

It is not possible to test run if a forced operation from the compressor compartment is in progress.

Should forced operation be started during a test run, the test run will be aborted.

5


4–7

3

4

5

1

Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE08-02

4–8


ESIE08-02

2 Field settings

2.1


Introduction

Overview


■

■

■

How to change the field settings

Overview of the field settings

Field settings by Dip Switches


Topic

2.2–Operation of the User interface Inspection / Test Operation Button

2.3–Overview of the Field Settings of the Hydraulic Compartment

2.4–Overview of the Field Setting on the Compressor Compartment

Field settings

Part 4

1

3

See page

4–10

4–11

4–34

4

5


4–9

Field settings

1

2.2

Operation of the User interface Inspection / Test Operation Button

Normal display (No display)

Inspection/test operation

Push the button.

Unit 0

Malfunction code L 0

Inspection

Malfunction code blinks when a malfunction occurs.

3

4

Unit 0

Malfunction code L 0

Inspection

Inspection mode


Push the button.

Indoor unit capacity code

Display

0b2

0E0

0-0

Capacity classification

011

014

016

Indoor unit code

Display

072

System classification

Hydro - box ALTHERMA

5

072

Indoor unit model code display


Push the button.

ESIE08-02

2 J 6

Outdoor unit model code display


Push the button.

Outdoor capacity code

Display

0b2

0E0

Capacity classification

011

014

016

Outdoor model code

Display

2J6

2A6

Model

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

Test operation

Test operation mode


Push the button.

4–10


ESIE08-02 Field settings

2.3

Overview of the Field Settings of the Hydraulic Compartment

Introduction

Content

This chapter will show an overview of all field settings of the hydraulic compartment.

Topic

2.3.1–Hydraulic Compartment Dipswitch Settings Overview

2.3.2–Hydraulic Compartment User Interface Settings Overview

See page

4–12

4–17

1

3

4

5


4–11

Field settings ESIE08-02

1

2.3.1

Hydraulic Compartment Dipswitch Settings Overview

Start-up and configuration

The hydraulic compartment should be configured by the installer to match the installation environment

(outdoor climate, installed options, etc.) and user expertise.

Caution! It is important that all information in this chapter is read sequentially by the installer and that the system is configured as applicable.

Caution! Switch off the power supply before opening the switch box service panel and making any changes to the DIP switch settings.

3

DIP switch settings overview

DIP switch SS2 is located on the switch box' PCB (See ‘‘Switch Box Layout” on page 1-55.) and allows

configuration of domestic hot water tank installation, room thermostat connection and pump operation.

1 2 3 4

4

5

DIP switch

SS2

Description ON

1

2

3

Not applicable for installer

Domestic hot water tank installation

(See ‘‘Domestic hot water tank installation configuration” on page 4-15.)

Room thermostat connection

(See ‘‘Room thermostat installation configuration” on page 4-13.)

—

Installed

Room thermostat connected

4

This setting

(a)

decides the operation mode when there is a simultaneous demand for more space heating/cooling and domestic water heating.

(a) only applicable in case DIP switch 2 = ON

Heating/cooling

OFF

(Default)

Not installed

(Default)

No room thermostat connected

(Default)

Domestic (Default)

4–12



Room thermostat installation configuration

■ When no room thermostat is connected, toggle switch SS2-3 should be set to OFF.

1 2 3 4

1

■ When a room thermostat is connected, toggle switch SS2-3 should be set to ON.

1 2 3 4

■

■

On the room thermostat, set the hysteresis appropriately to prevent the pump from repeatedly turning on and off (i.e. chattering), and thereby impacting the lifetime of the pump.

Many ice-build up issues are due to the use of a non-Daikin thermostat, which causes problems with the defrost cycle. In order for the defrost timer to operate correctly, the Altherma units have to be operated in cycles of minimum 9 minutes. On a Daikin thermostat this minimum running time is assured with a special setting, which is not always available on non-Daikin thermostats.

3

Settings on Daikin room thermostat

To assure a continuous compressor operation time of 6 minutes, make following settings on Daikin room thermostat. Please refer to the manual of the room thermostat for information on how to change settings.

■

■

■

6r 02: “Use proportional band control” = YES

6r 05: “Minimum “ON” time (heat demand)” = 9 minutes

6r 06: “Minimum delay between 2 heating cycles” = 5 minutes

Notes:

■ When a room thermostat is connected, the heating and cooling schedule timers are never available. Other schedule timers are not affected. For more information on the schedule timers, refer to the operation manual.

■ When a room thermostat is connected, and the y

button or

=

button is pressed, the centralised control indicator e

will flash to indicate that the room thermostat has priority and controls on/off operation and change over operation.

4

5

Room thermostat wiring configuration

■

■

■

The following table summarizes the required configuration and thermostat wiring at the terminal block in the switch box. Pump operation is listed in the third column. The three last columns indicate whether the following functionality is available on the user interface (UI) or handled by the thermostat (T): space heating or cooling on/off ( heating/cooling change over ( y

=

)

) heating and cooling schedule timers ( pr

)

Thermostat

No thermostat

Configuration

SS2-3 = OFF wiring: (non)

X2M

H C L N

1 2 3 4

Pump operation

y determined by leaving water temperature

(a)

UI

=

UI pr

UI


4–13


1

3

Thermostat Configuration

SS2-3 = ON wiring:

X2M

H C L N

1 2 3 4

Heating only thermostat

SS2-3 = ON wiring:

X2M

H C L N

1 2 3 4

Pump operation

on when space heating or cooling is on (y) y

UI on when heating request by room thermostat

T

=

UI pr

UI

— — th

4

5

Thermostat with heating/cooling switch

SS2-3 = ON wiring:

X2M

H C L N

1 2 3 4

H C th on when heating request or cooling request by room thermostat

T T —

Pump operation configuration

4–14 th =

C =

H =

Thermostat contact

Cooling contact

Heating contact

L, N = 230 V AC

(a)

The pump will stop when space heating/cooling is turned off or when the water reaches the desired water temperature as set on the user interface. With space heating/cooling turned on, the pump will then run every 5 minutes during 3 minutes to check the water temperature.

Note: To set the pump speed, refer to ‘‘Setting the pump speed” on page 4-15.

Without room thermostat

When no thermostat is connected, pump operation will be determined by the leaving water temperature.

■

■

To force continuous pump operation when no room thermostat is connected do the following: set toggle switch SS2-3 to ON, short-circuit the terminal numbers 23-17-13 on the terminal block in the switch box.

With room thermostat

When a thermostat is connected, the pump will operate continuously whenever there is heating or cooling demand requested by the thermostat.



■

■

Domestic hot water tank installation configuration

When no domestic hot water tank is installed, toggle switch SS2-2 should be set to OFF (default).

When a domestic hot water tank is installed, toggle switch SS2-2 should be set to ON.

1

Domestic hot water tank installation configuration

When no domestic hot water tank is installed, toggle switch SS2-2 should be set to OFF (default).

1 2 3 4

Setting the pump speed

1 2 3 4

When a domestic hot water tank is installed, toggle switch SS2-2 should be set to ON.

3

The pump speed can be selected on the pump.

The default setting is high speed. If the water flow in the system is too high (e.g., noise of running water in the installation) the speed can be set to low speed.

Note: The speed dial on the pump indicates 3 speed settings. However, only 2 speed settings exist: low speed and high speed. The indicated medium speed setting on the speed dial is equal to low speed.

The available external static pressure (ESP, expressed in mH

2

O) in function of the water flow (l/min) is shown in the graph below.

65

4

60

5

55

40

35

30

25

50

45

20

15

10

5

II

I

0

16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58

Flow [I/min]

I

high speed

II

medium speed

ESP: external static pressure

Flow: waterflow through the unit


4–15

3

4

5


1

Warning!

■

■

Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange in the technical specifications.

Water quality must be according to EN directive EC 98/83 EC.

4–16


ESIE08-02

2.3.2

Hydraulic Compartment User Interface Settings Overview

Field settings table

First code

0

1

2

Second code

Setting name

00

01

02

03

User permission level

00 User permission level

Weather dependent set point

Low ambient temperature (Lo_A)

High ambient temperature (Hi_A)

Set point at low ambient temperature (Lo_TI)

Set point at high ambient temperature (Hi_TI)

Disinfection function

00 Operation interval

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

Default value

3

–10

15

40

25

Range

2/3

–20~5

10~20

25~55

25~55

01

02

Status

Start time

Fri

1 (ON)

23:00

00

01

02

03

04

03

04

Set point

Interval

Auto restart

00 Status

Backup heater operation and space heating off temperature

Status

Priority

Space heating OFF temperature

Booster heater operation

Freeze-up protection function

70

10

0 (ON)

1 (ON)

0 (OFF)

25

1

0 (active)

Read only

02

03

04

Equilibrium temperature and space heating priority temperature

00 Equilibrium temperature status

01 Equilibrium temperature

Space heating priority status

Space heating priority temperatures

Set point correction for domestic hot water temperature

1 (ON)

0

0 (OFF)

0

10

DT for domestic water heating

00 Start

01 Stop

Domestic hot water step length

00 Domestic hot water step length

Domestic water heating mode timer

00

01

Minimum running time

Maximum running time

01

02

03

04

02

03

Anti-recycling time

Booster heater delay time

Cooling and heating set point ranges

00 Heating set point upper limit

Heating set point lower limit

Cooling set point upper limit

Cooling set point lower limit

Overshoot setting

Quiet mode

00

01

Quiet mode type

Parameter 01

5

2

0

5

30

3

20

55

15

22

5

2

0

3

Mon~Sun,

All

0/1

0:00~

23:00

40~80

5~60

0/1

0/1/2

0/1

14~25

0/1

—

0/1

–15~35

0/1

–15~20

0~20

1~20

2~10

0~4

0~20

5~95

0~10

20~95

37~55

15~37

18~22

5~18

1~4

0/2

—

Step

—

1

—

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

5

0.5

5

—

—

1

1

1

—

—

1:00

5

5

—

—

—

1

—

—

1

1

1

1

1


Field settings

1

Unit

—

— hour

°C min

—

—

—

°C

—

—

—

°C

°C

°C

°C

—

°C

—

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C min min hour min

°C

°C

°C

—

—

4–17

3

4

5


1

3

4

5

First code

C

D

E

Second code

Setting name

00

01

02

03

04

Solar priority mode

00 Solar priority mode setting

01 Output logic of the EKRP1H remote alarm input/output PCB

Benefit kWh rate power supply

00

01

Switching off heaters

Unit connection to benefit kWh rate power supply

02 Not applicable. Do not change the default value!

Unit information readout

Software version

EEPROM version

Unit model identification


Inlet water temperature

Default value

0

0

0

0 (OFF)

0

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Range

0/1

0/1

0/1/2/3

0/1/2

—

—

—

—

—

—

Outline

Procedure

Step

1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Unit

—

—

The unit should be configured by the installer to match the installation environment (outdoor climate, installed options, etc.) and user demand. Therefore, a number of so called field settings are available.

These field settings are accessible and programmable through the user interface on the remote controller.

Each field setting is assigned a 3-digit number or code, for example [5-03], which is indicated on the user interface display. The first digit [5] indicates the 'first code' or field setting group. The second and third digit [03] together indicate the 'second code'.

A list of all field settings and default values is given under ‘Field settings table’ on page 4-17.

A detailed description of each field setting is given under ‘Detailed description’ on page 4-19 and

following.

To change one or more field settings, proceed as follows.

—

—

—

°C

°C

—

—

—

3

2

1

4–18

1

Press the z button for a minimum of 5 seconds to enter FIELD SET MODE.

The

$

icon (3) will be displayed. The current selected field setting code is indicated 8-88 (2),


ESIE08-02

Detailed description

Field settings

with the set value displayed to the right -88.8

(1).

2

Press the bgi

button to select the appropriate field setting first code.

3

Press the bgj

button to select the appropriate field setting second code.

4

Press the pfi

button and pfj

button to change the set value of the select field setting.

5

Save the new value by pressing the pr

button.

6

Repeat step 2 through 4 to change other field settings as required.

7

When finished, press the z

button to exit FIELD SET MODE.

■

■

Notes:

■ Changes made to a specific field setting are only stored when the pr

button is pressed. Navigating to a new field setting code or pressing the z

button will discard the change made.

Before shipping, the set values have been set as shown under "Field settings table" on page 23.

When exiting FIELD SET MODE, "88" may be displayed on the user interface LCD while the unit initialises itself.

1

3

[0] User permission level

If required, certain user interface buttons can be made unavailable for the user.

Three permission levels are defined (see the table below). Switching between level 1 and level 2/3 is done by pressing the buttons pfi

and pfj

immediately followed by the buttons s

, ba

for at least 5 seconds (in normal mode). Note that no indication on the user interface is given. When level

2/3 is selected, the actual permission level — either level 2 or level 3 — is determined by the field setting [0-00].

Permission level

Button

Quiet mode button

Weather dependent set point button

Schedule timer enable/disable button

Programming button

Time adjust buttons

Inspection/test operation button s ba pr

< pfi pfj z

1

operable operable operable operable operable operable

2

—

— operable

—

—

—

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

4

5


4–19

1

3

4

5


[1] Weather dependent set point (heating operation only)

■

■

■

The weather dependent set point field settings define the parameters for the weather dependent operation of the unit. When weather dependent operation is active the water temperature is determined automatically depending on the outdoor temperature: colder outdoor temperatures will result in warmer water and vice versa. During weather dependent operation, the user has the possibility to shift up or down the target water temperature by a maximum of 5°C. See the operation manual for more details on weather dependent operation.

[1-00] Low ambient temperature (Lo_A): low outdoor temperature.

[1-01] High ambient temperature (Hi_A): high outdoor temperature.

■

[1-02] Set point at low ambient temperature (Lo_Ti): the target outgoing water temperature when the outdoor temperature equals or drops below the low ambient temperature (Lo_A).

Note that the Lo_Ti value should be higher than Hi_Ti, as for colder outdoor temperatures (i.e.

Lo_A) warmer water is required.

[1-03] Set point at high ambient temperature (Hi_Ti): the target outgoing water temperature when the outdoor temperature equals or rises above the high ambient temperature (Hi_A).

Note that the Hi_Ti value should be lower than Lo_Ti, as for warmer outdoor temperatures (i.e.

Hi_A) less warm water suffices.

T t

Lo_Ti

Hi_Ti

Lo_A Hi_A

Tt

TA

Target water temperature

Ambient (outdoor) temperature

Shift value = Shift value

T

A

+ 05

00

- 05

Shift value

4–20



[2] Disinfection function

Applies only to installations with a domestic hot water tank.

The disinfection function disinfects the domestic hot water tank by periodically heating the domestic water to a specific temperature.

Caution! The disinfection function field settings must be configured by the installer according to national and local regulations.

■

■

■

■

■

[2-00] Operation interval: day(s) of the week at which the domestic water should be heated.

[2-01] Status: defines whether the disinfection function is turned on (1) or off (0).

[2-02] Start time: time of the day at which the domestic water should be heated.

[2-03] Set point: high water temperature to be reached.

[2-04] Interval: time period defining how long the set point temperature should be maintained.

T

SWW

[2-03]

[2-04]

T

H

T

U

1

3

4

T

SWW

T

U

T

H t

00.00

01.00

22.00

23.00

24.00

[2-02] t

Domestic water temperature

User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)

High set point temperature [2-03]

Time

5


4–21

1

3

4

5

Field settings

4–22

ESIE08-02

[3] Auto restart

When power returns after a power supply failure, the auto restart function reapplies the user interface settings at the time of the power supply failure.

Note: It is therefore recommended to leave the auto restart function enabled.

Note that with the function disabled the schedule timer will not be activated when power returns to the unit after a power supply failure. Press the pr

button to enable the schedule timer again.

■ [3-00] Status: defines whether the auto restart function is turned ON (0) or OFF (1).

[4] Backup heater operation and space heating off temperature

Special procedure to adjust this setting: This setting [4-04] can only be change the first three minutes after unit power ON. After 3 minutes this parameter can be modified but the modified value will not be accepted.

Backup heater operation — Applies only to units with optional backup heater installed.

The operation of the backup heater can altogether be enabled or disabled, or it can be disabled depending on operation of the booster heater.

■ [4-00] Status: defines whether backup heater operation is enabled (1) or disabled (0).

Note: Even in case the backup heater operation status field setting [4-00] is set to disabled (0), the backup heater can operate during start-up and defrost operation.

■ [4-01] Priority: defines whether backup heater and booster heater can operate simultaneously (0), or if the booster heater operation has priority over the backup heater operation (1), OR if the backup heater operation has priority over the booster heater operation (2).

Note: When the priority field setting is set to OFF (0), make sure that electrical power consumption does not exceed supply limits.

When the priority field setting is set to ON (1), space heating performance of the system might be decreased at low outdoor temperatures, since in case of domestic water heating demand the backup heater will not be available for space heating (space heating will still be provided by the heat pump).

When the priority field setting is set to ON (2), domestic water heating performance of the system might be decreased at low outdoor temperatures, since in case of space heating demand the booster heater will not be available for domestic water heating. However domestic water heating by heat pump will still be available.

Space heating off temperature

■ [4-02] Space heating off temperature: outdoor temperature above which space heating is turned off, to avoid overheating.

■ [4-03] Booster heater operation defines whether the optional booster heater operation is enabled

(1) or limited (0).

Note: If the booster heater operation is limited then the booster heater operation is only allowed during the disinfection function or when powerful domestic hot water temperature is initiated.

■ [4-04] General. Freeze-up protection function: avoids the freeze-up if the water piping between home and unit. In case of low ambient temperatures it will activate the pump and in case of low water temperatures it will additionally activate the backup heater.

Status: defines whether continuous pump operation is enabled (0) or disabled (1).

[4-04]=(0): continuous pump activation if pump is not running. The pump operation is related to the ambient temperature and additionally the water temperature will decide if the backup heater should be activate or the pump should work in interval operation. This setting always avoids freeze-up, even in installation with bad isolation on the field piping.



ON OFF

4°C

PUMP

Ambient 6°C

Ambient temp [°C]

OFF ON

45°C

INTERVAL

Water 50°C

ON

2°C

BUH

Water

OFF

6°C

1

6°C

4°C

2°C

Pump

ON

OFF

Time [s]

3

4

From the moment the ambient temperature drops below 4°C, there is a request for water freeze-up prevention which will activate the pump operation. The pump keeps activated till the water temperature rise above 6°C.

■

■

Note:

The compressor may not run.

If there is a problem with the ambient sensor (H9), then the pump will be activated.

5

Water temp [°C]

55°C

50°C

45°C

Pump

ON

OFF

Continuous ON

...

Interval 5 min ON

5 min OFF

Forced

OFF

Interval

5 min ON / 5 min OFF

Continuous

ON

Interval

Time [s]

If the water temperature becomes too high (e.g. small water circuit), the system should be protected.

In the case the water temperature rise above 50°C the pump will work in an interval regime (5 min OFF

- 5 min ON) till the water temperature drops below 45°C. At this point continuous working started again.

The pump must be forced off if the temperature gets higher than 55°C. When the temperature drops again under the 55°C, the pump will starts again sampling.


4–23

1

3

4

5


Water temp [°C]

6°C

4°C

2°C

Backup heater

ON

OFF

Time [s]

From the moment the water temperature drops below 2°C when the compressor is not running the backup heater will be activated. This backup heater operation will be activated till the water temperature rises above 6°C to make sure that the water is not freezing up.

[4-04]=(1): none continuous pump operation when compressor is not running. The pump operation is related to the ambient temperature in combination with the water temperature. From the moment the ambient temperature drops below 4°C the water temperature will decide if the pump and/or the backup heater has to operate.

ON OFF

7°C

PUMP

Water 9°C

Ambient temperature

4°C

ON

2°C

BUH

Water

OFF

6°C

Water temp [°C]

9°C

7°C

6°C

Ambient temperature should be lower than 4°C

2°C

Time [s]

PUMP ON

PUMP OFF

BUH ON

BUH OFF

From the moment the ambient temperature is dropping under the 4°C, we can receive a request to starts pump operation. When the water temperature becomes lower than 7°C, the pump will start to operate. This is continuous till the water temperature is getting higher than 9°C. The backup heater will start if the water temperature is dropping below 2°C and will continuous work till the water temperature is rising above 6°C.

4–24



Note:

■ Interval operation is not needed as the pump switches OFF if the water temperature is higher than

9°C.

■ This function is only available when the compressor is not running.

1

3

4

5


4–25

1

3

4

5

Field settings

Remark

ESIE08-02

[5] Equilibrium temperature and space heating priority temperature

Equilibrium temperature — The 'equilibrium temperature' field settings apply to operation of the

optional backup heater. When the equilibrium temperature function is enabled, operation of the backup heater is restricted to low outdoor temperatures, i.e. when the outdoor temperature equals or drops below the specified equilibrium temperature. When the function is disabled, operation of the backup heater is possible at all outdoor temperatures. Enabling this function reduces the working time of the backup heater.

■

■

[5-00] Equilibrium temperature status: specifies whether the equilibrium temperature function is enabled (1) or disabled (0).

[5-01] Equilibrium temperature: outdoor temperature below which operation of the backup heater is allowed.

Space heating priority temperature (applies only to installations with a domestic hot water tank) —

The 'space heating priority temperature' field settings apply to operation of the 3-way valve and the

booster heater in the domestic hot water tank.

When the space heating priority function is enabled, it is assured that the full capacity of the heat pump is used for space heating only when the outdoor temperature equals or drops below the specified space heating priority temperature, i.e. low outdoor temperature. In this case the domestic water will only be heated by the booster heater.

■

■

[5-02] Space heating priority status: specifies whether space heating priority is enabled (1) or disabled (0).

[5-03] Space heating priority temperature: outdoor temperature below which the domestic water will be heated by the booster heater only, i.e. low outdoor temperature.

■ [5-04] Set point correction for domestic water temperature: set point correction for the desired domestic water temperature, to be applied at low outdoor temperature when space heating priority is enabled. The corrected (higher) set point will make sure that the total heat capacity of the water in the tank remains approximately unchanged, by compensating for the colder bottom water layer of the tank (because the heat exchanger coil is not operational) with a warmer top layer.

T set

[5-04]

T

U

T set

T

U

T

A

[5-03]

T

A

Domestic water set point temperature

User set point (as set on the user interface)

Ambient (outdoor) temperature

Space heating priority

If the booster heater operation is limited [4-03]=0 AND the ambient outdoor temperature T

A

is lower than the field setting is switched to which parameter [5-03] is set, then the domestic water will not be heated.

4–26



[6] DT for domestic water heating


The 'DT (delta temperature) for domestic water heating' field settings determine the temperatures at which heating of the domestic water by the heat pump will be started (i.e., the heat pump ON temperature) and stopped (i.e., the heat pump OFF temperature).

When the domestic water temperature drops below the heat pump ON temperature (T

HP ON

), heating of the domestic water by the heat pump will be started. As soon as the domestic water temperature reaches the heat pump OFF temperature (T

HP OFF

) or the user set point temperature (T

U

), heating of the domestic water by the heat pump will be stopped (by switching the 3-way valve).

The heat pump OFF temperature, and the heat pump ON temperature, and its relation with field settings [6-00] and [6-01] are explained in the illustration below.

■ [6-00] Start: temperature difference determining the heat pump ON temperature (T

HP ON

). See illustration.

■ [6-01] Stop: temperature difference determining the heat pump OFF temperature (T

HP OFF

). See illustration.

T

U

> T

HP MAX

T

U

< T

HP MAX

T( C)

70 T

U

T

U

[6-01] = 2 C

[6-00] = 7 C

T( C)

T

U

[6-01] = 2 C

[6-00] = 7 C

1

3

4

50

48

41

T

HP MAX

T

HP OFF

T

HP ON

[6-01]

[6-00]

50 T

HP MAX

45

38

T

U

= T

HP OFF

[6-00]

T

HP ON

T

U

T

HP MAX

T

HP OFF

T

HP ON


Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic hot water tank (50°C) (depending on T

A

)

Heat pump OFF temperature

Heat pump ON temperature

5


4–27

1

3

4

5


[7] Domestic water step length


When the domestic water is heated and the domestic water set point temperature (as set by the user) has been reached, the booster heater will continue to heat the domestic water to a temperature a few degrees above the set point temperature, i.e. the booster heater OFF temperature. These extra degrees are specified by the domestic water step length field setting. Correct setting prevents the booster heater from repeatedly turning on and off (i.e. chattering) to maintain the domestic water set point temperature. Note: the booster heater will turn back on when the domestic water temperature drops 2°C (fixed value) below the booster heater OFF temperature.

Note: If the schedule timer for booster heater (see the operation manual) is active, the booster heater will only operate if allowed by this schedule timer.

■ [7-00] Domestic water step length: temperature difference above the domestic water set point temperature before the booster heater is turned off.

T

SWW

T

BH OFF

T

BH ON

T

U

T

HP MAX

T

HP OFF

T

HP ON

48

41

73

71

70

60

50

40

[7-00]

[6-01]

[6-00]

30 t

BH

HP

T

BH OFF

T

BH ON

T

HP MAX

T

T

T

T

HP OFF

HP ON

SWW

U

20

10

HP BH

T

U

= 70 C

[7-00] = 3 C

[6-01] = 2 C

[6-00] = 7 C

HP

0 t

Booster heater

Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too long, auxiliary heating by the booster heater can take place

Booster heater OFF temperature (T

U

+ [7-00])

Booster heater ON temperature (T

BH OFF

- 2°C)

Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic hot water tank (depending on T a

)

Heat pump OFF temperature (T

HP MAX

- [6-01])

Heat pump ON temperature (T

HP OFF

- [6-00])

Domestic water temperature


Time

4–28



[8] Domestic water heating mode timer


The 'domestic water heating mode timer' field settings defines the minimum and maximum domestic water heating times, and minimum time between two domestic water heating cycli.

■ [8-00] Minimum running time: specifies the minimum time period during which domestic water heating should be activated, even when the target domestic water temperature has already been reached.

■

■

[8-01] Maximum running time: specifies the maximum time period during which domestic water heating can be activated, even when the target domestic water temperature has not yet been reached.

Note that when the unit is configured to work with a room thermostat (refer to ‘Room thermostat installation configuration’ on page 4-13), the maximum running timer will only be taken into account

when there is a request for space cooling or space heating. When there is no request for room cooling or room heating, domestic water heating by the heat pump will continue until the "heat pump OFF temperature" (see field settings [5]) is reached. When no room thermostat is installed, the timer is always taken into account.

[8-02] Anti-recycling time: specifies the minimum required interval between two domestic water heating cycli.

t

1

2

1

0

1

0

[8-00]

[8-01] [8-02]

Domestic water heating

(I = active, 0 = not active)

Hot water request

(I = request, 0 = no request)

Time t

1

3

4

5


4–29

1

3

4

5


■ [8-03] Booster heater delay time: specifies the start-up time delay of the booster heater operation after start of the heat pump domestic operation.

1

0

1

0

1

0 t t

1

2

3

[8-03]


(I = active, 0 = not active)

Heat pump domestic operation


Hot water request


Time

Notes:

■

■

Take care that [8-03] is always smaller than the maximum running time [8-01].

By adapting the booster heater delay time versus the maximum running time, an optional balance can be found between the energy efficiency and the heat up time.

■ However, if the booster heater delay time is set too high, it might take a long time before the domestic water reaches its set temperature upon domestic mode request.

Example:

[8-01]

[8-03]

energy saving settings

20~95 min

20~95 min

quick heating settings (default)

30 min

20 min

4–30



[9] Cooling and heating set points

The purpose of this field setting is to prevent the user from selecting a wrong (i.e., too hot or too cold) leaving water temperature. Thereto the heating temperature set point range and the cooling temperature set point range available to the user can be configured.

Caution!

■ In case of a floor heating application, it is important to limit the maximum leaving water temperature at heating operation according to the specifications of the floor heating installation.

■ In case of a floor cooling application, it is important to limit the minimum leaving water temperature at cooling operation to 16°C to prevent condensation on the floor.

1

■

■

■

■

■

[9-00] Heating set point upper limit: maximum leaving water temperature for heating operation.

[9-01] Heating set point lower limit: minimum leaving water temperature for heating operation.

[9-02] Cooling set point upper limit: maximum leaving water temperature for cooling operation.

[9-03] Cooling set point lower limit: minimum leaving water temperature for cooling operation.

[9-04] Overshoot setting: Defines how much the water temperature may rise above the setpoint before the compressor stops. This function is only applicable in HEATING mode.

3

4

[A] Quiet mode

This field setting allows to select the desired quiet mode. Two quiet modes are available: quiet mode

A and quiet mode B.

In quiet mode A, priority is given to the outdoor unit operating quietly under all circumstances. Fan and compressor speed (and thus performance) will be limited to a certain percentage of the speed at normal operation. In certain cases, this might result in reduced performance.

■

■

In quiet mode B, quiet operation might be overridden when higher performance is required. In certain cases, this might result in less quiet operation of the outdoor unit to meet the requested performance.

[A-00] Quiet mode type: defines whether quiet mode A (0) or quiet mode B (2) is selected.

[A-01] Parameter 01: do not change this setting. Leave it set to its default value.

Caution! Do not set other values than the ones mentioned.

5

[C] Solar priority mode

Simultaneous water heating by the sun and water heating by the heat pump is not possible.

By default, heating of the tank by the heat pump has priority over heating by the sun.

This means that, whenever there is a request of the domestic hot water thermostat and domestic water heating is enabled (by the schedule timer or domestic water heating ON/OFF button, refer to the operation manual of the indoor unit), heating will be done by the heat pump. In case solar heating is busy, solar heating will be stopped.

This is to avoid shortage of domestic hot water in case the solar radiation is very weak, or solar radiation only became high shortly before domestic hot water demand is expected (e.g. on a cloudy day).

This default setting can be changed, so that at all times, when solar heat becomes available, domestic water heating by the heat pump will be (if busy) interrupted and taken over by the sun.


4–31

1

3

4

5


In order to change this, put the field parameter [C-00] to 0. Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit, paragraph “Field settings” to find out how to access and change field parameters. [C-00] put to 0 means solar priority, [C-01] put to 1 means heat pump priority.

Notes:

■ Be aware that setting this parameter to 0 might cause insufficient warm water at the time of domestic hot water demand during days with weak solar intensity. If you are not sure about the availability of hot water, check the domestic hot water temperature on the controller (see operation manual of the indoor unit) and if too low, push the 'booster domestic hot water' button. This will trigger domestic water heating by the heat pump immediately.

■ The booster heater in the domestic hot water tank can work independent from the solar heating or domestic water heating by the heat pump. For a detailed decision flow on domestic water heating by solar kit or by heat pump, and/or booster heater, refer to the annexes of the installation manual

EKSOLHWAV1.

[D] Benefit kWh rate power supply

■ [D-00] Defines which heaters are switched off when the benefit kWh rate signal of the electricity company is received.

If [D-01]=1 or 2 and the benefit kWh rate signal of the electricity company is received, following devices will be switched off:

[D-00]

0 (default)

1

2

3

Compressor

Forced off

Forced off

Forced off

Forced off

Backup heater

Forced off

Forced off

Permitted

Permitted

Booster heater

Forced off

Permitted

Forced off

Permitted

Note: [D-00] settings 1, 2 and 3 are only meaningful if the benefit kWh rate power supply is of the type that power supply is not interrupted.

■ [D-01] Defines whether or not the outdoor unit is connected to a benefit kWh rate power supply.

If [D-01]=0, the unit is connected to a normal power supply (default value).

If [D-01]=1 or 2, the unit is connected to a benefit kWh rate power supply. In this case the wiring

requires specific installation like explained in ‘Benefit kWh Rate Power Supply’ on page 2-19.

When parameter [D-01]=1 at the moment that the benefit kWh rate signal is sent by the electricity company, that contact will open and the unit will go in forced off mode

(1)

.

When parameter [D-01]=2 at the moment that the benefit kWh rate signal is sent by the electricity company, that contact will close and the unit will go in forced off mode

(2)

.

Notes:

■ Forced off mode

(1)

: When the signal is released again, the voltage free contact will close and the unit will restart operation. It is therefore important to leave the auto restart function enabled. Refer

to ‘[3] Auto restart’ on page 4-22.

■ Forced off mode

(2)

: When the signal is released again, the voltage free contact will open and the unit will restart operation. It is therefore important to leave the auto restart function enabled. Refer

to ‘[3] Auto restart’ on page 4-22.

4–32



■

■

■

■

■

[E] Unit information readout

[E-00] Readout of the software version (example: 23)

[E-01] Readout of the EEPROM version (example: 23)

[E-02] Readout of the unit model identification (example: 11)

[E-03] Readout of the liquid refrigerant temperature

[E-04] Readout of the inlet water temperature

Note: [E-03] and [E-04] readouts are not permanently refreshed. Temperature readouts are updated after looping through the field setting first codes again only.

1

3

4

5


4–33


1

2.4

Overview of the Field Setting on the Compressor Compartment

Introduction

This chapter will show an overview of the field settings on the compressor compartment.

Setting overview

The table below contains the settings on the compressor compartment PCB.

A

■ Pump down setting

■ Forced defrost setting

3

B

■ Operation status setting

■ Refrigerant recovery setting

■ Monitoring mode setting

Content

4

Topic

2.4.1–Overview of the Service PCB on the Compressor Compartment

2.4.2–Pump Down / Forced Defrosting (A)

2.4.3–Setting by BS Buttons (B)

See page

4–35

4–36

4–37

5

4–34



2.4.1

Overview of the Service PCB on the Compressor Compartment

1

Various settings are available by using the DIP switches and the BS buttons on the Printed-Circuit

Board (Display PC board: A2P).

Display Lamp

H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3 Display

PC board (A2P)

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Control

PC board (A1P)

MODE TEST HWL L.N.O.P

DEMAND

ON

1 2

1 2

Dip Switch

MODE SET RETURN PUMPDOWN

BS Button

Display

Lamp

BS Button

Dip

Switch

Display

Function or Operating Procedure

Mark Name

H1P

H2P

H3P

H4P

H5P

H6P

H7P

BS1

BS2

BS3

MODE

TEST

HWL

L.N.O.P

DEMAND

MODE

SET

RETURN

During "Setting mode 1," the lamp is

OFF ( x

).

During test operation in "Setting mode 1," the lamp is ON ( w

).

When a malfunction occurs during

"Setting mode 1," the lamp turns ON

( w

).

During "Monitor mode," the lamp blinks ( c

).

During "Monitor mode," the lamp is

OFF ( x

).

During "Setting mode 1," low noise level is displayed.

During "Monitor mode," various combinations of the lamp indicate the following conditions:

■

■

■

Indication of oil return operation

Indication of outdoor unit class

Not applicable

Indication of malfunction code

(the latest and up to 2 cycles before)

■ Indication of causes of stepping-down

Used to change "Setting mode".

Used to change "Setting item" and "Setting condition".

Used to decide "Setting item" and "Setting condition".

Used for pump down operation, forced oil return operation and forced defrost operation.

BS4

DS1-1

DS1-2

ON

OFF(

∗)

COOL

HEAT(

∗)

PUMP DOWN

EMERGENCY

Switch from "OFF" to "ON" for emergency operation (forced operation).

In case of heating in emergency operation, maintain "HEAT" and in case of cooling in emergency operation, switch to "COOL".

∗Factory settings: "OFF" and "HEAT"

3

4

5


4–35


1

2.4.2

Pump Down / Forced Defrosting (A)

Outline

This unit is equipped with an automatic pump down operation which will collect all refrigerant from the field piping and hydro-box in the outdoor unit. To protect the environment, make sure to perform the following pump down operation when relocating or disposing of the unit.

Note

3

4

5

Procedure

Note

The outdoor unit is equipped with a low pressure sensor to protect the compressor by switching it off.

Never short-circuit the low pressure sensor during pump down operation!

1

Stop space and Domestic hot water demand (red LED OFF and shower icon not displayed) and select Maximum pump speed.

2

Switch the power supply to the outdoor unit OFF and back ON.

3

Activate "pump down/forced defrost" on the compressor module PCB by pressing BS4 for at least

5 seconds.

4

The compressor and outdoor fan will start automatically.

5

Request space heating via remote controller as soon as possible, in order to activate the circulation pump (to prevent the plate heat exchanger from freeze-up) and allow BUH operation if required.

6

a) Forced defrost can be stopped by pressing BS4 on outdoor PCB.

b) Once operation stops (after 3 to 5 minutes), close the liquid and the gas stop valve.

7

Pump down is now finished. U4 may be displayed on the remote controller, this is not a malfunction.

8

After "pump down/forced defrost" is finished or stopped, keep the circulation pump running for at least 5 minutes.

9

Switch OFF the power supply of the outdoor unit.

■

■

■

Make sure that the water temperature and volume is sufficient to perform the "pump down/forced defrost" operation.

Make sure to re-open both stop valves before restart operation of the unit.

After a finished or stopped pump down, the unit will perform a test run at first operation (same as during commissioning).

4–36



2.4.3

Setting by BS Buttons (B)

Mode overview

1

With "Setting mode 1," "Setting mode 2" and "Monitor mode," various settings and data can be checked.

1 Setting mode 1

The initial status (normal operation) is "Setting mode 1." This mode indicates operating status -

"TEST (test operation)," "HWL (malfunction)".

2 Setting mode 2

To activate “Refrigerant Recovery mode”.

3 Monitor mode

This mode indicates "oil return operation," "outdoor unit class," "contents of retry," "contents of malfunction," "causes of stepping-down operation," etc.

Using the MODE button, the modes can be changed as follows.

Setting mode 2

MODE

On

H1P

Push and hold the BS1

(MODE button) for 5 seconds.

(Normal)

Setting mode 1

Push the BS1(MODE button) one time.

MODE

Off

H1P

Push the BS1(MODE button) one time.

Monitor mode

MODE

Blinking

H1P

(V2761)

3

4

Setting mode 1

■

■

Using this mode, the following conditions can be checked:

Current operating condition (normal/test operation/line inspection and normal/malfunction)

Low noise operating

These conditions above can be checked by performing the following steps:

Procedure for checking check items

The system is normally set to

"Setting mode 1".

Should the system be set to any mode other than that, push the

MODE (BS1) button to set the system to "Setting mode 1".

Check the system for each condition through LED displays. (Refer to information in table on the right.)

MODE TEST HWL L.N.O.P

H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P

: ON : OFF : BLINK

During "Setting mode 1," the lamp is always OFF.

Test operation display

In normal operation In test operation

In line inspection operation

Malfunction display

Malfunction Normal

Low noise operation display

Normal operation

Low noise Active

5


4–37


1

Setting mode 2

3

4

5

In this mode, settings for the following items can be made by using BS buttons.

Push and hold the MODE (BS1) button for 5 seconds and set to “Setting mode

2”.

<Selection of setting conditions>

Push the SET (BS2) button and set to the setting condition you want.

↓

Push the RETURN (BS3) button and decide the condition.

<Selection of setting items>

Push the SET (BS2) button and set the

LED display to a setting item shown in the table on the right.

↓

Push the RETURN (BS3) button and decide the item. (The present setting condition is blinked.)

Push the RETURN (BS3) button and set to the initial status of “Setting mode

2”.

∗

If you become unsure of how to proceed, push the MODE (BS1) button and return to setting mode 1.

No.

Display of setting items

Setting item

28

Refrigerant recovery mode

LED display


Display of setting condition

Setting condition w x w w w x x

OFF (factory setting)

ON

LED display

H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P w x x x x x w w x x x x w x

The figures in the columns under "No." represent the number of times to push the SET (BS2) button.

Setting of refrigerant recovery mode

When a refrigerant recovery unit is connected on site to recover refrigerant, fully open the expansion valve of the outdoor unit to help the recovery.

[Work procedure]

1

Stop operation.

2

Turn ON refrigerant recovery mode by performing the following steps.

Operating procedure

Push and hold the MODE (BS1) button of "Setting mode 1" for 5 seconds or more and set to "Setting mode 2." x

: OFF c

: BLINK w

: ON

H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P w x x x x x x

Push the SET (BS2) button 28 times to set the LED display as shown in the table on the right. (

∗1)

Push the RETURN (BS3) button once. (Present settings are displayed.) w x w w w x x w x x x x x c

Push the SET (BS2) button once to set the LED display as shown in the table on the right.

Push the RETURN (BS3) button once to make a decision.

w x x x x c x w x x x x w x

When the RETURN (BS3) button is pushed once again, the electronic expansion valve opens fully.

w x x x x x x

3

Connect a refrigerant recovery unit to perform refrigerant recovery. (For a refrigerant recovery port, refer to the installation manual.)

4–38



4

Upon completion of refrigerant recovery, turn OFF refrigerant recovery mode by taking the following steps or turning OFF the power of outdoor unit.

Operating procedure

Push the SET (BS2) button once to set the LED display as shown in the table on the right.


Push the SET (BS2) button 28 times to set the LED display as shown in the table on the right. (

∗1)

Push the RETURN (BS3) button once. (Present settings are displayed.) w x w w w x x w x x x x c x w x x x x x c

Push the RETURN (BS3) button once to make a decision.

w x x x x x w

When the RETURN (BS3) button is pushed once again, the electronic expansion valve fully closes.

w x x x x x x

∗1:If you become unsure how many times you have pushed the button, push the MODE (BS1) button once to return to "Setting mode 1" and start the operating procedure all over again.

1

3

4

5


4–39


1

3

Monitor mode

In this mode, the following items can be checked by using the BS buttons.

To enter the monitor mode, push the MODE

(BS1) button when in "Setting mode 1".

<Selection of setting item>

Push the SET (BS2) button and set the LED display to a setting item.

<Confirmation on setting contents>

Push the RETURN (BS3) button to display different data of set items.

No.

Setting item

4

5

6

0

1

2

3

Indication of oil return operation

Indication of outdoor unit class

Contents of retry (the latest)

Contents of retry (1 cycle before)

Contents of retry (2 cycle before)

Contents of malfunction (the latest)

Contents of malfunction (1 cycle before)

7

10

Contents of malfunction (2 cycle before)

Indication of causes of stepping-down operation

LED display


Data display

See Data display c

.

See Data display d

.

See "Malfunction code display" on the next page.

See Data display e

.

The numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the SET (BS2) button.

4

5

Push the RETURN (BS3) button and switches to the initial status of "Monitor mode".

* Push the MODE (BS1) button and returns to

"Setting mode 1".

Data display d

Display contents

No setting

ERHQ011~014AAV3

ERHQ016AAV3

Data display c

Display contents

In normal operation

In oil return operation

LED display


LED display


Data display e

Display contents

Normal (not in stepping-down operation)

Low pressure stepping-down

High pressure stepping-down

Inverter discharge pipe stepping-down

Inverter current stepping-down

Radiation fin temperature stepping-down

Inverter stepping-down

Overall current stepping-down

Other stepping-down

LED display


4–40


ESIE08-02

3 Test Run and Operation Data

Introduction

Overview


■

■

External static pressure graph

Operation ranges.


Topic

3.1–Operation Range E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

3.2–Operation Range E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

3.3–External Static Pressure

Test Run and Operation Data

Part 4

1

See page

4–42

4–43

4–44

3

4

5


4–41

Test Run and Operation Data

1

3.1

Conditions

Operation Range E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

■

■

■

The illustrations in this section are based on the following conditions:

Equivalent piping length: 7.5 m

Level difference: 0 m

Air flow rate: High.

Operation range:

Cooling / Heating /

Sanitary mode

The illustration below shows the operation range for the cooling, heating and sanitary mode.

46

ONLY EB(H/L)*

3

ESIE08-02

4

10

5 22 leaving evaporator water temp. ( C)

5

35

0

-15

-20

(*)

(**)

15 25 40 55 leaving condensor water temp. ( C)

No heatpump operation,

Back up heater only

(*) - E(D/B)L* units include special equipment (insulation, heater sheet,...) to ensure good operation in areas where low ambient temperature can occur together with high humidity conditions. In such conditions the

E(D/B)H* models may experience problems with severe ice build-up on the aircooled coil. In case such conditions are expected, the E(D/B)L* must be installed

instead.

- Both E(D/B)L* and E(D/B)H* models have a freeze prevention function using the pump and backup heater to keep the water system safe from freezing in all conditions. In case accidental or intentional power shutdown is likely to happen we recommend to use glycol.

(**) Only E(D/B)L*

43

35

0

-15

-20

25 40 55 water temp. sanitary tank ( C)

(*)

80

(**)


4–42


ESIE08-02 Test Run and Operation Data

3.2

Operation Range E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

Conditions

■

■

■

The illustrations in this section are based on the following conditions:

Equivalent piping length: 7.5 m

Level difference: 0 m

Air flow rate: High.

Operation range:

Cooling / Heating /

Sanitary mode

The illustration below shows the operation range for the cooling, heating and sanitary mode.

46

ONLY EB(H/L)*

1

3

10

35

5 22 leaving evaporator water temp. ( C)

0

-15

-20

-25

(*)

(**)

15 25 55 leaving condensor water temp. ( C)

43

35

4

No heatpump operation

Back up heater only

Operation possible, but no guarantee of capacity

(*) - E(D/B)L* units include special equipment (insulation, heater sheet,...) to ensure good operation in areas where low ambient temperature can occur together with high humidity conditions. In such conditions the

E(D/B)H* models may experience problems with severe ice build-up on the aircooled coil. In case such conditions are expected, the E(D/B)L* must be installed

instead.

- Both E(D/B)L* and E(D/B)H* models have a freeze prevention function using the pump and backup heater to keep the water system safe from freezing in all conditions. In case accidental or intentional power shutdown is likely to happen we recommend to use glycol.

(**) Only E(D/B)L*


5

0

-15

-20

25 55 water temp. sanitary tank ( C)

(*)

80

(**)


4–43

Test Run and Operation Data ESIE08-02

1

3.3

3

4

5

External Static Pressure

External static pressure

45

40

35

30

25

The illustration below shows the external static pressure of the unit depending on the water flow and the pump setting.

65

60

55

50

I

II

I

high speed

II

medium speed

ESP: external static pressure

Flow: waterflow through the unit

20

15

10

5

0

16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58

Flow [I/min]

I

II

ESP

Flow high speed medium speed external static pressure waterflow through the unit

Warning!

■

■

Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange in the technical specifications.

Water quality must be according to EN directive EC 98/83 EC.

4–44


ESIE08-02

Part 5

Maintenance and Disassembly

4



Chapter

1–Maintenance

2–Removal procedure: outdoor unit E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

3

See page

5–3

5–5

4

Part 5 – Maintenance and Disassembly 5–1

ESIE08-02

1

3

5

5–2 Part 5 – Maintenance and Disassembly

ESIE08-02

1 Maintenance

1.1


Introduction

Overview


■

Maintenance


Topic

1.2–Maintenance

Maintenance

Part 5

1

See page

5–4

3

Part 5 – Maintenance and Disassembly

5–3

Maintenance ESIE08-02

1

1.2

Maintenance

Introduction

In order to ensure optimal availability of the unit, a number of checks and inspections on the unit and the field wiring have to be carried out at regular intervals.

Precaution

3

55

Overview

■ Before carrying out any maintenance or repair activity, always switch off the circuit breaker on the supply panel, remove the fuses or open the protection devices of the unit.

The described checks must be executed at least once a year.

1

Water pressure

Check if the water pressure is above 0.3 bar. If necessary add water.

2

Water filter

Clean the water filter.

3

Water pressure relief valve

■

■

Check for correct operation of the pressure relief valve by turning the red knob on the valve counter-clockwise:

If you do not hear a clacking sound, contact your local Daikin dealer.

In case the water keeps running out of the unit, close both the water inlet and outlet shut-off valves first and then contact your local Daikin dealer.

4

Pressure relief valve hose

Check that the pressure relief valve hose is positioned appropriately to drain the water.

If the (optional) drain pan kit is installed, make sure that the pressure relief valve hose end is positioned in the drain pan.

5

Backup heater vessel insulation cover

Check that the backup heater insulation cover is fastened tightly around the backup heater vessel.

6

Domestic hot water tank pressure relief valve (field supply)


Check for correct operation of the pressure relief valve on the domestic hot water tank.

7

Domestic hot water tank booster heater


It is advisable to remove lime buildup on the booster heater to extend its life span, especially in regions with hard water. To do so, drain the domestic hot water tank, remove the booster heater from the domestic hot water tank and immerse in a bucket (or similar) with lime-removing product for 24 hours.

8

Hydraulic compartment switch box

■ Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the switch box and look for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.

■ Check for correct operation of contactors K1M, K2M, K3M, K5M (applications with domestic hot water tank only) and K4M by use of an ohmmeter. All contacts of these contactors must be in open position.

5–4


ESIE08-02 Removal procedure: outdoor unit E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

Part 5

1

2 Removal procedure: outdoor unit E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

2.1


Introduction

Overview


■

Removal procedure: outdoor unit


Topic

2.2–Removal of Outside Panels

2.3–Removal of Propeller Fan and Fan Motor

2.4–Removal of Switch Box for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

2.5–Removal of PCB Boards for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

2.6–Removal of Switch Box for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

2.7–Removal of PCB Boards for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

2.8–Removal of Pressure Sensor and Electronic Expansion Valve for

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

2.9–Removal of Pressure Sensor and Electronic Expansion Valve for

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

2.10–Removal of Thermistor for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

2.11–Removal of Thermistor for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Compartment

2.12–Removal of Compressor

2.13–Removal of Four Way Valve

2.14–Removal of PCB Board for E(B\D)(H\L)Q* Hydraulic Module

2.15–Removal of Thermistors for Hydraulic Module

2.16–Removal of Flow Switch

2.17–Removal of Backup Heater

2.18–Removal of Pump

2.19–Removal of Expansion Vessel

2.20–Removal of Plate Heat Exchanger

5–15

5–16

5–17

5–18

5–19

5–20

5–21

5–22

5–23

5–24

5–25

5–26

See page

5–6

5–7

5–9

5–10

5–11

5–12

5–14

3


5–5

Removal procedure: outdoor unit E(B\D)(H\L)Q* ESIE08-02

2.2

Removal of Outside Panels

1

3

55

Procedure

Step

1 For door 1, unscrew a single mounting screw and slide the door downward.

Procedure

Top panel

Side panel

2 For door 2, unscrew a single mounting screw and slide the panel outward and then down.

Rear panel

3 For door 3, unscrew the two mounting screws and slide the panel outward and then down.

Door 2: electrical parts hydraulic compartment

4 For the top panel, unscrew the nine mounting screws and then remove this panel.

5 For the front panel, unscrew the seven mounting screws and then remove this panel.

Front panel

Door 1: compressor compartment

Door 3: hydraulic compartment

6 For the rear panel, unscrew the eleven mounting screws, click out the ambient sensor and then remove this panel.

■ Remark 1: When removing the rear panel, pay attention to the thermistor attached to the panel.

1

2

7 For the side panel, unscrew the 4 mounting screws and then remove this panel.

■ Remark 2: The cable cover may block one of the screws, in this case you may need to remove the cable cover first.

5–6



2.3

Removal of Propeller Fan and Fan Motor

Procedure

Warning! Be sure to commence the disassembling work after 10 minutes or more elapsed after all power supplies have been turned off.

Procedure Step

Remove the propeller fan

1 Unscrew the four screws that fix the air discharge grille and disengage the four hooks at the top and bottom of the grille, and then remove this air discharge grille.

2 Unfasten the fan lock nut that fixes the propeller fan.

Hooks

1

3

Propeller fan Fan lock nut

Hooks

Discharge grille


5–7


1

3

55

Step

Remove the fan motor

1 Remove door 1 and the front panel in accordance with the removal procedure for outside panels.

2 - For V3 version:

Remove the connector

(X206A, X207A) for fan motor from the PC board.

- For W1 version:

Remove the connector for fan motor from the extension cable.

Procedure

Upper motor connector (red)

Lower motor connector (white)

3 Cut the cable tie of the lead wires (located on the reverse side of the stop valve mounting plate).

4 Pull out the lead wires through the opening of the partition panel, and then unclamp the three clamps. (Note that the partition plate has three hooks.) Also cut the cable tie on the last clamp, and the cable ties on the fan motor support stand.

Fan motor

5 Unfasten the four lock screws from the fan motor, enables the removal of this motor.

Remark: In order to disconnect the connector, do not pull the lead wire. Hold the connector part and then push the hooks.

Caution: When mounting the fan motor!

Be sure to fix the motor lead wire with a clamp. Not heeding this caution will cause the entanglement of the lead wire around the fan, which will result in damage to the fan.

Clamps (3 pcs)

Stop valve mounting plate

Opening of partition panel

Lead wire Propeller fan

5–8



2.4

Removal of Switch Box for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

1

Procedure

Warning! Be sure to commence the disassembling work after 10 minutes or more elapsed from all power supplies have been turned off.

Procedure Step

1 Remove door 1 in accordance with the

Removal Procedure for

Outside Panels.

Reactor coil connector

■

Points

If the top panel cannot be removed.

2 Disconnect each connector on the PC board.

(Refer to the points column.)

Screw fixing switchbox

Even though workability is degraded, it is possible to pull the switch box to the front without removing the top panel.

3 Disconnect the reactor coil connector.

Screw fixing terminal block

■ The figure below shows connectors to be disconnected.

Upper fan motor [X106A]

Lower fan motor [X107A]

4 Remove the compressor terminal cover, and then disconnect the three lead wires from the terminal block for the compressor.

5 Unscrew the two screws that fix the terminal block.

Compressor terminal cover

Electronic expansion valve [X21A]

Liquid pipe thermistor [X13A]

Outdoor air temperature thermistor [X11A]

Integrated thermistor

[X12A]

Pressure sensor

[X17A]

6 Unscrew one screw fixing the switchbox.

Four way valve [X25A]

Crankcase heater [X28A]

7 Disengage the three hooks, and then pull out the switch box upward.

3


5–9


2.5

Removal of PCB Boards for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

1

3

55

Procedure

Warning! Be sure to commence the disassembling work after 10 minutes or more elapsed after all power supplies have been turned off.

Procedure Points Step

■ Remove the switch box in accordance with the removal procedure for the switch box.

Removal of A2P

1 Disconnect the connector (X205A) from the PC board.

Hooks

X205A

2 While pressing the two hooks, remove the PC board (A2P).

Screws

Tab of cover

Removing the switch box cover

1 Unscrew the 2 screws on the right side.

2 Release the faston terminals from the capacitor and the 2 screw terminals from the filter PCB.

3 Disengage the 2 clamps on the right side.

4 Slide the switch box cover upward.

Removal of PCB A1P

1 Cut the tie-wraps.

2 Disconnect the connectors listed in the points column.

3 If needed, unscrew the compressor and reactor cables from the PCB.

Hooks

4 Unscrew the nine screws holding the PCB, and disengage the 4 hooks on the left side, and remove the PCB (A1P) with the radiating fin.

W

V

U

LE

■

Connectors used on the PC board

·

Compressor (U, V, W screw terminals)

·

Reactors (LD and LE screw terminals)

LD

5–10



2.6

Removal of Switch Box for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

Procedure



Remove door 1 and the top panel in accordance with the

Removal Procedure for Outside Panels.

Screws

Removal of the reactor coil box

1 Unscrew the four screws holding the reactor coil box.

Fan motor connectors

2 Turn the right side of the reactor coil box outward, and lift it up to unhook the box.

Hooks

Screws

Screws

Reactor coil box Removal of the switchbox

1 Remove the compressor terminal cover, and then disconnect the three lead wires from the terminal block of the compressor.

2 Disconnect the wires from the PC boards (see points column), and the fan motor cables from the fan motor connectors. Cut the tie wraps where needed.

Connectors that need to be disconnected: X21A, X12A, X11A,

X13A, S1NPH, X77A, X27A,

X28A, X25A

3 Unscrew the two screws that fix the switch box.

4 Pull out the switch box upward.

1

3


5–11


1

2.7

Removal of PCB Boards for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

Procedure



Removal of A1P control PCB

1 Disconnect all connectors from the PC board.

2 Unscrew 1 screw holding the PCB and remove the

PCB.

Screw

3

55

Removal of A2P inverter PCB

1 Remove the switch box according to the removal procedure for the switch box.

2 Disconnect the needed connectors (connections between PCB's).

3 Unscrew the screw fixing the parts of the switchbox.

4 Lift up and pull out the front part of the switchbox.

5 Remove all connectors from PCB A2P.

6 Unscrew 1 screw holding the PCB, and remove the

PCB.

5–12

Screw

Connectors to be disconnected on A1P: X4A,

X5A, X8A, X9A


ESIE08-02

Step

Removal of A3P filter PCB

1 Remove the switch box according to the removal procedure for the switch box.

2 Disconnect all fasten connectors from the filter

PCB.

3 Disengage all 4 clamps holding the PCB by pushing on the sides.

4 Remove the PCB.

Procedure

Removal procedure: outdoor unit E(B\D)(H\L)Q*

Points

1

3

Screw


5–13


2.8

Removal of Pressure Sensor and Electronic Expansion Valve for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

1

3

55

Procedure

Step

■ Remove door 1* in accordance with the removal procedure for outside panels.


Procedure Points

■ Before removing the electronic expansion valve or pressure sensor, be sure to recover the refrigerant.

Remove the pressure sensor

1 Disconnect the pressure sensor connector (X17A) from PCB A1P.

2 Remove the brazing of the pressure sensor and then remove pressure sensor.

Make sure to cool the pressure sensor using e.g. a wet cloth during brazing.

Remove the electronic expansion valve

1 Disconnect the electronic expansion valve connector (X21A) from PCB

A1P.

Brazing

Precaution for mounting the coil for the electronic expansion valve

2 Pull out the coil of the electronic expansion valve upward.

Coil for valve + protective cap

Align the dimple of the electronic expansion valve and the stopper of the coil for the electronic expansion valve, and then push them in until you hear them click.

Stopper

3 Remove brazing from the two places, and then remove the electronic expansion valve body.

Brazing

Expansion valve body

Dimple

Make sure to cool the electronic expansion valve body using e.g. a wet cloth during brazing.

* Door 1 is the door of the compressor compartment.

5–14



2.9

Removal of Pressure Sensor and Electronic Expansion Valve for

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

1

Procedure

Step




Pressure sensor

■ Before removing the electronic expansion valve or pressure sensor, be sure to recover the refrigerant.

Remove the pressure sensor

1 Disconnect the pressure sensor connector (X17A) from PCB A1P.

Brazing

2 Remove the brazing of the pressure sensor and then remove pressure sensor.

Protective cap

EEV coil

Make sure to cool the pressure sensor using e.g. a wet cloth during brazing.

Remove the electronic expansion valve

1 Disconnect the electronic expansion valve connector (X21A) from PCB

A1P.

EEV body

Brazing

Precaution for mounting the coil for the electronic expansion valve

2 Pull out the coil of the electronic expansion valve upward.

Align the dimple of the electronic expansion valve and the stopper of the coil for the electronic expansion valve, and then push them in until you hear them click.

Stopper

3 Remove brazing from the two places, and then remove the electronic expansion valve body.

Dimple

3

Make sure to cool the electronic expansion valve body using e.g. a wet cloth during brazing.



5–15


2.10

Removal of Thermistor for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

1

3

55

Procedure



■ Remove the top panel and the front panel (2) and side panel accordance with the

Procedure for Outside

Panels.

Thermistor

1 Pull out the outdoor air temperature thermistor to the front, and then slide this thermistor to the right to remove it.


(R2T)

Thermistor

2 Pinch the mounting spring that fixes the discharge pipe thermistor to pull out this thermistor.

Mounting spring thermistor

Outdoor air thermistor (R1T)

3 Press the fixing section of the suction pipe thermistor to pull out this thermistor.


(R3T)

Thermistor

Mounting spring

4 Pull the fixing bracket of the heat exchanger’s distribution pipe thermistor to the front, and then remove this thermistor.

Thermistor

Intermediate heat exchanger thermistor (R5T)


(R6T)

5 Press the fixing section of the heat exchanger’s intermediate temperature thermistor to pull out this thermistor.

Heat exchanger distribution pipe thermistor (R4T)

Remark:

6 Press the fixing section of the liquid pipe thermistor to pull out this thermistor.

The heat exchanger’s distribution pipe thermistor, heat exchanger’s intermediate temperature thermistor, and liquid pipe thermistor are jointed together with a single connector. Consequently, these three thermistors should be replaced at the same time.

5–16



2.11

Removal of Thermistor for E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 Compressor Compartment

Procedure



■ Remove door 1* and the rear panel in accordance with the Removal

Procedure for Outside

Panels.

Discharge pipe thermistor (R2T)

1 Pull out the outdoor air temperature thermistor to the front, and then slide this thermistor to the right to remove it.

2 Remove the reactor coil box according to the switch box removal procedure. Pinch the mounting spring that fixes the discharge pipe thermistor to pull out this thermistor.

Suction pipe thermistor (R3T)

Liquid pipe thermistor (R6T)

3 Press the fixing section of the suction pipe thermistor to pull out this thermistor.

4 Pull the fixing bracket of the heat exchanger's distribution pipe thermistor to the front, and then remove this thermistor.

5 Press the fixing section of the heat exchanger's intermediate temperature thermistor to pull out this thermistor.

Outdoor air thermistor (R1T)

Intermediate heat exchanger thermistor (R5T)

6 Press the fixing section of the liquid pipe thermistor to pull out this thermistor.

Heat exchanger distribution pipe thermistor (R4T)

Remark:

The heat exchanger's distribution pipe thermistor, discharge pipe thermistor, heat exchanger's intermediate temperature thermistor, and liquid pipe thermistor are jointed together with a single connector. Consequently, these four thermistors should be replaced at the same time.


1

3


5–17


2.12

Removal of Compressor

1

3

55

Procedure


Procedure Step

■ Recover the refrigerant.

(Refer to point column.)

■ Remove the front panel (2) and the front piping cover bracket.

Stop valve mounting plate

■

■

Points

Be sure to remove the compressor only after the refrigerant is completely recovered.

Terminal block

1 Unscrew the five screws that fix the stop valve mounting plate, and then remove this mounting plate.

String

Gas piping

U (red)

W (blue)

Liquid piping

V (white)

Terminal cover

2 Remove the gas piping and the liquid piping.

3 Remove the compressor terminal cover.

4 Disconnect the lead wires from the terminal block.

String

5 Loosen the two strings, and then pull out the sound insulation of the compressor.

6 Unfasten to remove the three nuts that fix the compressor. (Refer to point column.)

Cutting point

(suction pipe)

7 Cut the suction pipe and the discharge pipe using a pipe cutter. (Refer to point column.)

8 Remove brazing from the three places.

Cutting point

(discharge pipe)

9 Lift to pull out the compressor.

Compressor lead wires

Brazing

■

■

One out of the nuts that fix the compressor is located outside of the partition panel.

Be sure to cut thee pipes by using a pipe cutter before disconnecting the brazed sections of pipes. A sudden disconnection of the brazed sections can cause oil to catch fire.

Insulation

Nuts fixing the compressor

5–18



2.13

Removal of Four Way Valve

1

Procedure



■

■

Recover the refrigerant.

Remove door 1* and the rear panel according to the removal procedure for outside panels

■

■

Remove the switch box according to the switchbox removal procedure

Be sure to remove the four way valve only after the refrigerant is completely recovered.

Brazing

For E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3

1 Unscrew the one screw that fixes the coil for the four way valve, and then remove this coil.

2 Remove brazing from the four places, and then remove the four way valve.


Four way valve

Coil for four way valve

Brazing

Screw

To prevent the four way valve from exceeding a temperature of 120°C, conduct brazing work while cooling the valve with e.g. wet cloth.

For E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1

1 Remove the Reactor coil box, according to the removal procedure for switch box.

Brazing

Screw

4 way valve coil

2 Unscrew the one screw that fixes the coil for the four way valve, and then remove this coil.

3 Remove brazing from the four places, and then remove the four way valve.


Brazing

To prevent the four way valve from exceeding a temperature of 120°C, conduct brazing work while cooling the valve with e.g. wet cloth.

3

* Door 1 is the compressor compartment door.


5–19


1

2.14

Removal of PCB Board for E(B\D)(H\L)Q* Hydraulic Module

Procedure



3

Step


Removal of A11P control PCB

1 Disconnect the all connectors from the PCB.

2 Disengage the 4 hooks on the right side of the

PCB, and take the PCB out.

Hooks

Connectors to be removed: X1A, X2A,

X3A, X4A, X5A, X6A,

X7A, X8A, X9A, X11A,

X12A, X13A, X14A,

X15A, X16A, X17A,

X18A, X19A, X20A,

X21A, X33A, X40A.

55

* Door 2 is the door to the electrical parts of the hydraulic compartment.

5–20



2.15

Removal of Thermistors for Hydraulic Module

1

Procedure


Procedure Step

■

Remove door 3* in accordance with the removal procedure for outside panels.

1 Press the fixing section of the inlet water thermistor (R14T) to pull out this thermistor.


(R11T)

■

Points

For E(B/D)LQ* models you will need to remove the piping insulation in order to access the thermistors.

2 Press the fixing section of the refrigerant liquid side thermistor (R13T) to pull out this thermistor.


(R12T)


(R14T)

3 Press the fixing section of the outlet water heat exchanger thermistor

(R11T) to pull out this thermistor.


(R13T)

4 Press the fixing section of the outlet water backup heater thermistor (R12T) to pull out this thermistor.

* Door 3 is the hydraulic compartment door.

3


5–21


1

2.16

Removal of Flow Switch

3

Procedure



■

Remove door 2* and door

3** in accordance with the removal procedure for side panels.

■ Drain water from the

Hydraulic module: close both shutoff valves, then open the drain valve.

1 Unscrew the flow switch nut.

Shut off valves

2 Pull out the flow switch upward.

3 Remove the flow switch connector X4A from PCB

A11P.

55

* Door 2 is the door for the electric parts of the hydraulic module.

** Door 3 is the door for the hydraulic compartment.

5–22



2.17

Removal of Backup Heater

Procedure


Procedure Step

■


3* in accordance with the removal procedure for outside panels.


Hydraulic module: close both shutoff valves and then open the drain valve.

1 Disconnect the Backup heater power cable from connector X5M and the ground cable from the ground terminal near

X5M.

X5M

GND

K5M

X2Y/1 & X2Y/2

2 Disconnect the thermal protector (Q1L) and thermal fuse (F1T) from connectors X2Y/1, X2Y/2 and contactor K5M.

screws

3 Unscrew the two water piping nuts connected to the backup heater.

screws

4 Unscrew the flexible connection from the pressure gage.

5 Unscrew the four screws fixing the backup heater.

Pressure gage connection

Water piping nuts

6 Disconnect the backup heater wiring from terminal X5M in the hydraulic compartment switchbox.

7 Pull out the backup heater.

* Door 2 is the door of the hydraulic compartment electrical parts.

** Door 3 is the hydraulic compartment door.

1

3


5–23


2.18

Removal of Pump

1

3

55

Procedure


Procedure Step

■


3** in accordance with the removal procedure for side panels.



Disconnect the pump wiring

1 Disconnect the brown wire from the lower terminal of relay K4M.

2 Disconnect the blue wire from connector X2M position 20.

3 Disconnect the earth wire from the earth connection next to X5M.

4 Remove the cable from the cable guides.

Removal of the pump

1 Unscrew both water piping nuts fixing the pump.

2 Remove the pump.

Water piping nuts

5–24

* Door 2 is the hydraulic compartment electrical parts door.

**Door 3 is the hydraulic compartment door.



2.19

Removal of Expansion Vessel

Procedure


Procedure Step

■

Remove door 3* in accordance with the removal procedure for side panels.



1 Remove the flow switch in accordance with the flow switch removal procedure to prevent flow switch damage.

2 Unscrew the flexible hose connected to the pressure gage from the expansion vessel.

3 Unscrew the locking nut on the valve of the expansion vessel.

4 Unscrew the 2 nuts on the bottom of the expansion vessel.

5 Lift out the expansion vessel.


1

3


5–25


2.20

Removal of Plate Heat Exchanger

1

3

55

Procedure


Procedure Step

■

Remove door 3* in accordance with the removal procedure for side panels.

■

■

Drain water from the


Execute pump down of the compressor module according to the pump down procedure on

page 2-14.

1 Unscrew the two screws holding the plate heat exchanger.

Brazing

Points

Removing the side panel is not required, but will improve workability.

Screws

2 Disconnect the water piping from the plate heat exchanger by brazing.

Brazing

3 Disconnect the refrigerant piping from the plate heat exchanger by brazing.

4 Lift out the plate heat exchanger.


5–26


ESIE08-02

Index

1

Index

Numerics

7H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–44

80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–43

81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–43

8H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–47

A

A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–42

AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–48

C

C0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–51

C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–43

Check check for Excessive Refrigerant Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–121

check for Factors Causing Wet Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–122

check fan motor connector output (No. 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–108

thermistor resistance (No. 06). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–112

checking clogged points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–116

,

3–123

,

3–124

expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–109

fan motor signal line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–117

fan speed pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–118

installation condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–108

power transistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–119

thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–110

components functional diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–39

PCB layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–97

piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–45

switch box layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–55

wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–67

control outdoor unit fan speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–59

D

diameters, pipe connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–43

dimensions

E(B\D)(H\L)Q* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–4

EKHWE150~300V3/Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–12

EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–10

EKHWSU150~300V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWS*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–16

k

1–18

EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWSU* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–19

EKSWW150~300V3/Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EKSWWU150~300V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–8

k

1–14

Discharge Pipe Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–47

Discharge Pipe Temperature Protection Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–58

3

4

5

i

1

3

4

5

ii

ESIE08-02

E

E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–56

,

3–57

,

3–59

E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–62

E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–64

E8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–67

EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–52

EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–42

electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–25

error codes compressor compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–55

hydraulic compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–41

overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–28

system malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–93

evaluation abnormal high pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–114

abnormal low pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–115

Expansion Valve Control at Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–56

F

F3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–70

fault-diagnosis by remote controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–25

,

3–26

functional diagrams complete system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–40

electrical connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–42

G

General Expansion Valve Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–57

General Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–44

H

H0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–72

HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–43

High Pressure Protection Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–46

I

installation space

E(B\D)(H\L)Q* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–6

Inverter Cooling Fin Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–51

L

L3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–77

L4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–79

L5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–81

,

3–83

,

3–85

,

3–87

,

3–89

,

3–90

,

3–91

locating functional diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–39

PCB layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–97

piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–45

switch box layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–55

wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–67

M

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

5–4

Index

ESIE08-02

Index

1

O

Oil Recovery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–54

operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–23

preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–4

operation range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

4–41

,

4–42

,

4–43

Outdoor Unit Fan Speed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–60

outlook

E(B\D)(H\L)Q* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–4

EKHWE150~300V3/Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–12

EKHWS150~300*V3/Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–10

EKHWSU150~300V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWS*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–16

k

1–18

EKSOLHWAV1~EKHWSU* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–19

EKSWW150~300V3/Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EKSWWU150~300V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–8

k

1–14

P

PCB layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–97

physical limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–23

piping

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*V3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–46

E(B\D)(H\L)Q*W1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–48

EKSOLHWAV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–52

EKSWWU150~300V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–50

Pressure Difference Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–52

procedure of self-diagnosis by remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Protection Control by Overall Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–24

k

2–50

R

Refrigerant Cylinders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

i–ix

Refrigerant R410A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

i–vii

regulating functions expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–55

frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–41

S

Safety Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

i–ii

self-diagnosis by wired remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–25

,

3–26

service space

E(B\D)(H\L)Q* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–6

EKSWW150~300V3/Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EKSWWU150~300V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–8

k

1–14

Service Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

i–x

specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–25

Starting Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–42

Suction Pipe Superheat Protection Control (Heating Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

2–48

switch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–55

T

technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–25

thermistors checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–110

troubleshooting additional checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–107

general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–3

3

4

5

iii

3

4

5

1

ESIE08-02

U

U0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–94

U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–96

,

3–102

,

3–104

,

3–105

U4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

3–99

W

wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k

1–67

iv

Index